Home
Chapter 1
Contents
1. 73 Focal Lengths iiinn 141 Four Camera Option 16 26 see camera Tour 19 Frame Averaging esss 65 144 number of frames 65 Frame Buffer 53 54 frame numbers NEEN 34 resolution and size 53 Frame Buffer Size uk 54 Frame Comment 107 Frame Grabber uk 15 analog ter een erar enter 19 device driver eese 19 22 digital option 18 19 four camera option 17 installation 15 19 22 installation errors sses 23 Frame Size ener RE 53 Frame Summing eene 144 FSStOD s hee EDI Ea renis 21 Gain Correction serorea iaaa esas 65 disable 5 pana aaea 38 enuficiator 5 eio esee OE eei 38 generate gain sirasini aas 38 e CIE 39 oio 38 39 SVG sicot cote Fe eR E EE een tener 39 Whats aeeaiei trai ea aai eisiaa 38 Gamma Correchon 56 Gauss EE 71 135 correlation of TI 137 deviation of Tt 137 major minor cene 136 whole beam eene 136 Generate Lei eege deed 38 EI HIE 177 EI WEE ER Hardware Zooming sssssssserrrrrereersrrn 111 ele el TEE 73 142 bucket size eeeee 74 115 display depth Nk 115 display window eee 115 printilig 2 5 pie cossic eost ENEE 44 Scrollit1g 22 re tah dert EC fe cer pe 143 stabilit
2. 70 lgl 49 51 D4 sigma aiii nee 132 display 5 5 2 5 rr Ere E iie 51 elliptical eee 71 134 knife edje enm enhn 133 knife edge 4 eec nen 70 WE Ve BEE 69 LBA PC percent of energy 70 134 percent of peak sesssseeeerrreens 70 134 top h at z tenet nete reete Oo cine 71 BOOP ET 98 Black Level 61 126 129 154 Gamera M 60 Bucket Size 73 115 142 Camera le Me WEE 152 analog 19 53 56 61 103 112 auto exposure eeeeeeeese 62 103 blacklevel eeeeenereeeeen 61 Calibration oe erect 102 el IR 58 122 configuration ses 21 22 37 COMNMECUONS duu coder etes etre eet 148 control cable kA 19 26 digital ei 12 124 148 154 digital camera option 22 digital option seseeeeees 18 19 TOS ein sexies texere Se REEL EIER 22 four camera option 12 16 19 26 60 65 M 38 60 61 Eu WT 56 hazards EE 21 installation NEEN 15 integration EN 123 interlaced eere 119 Jp 57 live Video x iiie rti irs 59 o je eR 111 pixel bits rien eti Siria teni 55 IER EEN 56 power SUD 19 25 pyrocam Io ee eec cece eeeee teen teen eee 22 27 29 Dyrocam AT spiran iaat aa n 18 Elle TB 53 Selection gef REES earn rn zoe renis 52 SOUUP DEE 21 SHUE e
3. eeeeeeeeeee 51 AUTEURE 129 percent Maranon inak 131 Ee 49 toolbar sui ESA exe 49 50 top hat ecce et Retro od 138 ultracal issues eeeeeeees 129 Operator s Manual Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 277 ASI EE 35 Attenuation sicions rennes 12 21 129 Beam attenuation seiri aaaeaii A 21 Beam Colors irte neve 78 manipulating sssrinin 94 threshold etr 81 Beam Display eee 75 3D 2D button 76 re ord Dat goto c 81 color palettes ENEE 78 eo qol eR 83 e E ER Crosshatch uk ER current and reference 79 ele E ER cursor orientation cccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 76 dialog De cer eite teg ten cen 109 dialog HOX siesena aaa tenue 116 OXPOMING zinien a a eiai 35 aa EEN 83 hardware z0o0omimg 111 multiple plots ANERER 79 origin location eeeeeeeeeeese 77 palette creation eeeeesses 94 panning and ZOOMING 111 DIINCING DP 44 rotate amp Dt 84 set reference source 37 soft zooming esee 113 thresholds cscs ninh 81 toolbar ex act Giese Nets 85 Ve dE 106 wire dent 84 wire frame eeeeeeeneenn enn 83 Z AXIS scale eene 78 Beam Display Window 106 Beam Dresentation 129 Beam VIEW escias nnr ERR Ere er Tren 76 Beam Width sek 132 4 sigma method 69 90 10 knife edge
4. 2D You must have both Cursors and Cursor Profiles enabled for this feature to operate The Current beam alone will appear in the display A second profile drawn in Lt Gray will appear in the display This profile is a projection of the Current beam minus the Reference beam All projections are made from the Cursor positions 3D The Current beam will be displayed in Red The Current minus the Reference will be displayed in Blue If cursors are enabled they will follow the contour of the Current beam 3 2 7 7 3 Current and Current Reference 2D You must have both Cursors and Cursor Profiles enabled for this feature to operate The Current beam alone will appear in the display A second profile drawn in Lt Gray will Operator s Manual 79 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 appear in the display This profile is a projection of the Current beam plus the Reference beam All projections are made from the Cursor positions 3D The Current beam will be displayed in Red The Current plus the Reference will be displayed in Blue If cursors are enabled they will follow the contour of the Current beam 3 2 7 7 4 Reference Alone 2D You must have both Cursors and Cursor Profiles enabled for this feature to operate The Reference beam alone will appear in the display A second profile drawn in Lt Gray will appear in the display This profile is a projection of the otherwise unseen Current beam All projections are made from the Cursor position
5. Elliptical Gauss Fit whole beam Gauss Fit major axis Gauss Fit minor axis Top Hat whole beam NA wf WN Top Hat major axis Operator s Manual 168 LBA PC 8 Top Hat minor axis 9 Divergence This is the same order as listed in sections 3 1 15 through 3 1 19 above under individual results properties Each flag will contain one of the following values 1 Fail 0 No Test 1 Pass All results values will be loaded into the array all the time Results not enabled in the LBA PC will be zero Note there are three sets of Gauss Fit and Top Hat results Either the whole beam section or the major and minor sections will contain valid results depending on how the LBA PC is configured 9 3 2 Methods 9 3 2 1 LoadConfig This method causes the LBA PC to load the specified configuration file This method takes a single parameter that is the file name of the LBA PC configuration file you wish to be loaded The file name must contain the full path and file name to the LBA PC configuration file You cannot load a configuration while the LBA PC is collecting frames during Ultracal or during Auto Exposure Be very sure the specified file name is a valid accessible LBA PC configuration file There are many reasons why the LoadConfig may fail most of which cause the LBA PC to display a message on screen If LBA PC displays a message this method will not return until you respond to the message Reasons
6. The third category of errors are either fatal or result from some local user action These errors cannot occur because of remote commands This third category of errors is always displayed in a message box on the screen and requires user action before continuing See the ERR specification for the specific errors included in each error category Example of a category 3 error Operator clicks START Host sends LDC Host sends STB END LBA PC sends STB ZHOS END Operator s Manual 207 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Host sends ERR P END LBA PC sends 4 LDC cannot load config while running END Operator s Manual 208 LBA PC 10 9 SERVICE REQUEST 10 9 1 Service Request Response One of the provisions of the GPIB hardware bus is the ability to signal the host controller when an event has occurred Under the direction of the host controller the LBA 300PC can assert the SRQ line when new data is available new results is available a task has been completed or an error has occurred Under the IEEE standard the controller performs a poll of the devices to determine who requested service and why A serial poll automatically clears the SRQ The LBA 300PC contains six registers that pertain to the SRQ operation The function of four of these registers is fully explained in the IEEE 488 2 standard We have modified the definition of some of the bit flags to be more applicable to the operation of the LBA 300PC and ad
7. END 10 6 1 2 RDD Read Frame Transfer To download a frame of data from the LBA PC you must send the RDD command along with any optional parameter that identifies which frame you are requesting to transfer The frame parameter is optional and is numbered from 1 to n n is the number of frames in the frame buffer Frame 1 is the Gain Frame 0 is the Reference frame and frames 1 to n are data captured in the frame buffer If you do not send the frame number parameter then the current frame is used The frame data is sent as a modified IEEE 488 2 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Response Data The number of bytes in a frame is two times the number of pixels For example a 128 X 120 frame consists of 30 720 bytes a 256 X 240 frame consists of 122 880 bytes etc Each pixel is a sixteen bit two s complement fixed point value having the form siiiiiii ifffffff LBA 300PC 256 to 255 9921875 siiiiiii iiifffff LBA 400PC 1024 to 1023 96875 siiiiiii iiiiifff LBA 500PC 4096 to 4095 875 siiiiiii ifffffff LBA 708PC 256 to 255 9921875 siiiiiii iiifffff LBA 710PC 1024 to 1023 96875 siiiiiii iiiiifff LBA 712PC 4096 to 4095 875 siiiiiii UI LBA 714PC 16384 to 16383 5 Where S sign bit i integer f fraction Use the FST command to determine the specific fixed point format of pixels in a frame The PixelBits parameter specifies the number of integer bits The PixelBitsFraction parameter specifies the number of fraction bits To
8. Server LBA PC Computer To enable remote access to the LBA PC computer follow the steps in the section below for your operating system 9 4 1 1 1 Windows 2000 1 Start DCOMCNFG From the Start menu select Run type dcomcnfg and click OK 2 Enable DCOM On the Default Properties tab select the Enable Distributed COM on this computer check box 3 Configure LBA PC ActiveX server On the Applications tab scroll down until you see LbapcActiveX EXE Click on LbapcActiveX EXE then click the Properties button On the Identity tab select the Interactive user radio button 4 Configure access from the remote computer There are two ways to configure access to the LBA PC ActiveX server i Default Security Changing the default security will affect all DCOM applications From the main DCOMCNFG window click on the Default Security tab Edit the Default Access Permissions and Default Launch Permissions to allow access from the remote computer ii Application Security From the LbapcActiveX EXE properties click on the Security tab Enable and edit the custom access and launch permissions to allow access from the remote computer 9 4 1 1 2 Windows XP 1 Start DCOMCNFG From the Start menu select Run type dcomcnfg and click OK Operator s Manual 173 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 2 Enable DCOM Click the plus symbol next to Component Services then the plus symbol next to Computers Right click on My Computer a
9. These camera types can produce 1x high resolution images The video output from each laser pulse will occur during the next frame outputting immediately after the laser trigger arrives 5 1 5 Type Video Trigger The Video Trigger mode is designed to be used with lasers that cannot be externally triggered nor can they provide an external trigger output to the LBA Since this mode is so easy to use and requires no connection between the laser and the LBA it has become the method of choice for almost all pulsed laser applications When you select the Video Trigger mode a Video Trigger Level menu item will become active You must program the Video Trigger Level to the raw pixel threshold value that will be used to detect the presence of the laser pulse The choices are shown in counts and represent 1 16 1 8 Operator s Manual 121 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 and 1 2 the maximum possible counts based on the number of A to D conversion bits For example If you are using an LBA 712PC frame grabber a 12 bit digitizer you have the following possible Video Trigger Level choices 256 512 1024 2048 If you set the level to 512 the LBA will capture a laser beam pulse as soon as it detects a pixel raw energy value of 512 or greater Unless your camera is very noisy we recommend that you use the minimum level as a starting value 5 1 5 1 CCD Frame and Interline Transfer Cameras Interlaced When the LBA is running each digitized pixe
10. Figure 35 Operator s Manual 86 LBA PC 3 2 9 1 1 Start Button The Start Button begins data collection However if the LBA PC is not collecting data in the background then clicking this button will not result in data being plotted In order for Beam Stability to work the user must make sure that LBA PC is open and collecting data in the background 3 2 9 1 2 Pause Button m The Pause button stops the data graphing but doesn t reset the graphs thus data is preserved from one pause operation to the next Clicking on the Start button after Pause will append data to the graph 3 2 9 1 3 Reset Button 5 The Reset button will throw away all data in the charts and begin as though the Beam Stability window was just opened If the user desires to Print a run of data it must be done before the Reset button is pressed The text in the Notes dialog will not be cleared by the Reset operation 3 2 9 1 4 Printer Setup Button Z This is the standard Windows Printer Setup dialog box It allows the user to set up the printer for the desired results 3 2 9 1 5 Print Button l The Print Button causes the entire Beam Stability window to be printed out The program prints in a what you see is what you get manner The Beam Stability print operation will not print the LBA PC beam graphic Printing LBA PC beam graphics must be done form within the LBA PC application 3 2 9 1 6 Notes Below the Main Controls is a Notes area The user c
11. Results Print results enable SeparatePages P Print beam and results on separate pages CurrentOnly P Print current frame only StartFrame I First frame to print 1 to n n is the frame buffer size default current frame NumberFrames I Number of frames to print 0 all frames 1 to n n is the frame buffer size 2DdarkBackground P 2D beam print dark background A 5 2 Options Menu A 5 2 1 APT set aperture configuration APT configuration APT _ Shape of user drawn aperture 0 none 1 circle 2 square 3 ellipse 4 rectangle CenterXLoc IF x location in world coordinates Eme reegen mer nara atin wet wore mer James DisplayShape L Shape of computed display aperture 0 none 1 circle Operator s Manual 224 LBA PC 2 square 3 ellipse 4 rectangle AutoAperture B Auto aperture enable A 5 2 2 CAM set camera configuration A path may be included in the File parameter If a path is included in the File parameter then the path where the LBA PC looks for CAM files will also be changed If a File is specified the current settings for Resolution FrameBufferSize NumberFrames and Lens are not changed If a File is specified then this file is read first Parameters such as Pixel Scale Pixel Units Gamma amp Lens can be specified to override the default CAM file parameters If File or Resolution is specified that i
12. VideoTriggerLevel L Video trigger level for camera 1 0 1 16 maximum pixel value 1 1 8 maximum pixel value 2 1 4 maximum pixel value 3 1 2 maximum pixel value VideoTriggerLevel2 Video trigger level for cameras 2 to 4 VideoTriggerLevel3 EE Yideomniggerlevek 0 1 16 maximum pixel value 1 1 8 maximum pixel value 2 1 4 maximum pixel value 3 1 2 maximum pixel value E Summing Sum frames enable SummingFrames I Number of frames to sum 2 to 256 Average B Average frames enable AverageFrames I Number of frames to average 2 to 256 ReferenceSubtract B Reference subtract enable ReferenceSource L Reference source 0 frame 1 gauss 2 auto gauss Convolution L Convolution enable 0 none 1 LPF1 3x3 2 LPF1 5x5 3 LPF1 7x7 4 LPF2 3x3 5 LPF3 3x3 MaxFrameSize LI X Y maximum frame size based on camera and selected camera resolution ZoomIndex L Zoom level Depends on camera and camera resolution see ZOM and ZMM Operator s Manual 228 LBA PC Value Description NumZooms Maximum zoom index value CaptureLocation LI X Y upper left corner of capture area see PAN CaptureSize LI Width and height of frame These values are set via ZoomIndex CaptureResolution L Capture sample resolution 1 Full 1x 0 1x 1 2x 2 4x 3 8x 4 16x 5 32x This value is set via ZoomIndex A 5 2 4 COM set computations configuration COM configuration COM Type Val
13. 2 Ee EEN 24 CW do aen SNE d 119 delen deleted vies ee ee hee es 63 in 26 IDDUL A eege set Zeg eR Ee 13 ue 60 LBA PG 2 3 tii eet tore tte teri 118 ofer 26 OUEDUL ccce nire eere oo E a 13 Polarity EEN 63 DYFOCAINV cie eege eene ere 29 trigger out delay s s 63 DND 59 62 Operator s Manual Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 281 Indore E Eeer See 118 VIGGO EE 26 video trigger level 61 Rule Tell DEE 118 Tube Camera eere 120 Ultracal ce re MEL 128 digital Camera 154 ucc 103 enunciato WEE 102 four camera eeeeeeeeeee nennen 62 Hemes eer e 102 menu ACHO deriierceisrineeeiaia an 102 patent nece aae perenni a antes 128 Whats sde de redet eed Segen Sege 129 with auto expoeure AN 103 Ultracal js jug rond o iian a eerie 29 Video in 26 Virtual Memory eene 55 Wallpaper eire rnt wend 82 Weight Dette IDEE 13 SHIPPING geseis Ne 13 Whole Beam mt 136 dt 101 start stop ultracal 102 Windows display settings esee 20 Wire Density 2 3 3 3 oor LEE 84 Wire Frame sicoar onain tuere d Nee 83 performance SSUES esse 76 dl ten cedere eere ee vede ode es 83 wire dent 84 Wizard found new hardware 19 Write Protect frames gg eg tege Ad edd 67 Z AXIS Scale exe eret s 78 Zooming analog cameras eese 112 di
14. 5 4 1 Digital Camera Control Digital cameras often have a large number of control features The number and methods for controlling these features varies greatly from one manufacturer to another The basic control methods fall into two categories The oldest control method employs switches and dials located on the outside and inside of the camera More modern designs employ micro processors inside the camera that can control the operations via serial commands issued from your PC s serial port The manufactures of these cameras usually provide a camera control console application that must be run on your PC A few manufactures require you to write your own control application Some cameras have simple command protocols and can be controlled by typing commands into a simple terminal emulator program like Windows Hyper Terminal Most digital cameras will power up in a default mode of operation Some can have the default mode changed by the user Others will always start operating in one mode and the user must change it to the desired configuration every time power is restored The LBA PC camera files are very specific to how certain of these features are configured The camera file name will often include a reference to a critical feature Most often these critical settings concern the image format of the camera 5 4 1 1 Digital Camera Binning Effects Many digital cameras support electronic pixel binning This feature is usually used to increase the frame
15. A smaller percent of peak or larger percent of energy will include more pixels in the orientation calculation A larger percent of peak or smaller percent of energy will include fewer pixels Depending upon your laser beam this setting can have serious implications The Orientation is defined as the angle formed between the Major axis and the horizontal pointing to the right If the Major axis points above the horizontal the angle is positive below the horizontal is negative The Major and Minor axes are perpendicular to each other The Roundness result is the ratio of the computed beam widths The Minor smaller beam width is always divided by the Major larger to produce a result less than or equal to one Thus beams with Roundness values close to 1 000 are nearly circular To view the shape of the computed ellipse select Options Aperture go to Display Beam Width and select Ellipse 6 13 Gauss Fit The LBA PC can perform a least squares bivariate normal equation Gaussian equation fit using all of the data when doing a Whole beam fit Or it can perform two univariate normal equation fits using orthogonal Lines of data through the Centroid Location With the Elliptical results disabled the Gaussian fitter may be set to Disabled Whole Beam or X Y aligned With the Elliptical results enabled the choices are Disabled Whole Beam or Major Minor aligned The Gauss Fit results are displayed as follows Whole Beam
16. Expand the list box at the top then scroll down and select LbapcActiveX EXE Click OK Display the Diagram window On the Window menu select Show Diagram 4 Open a connect to the LBA PC ActiveX server On the Functions palette select Communications then select ActiveX then select Automation Open Place this VI on the diagram Connect a wire from LbapcX ILbapcActiveX node to the input Automation Refnum terminal of the Automation Open VI The output Automation Refnum terminal is the reference for all LBA PC ActiveX server properties methods and events 5 To access a LBA PC ActiveX property right click on the LbapcX ILbapcActiveX node select Create select Property and then select the desired property from the list Connect a wire from the output Automation Refnum terminal to the reference terminal of the property node 6 To call a LBA PC ActiveX method right click on the LbapcX ILbapcActiveX node select Create select Method and then select the desired property from the list Connect a wire from the output Automation Refnum terminal to reference terminal of the method node 7 Seethe Events section of this document and the OnNew examples for information on how to use LBA PC ActiveX events in LabVIEW Example VI s are packaged in LbapcActiveX llb which can be found in the Activex Examples LabVIEW directory under the LBA PC installation directory The LabView examples were developed and tested using LabVIEW Professional 6i Ple
17. GPIB address Up button Left button Right button Output 1 Error out Bottom button On uU KRW Ne Error in B 2 13 Move Pan vi Description Move pan based on a click of one of four buttons Input GPIB address Up button Left button Right button Output 1 Error out Down button On Ui A U Ne Error in B 2 14 Read Basic Cursor info vi Description Read cursor current location and it s value Input Output 1 GPIB address 1 X Location 2 Error in 2 Y Location 3 Pixel value on the cursor 4 Delta from cross hair 5 Error out B 2 15 Read Cursor Column Row vi Description Read cursor row data and column data Operator s Manual 269 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Input Output 1 GPIB address 1 Row data array 2 Error in 2 Row of elements 3 Column data array 4 Column of elements 5 Error out B 2 16 Read Divergence Results vi Description Read peak and divergence x y values in an array Input Output 1 GPIB address 1 Value array 2 Error in 2 Error out B 2 17 Restore Configuration vi Description Restore a configuration file Input 1 GPIB address 2 CFG file name string Output 1 Error out 3 Error in B 2 18 Results SRE vi Description Enable Service Requests for results Input Output 1 GPIB address 1 Error out 2 Error in B 2 19 Run Stop vi Description Make LBA PC run stop Operat
18. GaussCorrelationMax Gauss Correlation Gauss Correlation Major or Gauss Correlation X maximum Otol GaussDeviationMin Gauss Deviation Gauss Deviation Major or Gauss Deviation X minimum 0 to 1e12 GaussDeviationMax Gauss Deviation Gauss Deviation Major or Gauss Deviation X maximum 0 to 1e12 GaussHeightMinor Bo Min Max test enable GaussHeightMinorMin Gauss Height Minor or Gauss Height Y minimum 1e12 to 1e12 GaussHeightMinorMax Gauss Height Minor or Gauss Height Y maximum 1e12 to 1e12 GaussCorrelationMinorMin Gauss Correlation Minor or Gauss Correlation X minimum 0 to 1 GaussCorrelationMinorMax F Gauss Correlation Minor or Gauss Correlation X maximum 0 to 1 GaussDeviationMinor BB Tun Max test MinMaxtestenable d SE Deviation Minor or Gauss Deviation Y minimum Operator s Manual 238 LBA PC GaussDeviationMinorMax F Gauss Deviation Minor or Gauss Deviation Y maximum 0 to 1e12 A 5 3 5 pass fail top hat configuration TophatFluence B B Min Max test enable TophatFluenceMin F Tophat Fluence or Tophat Fluence X minimum 1e12 to 1e12 TophatFluenceMax F Tophat Fluence or Tophat Fluence X maximum 1e12 to 1e12 TophatMean Min Max test enable TophatMeanMin F Tophat Mean or Tophat Mean X minimum 1e12 to 1e12 TophatMeanMax F Tophat Mean or Tophat Mean X maximum 1e12 to 1e12 TophatDeviationMin F Tophat Deviation or Tophat Deviation X
19. If the output from your digital camera is in a signed two s compliment data format connect the sign bit to the bit just above the cameras MSB data bit The Pixel Bits entry should be a negative value for signed data For example If your data is a 12 bit signed two s compliment format enter a 12 for the Pixel Bits At the present time 16 bit cameras are supported as 15 bit devices VD15 is not usable If you are connecting a 16 bit camera connect the 15 MSB s to VDO through VD14 COM A number of signal common or ground connections should be made between your camera and the LBA Although not required for operation an outer case to case shield connection is also recommended The above connections are the minimum requirements for successful interfacing of a digital camera to the LBA PC The following additional signals are outputs from the LBA 400 500PC models that provide control for an electronic shutter if your camera is so equipped SHT LBA 400 500 ONLY These three signal outputs are available to control an electronic shutter For these signals to become operational the Shutter check box must be checked You can enter the Shutter speeds in the supplied dialog box Be sure to save the camera configuration into a cam file once you ve completed these entries RST LBA 400 500 ONLY This signal output is reserved and has no function at this time Special Jumper Cutting Requirements LBA 400 500 ONLY Special circumstances
20. If you disable the Aperture in either the Area or Line Aperture modes the above setup will automatically revert to Data Operator s Manual 71 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Hints Use Drawn apertures and avoid Auto apertures when making Top Hat measurements Use Percent of Peak as your beam width method Typical Percent of Peak Clip settings are 50 80 and 90 Refer to the Top Hat section in Chapter 6 for additional details 3 2 6 8 Divergence Two methods are provided for making divergence measurements of your laser beam The preferred technique is the Focal Length method The Focal Length method can produce a valid result anywhere in the laser beam path and only requires one measurement A second technique referred to as the Far Field method is also provided The Far Field method is only valid if you are sampling your laser in the far field It will give incorrect results if you are measuring your laser in the near field The Far Field method requires you to make two sets of beam width measurements a known distance apart See Divergence in Chapter 6 for details regarding how these two methods are computed 3 2 6 8 1 Focal Length Divergence Measurements The Focal Length method requires you to bring your laser beam to a focus using either a focusing lens or mirror You must place your camera detector at the focal point of the focusing optic One half to one meter focal lengths are typical as they will keep the focused spot
21. Rev 4 10 5 Click on the Advanced tab make sure that Automatic Serial Polling is not checked 6 Click OK NOTE It is possible for the LBA PC to generate many service requests per second and the NI 488 2M default is to queue service requests For these reasons we suggest you disable Automatic Serial Polling on both the LBA PC and the host controller E PI GPIB Configuration x CCE Og legug DI GPIB Configuration x KEE pte o d Operator s Manual 178 LBA PC 10 4 Command Formats and Responses Commands to the LBA PC will not normally generate a response back to the host controller unless the command e Changes remote local mode e Isaquery e Initiates an operation that produces results e Generates an error 10 4 1 IEEE 488 1 Command Support The LBA PC in combination with an appropriate National Instruments GPIB board conforms to the IEEE 488 1 standard according to the following Subset Codes SH1 AH1 T6 L4 SR1 RL2 PPO DC1 DTO E2 CO These Subset Codes are defined in the IEEE 488 1 standard and describe interface capabilities of the LBA PC The following multiple line interface message commands are supported by the LBA PC GTL Go To Local 0x01 When the LBA PC detects the GTL message it returns to local command mode LLO Local Lockout 0x11 When the LBA PC detects the LLO message it enters what is called the lockout state This is equivalent to entering the
22. The size and arrangement of the convolution coefficients in a convolution kernel determine the type of area transform that will be applied to the image data The figure below shows a 3x3 neighborhood and convolution kernel Input Image Convolution Processing Weighted Sum Calculation 3 R Kx E n l 3x3 Pixel Neighborhood H is the pixel being Convolution replaced Kernal New value for each pixel is placed into the output image Output Image Figure 58 The tables below give the convolution coefficients K values for some of the included low pass spatial filters Operator s Manual 146 LBA PC 140 140 10 146 118 16 140 1 5 1410 18 1 18 1410 1 10 1 10 116 1 8 16 LPF 1 3X3 LPF 2 3X3 LPF 3 3X3 LPF 1 5X5 LPF 1 7X7 Low Pass Spatial Filter Convolution Coefficients Figure 59 Operator s Manual 147 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Chapter 7 DIGITAL CAMERA OPTION 7 1 Digital Camera Option This section will discuss how to interface a Digital Camera with an LBA 400 500 700 708 710 712 714PC D equipped with the Digital Camera Option This option is identified by the presence of a D in the title bar model designation The frame grabber will also be provided with a short ribbon cable adapter that plugs into the frame grabber and has a 50 pin connector attached to a PC mounting bracket 7 2 I O Connections The digital camera connector is a 50 pin standard SCSI 2 style however the circuit
23. The LBA PC does not support the IEEE 488 2 specification of sending multiple commands separated by semicolons Each command must be sent separately and terminated by asserting the EOI line with the last byte sent The following are some typical formats for command and response transmissions cmd cmd cmd cmd rsp rsp Where CCC key Operator s Manual CCC END CCC END CCC _ keyzvalue END CCC key value key value key value END CCC _ key value key value key value END CCC _ FrameNumber f dn n DAB DAB END Precedes a 488 2 common command Precedes a LBA PC command Three character command code case is ignored Query character to illicit a response ASCII SPACE character 0x20 Command dependent parameter 180 LBA PC value Value assigned to key DAB AEND 8 bit data byte in binary format Indicates that EOI is asserted with the last byte sent 10 4 4 Establishing Remote Control Upon starting execution the LBA PC initializes itself in Local Mode The LBA PC enters Remote Mode when it receives a REM command or is addressed to listen when the REN line is true The LBA PC responds with REM when it receives the REM command There is no response when the REN line is used to enter Remote Mode The LBA PC enters Local Mode when it receives the LOC command or the REN line is false The LBA PC responds with LOC when it receives the LOC command There is
24. This VI provides a basic set of push button operations including Print Write Protect Reset and Camera Shutter control The Reset button will cause the LBA PC application to restore the last saved configuration file Operator s Manual 275 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Operator s Manual 276 LBA PC INDEX KUER 75 82 106 dperture iei ei eee mrs 50 beam profiles eeeeeeeeeeee 81 DUON Er 76 COIOIS Hm 78 for e 82 so 76 82 lens orientation sseeerrrneerrreeens 57 multiple plots ENNEN 79 o elc A 77 palettes coin ere iiri teni 78 performance eese nennen 76 printing cerei ee trn etes 45 toolbar ne eere reru 85 ER EE 78 EIERE 75 83 106 aperttle c ioo eret 49 DUON zc ioci deer add een an rias 76 eo ocn 78 Lee Te 78 ee E UE ER Crosshatch e kregen dari ER CHIESA edel eenegen es 76 multiple plots RENE 79 palettes oce ctim diri tege 78 rotate amp tilt siiin 114 nelle 85 wire density RENE 84 wireframe eeeeeeee nennen 83 E EE 78 Analog Camera see camera analog 19 Aperture iii ee tins 129 133 EE 71 138 CU ien WEE 49 51 69 131 dialog DOX perte 116 display amp define s 49 displayed ET 49 drag and drop sssssssssrssesesrsrrrnrnerennsnnns 50 GEFaWHDz ceci ceterae 49 50 131 NING D 71 138 lOCatiOr rie eterna 200 205 manipulation
25. Y 152 END Operator s Manual 203 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 The following describes how to set the pan window to the lower right corner of the detector In this example the lower right corner of the detector is at 744 512 The frame data size is 32 X 30 The capture resolution value is 2 so we must multiply the data size by 27 4 Therefore the actual size of the capture window is 128 X 120 To put the capture window in the lower right corner we subtract the capture window size from the lower right limits 744 128 616 and 512 120 392 Host sends PNW END LBA PC sends PNW UpperLeft 112 32 Lowerkight 744 512 END Host sends PAN END LBA PC sends PAN CaptureLoc 224 64 CaptureSize 32 30 CaptureResolution Z END Host sends PAN X 616 Y 392 END 10 7 3 Frame Coordinates Frame coordinates are used for the frame data stored in the frame buffer Frame coordinates are dependent only on the frame size Frame coordinates are always positive with the origin in the upper left corner Frame coordinates are specified with column and row values Column values increase to the right and are numbered from 1 to the frame width Row values increase going down and are numbered from 1 to the frame height Frame coordinates are used in the RCC and RCR commands to specify which column and row to download Although RCC and RCR allow you to download data from the current cursor column and row there is
26. and the Set Reference action item in the Files menu and the set reference toolbar button See Set Reference for further details The Set Reference Source edit control allows you to select what type of data will be loaded into the reference frame Using this feature with the four camera option will cause the reference frame to be subtracted from the input of each camera It does not discriminate between camera selections Operator s Manual 65 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Note This edit control is repeated in the Beam Display dialog box and is available in the Display Toolbar e If the Set Reference Source item is set to Current Frame the data in the currently viewed frame will be copied to the Reference frame e If the Set Reference Source is set to Last Gauss and the Gauss Fit item in the Computations dialog box is checked then the beam profile resulting from a computed Gaussian fit to the currently viewed frame will be copied to the Reference frame e If the Set Reference Source is set to Auto Gauss and the Gauss Fit item in the Computations dialog box is checked then the beam profile resulting from a computed Gaussian fit to newly acquired frames will be automatically copied to the Reference frame In this mode setting a reference frame manually does not make any sense because the next frame brought into view will automatically update the contents of the reference frame Note In the last two examples if the Gauss
27. aperture will not appear in 3D displays If your beam is an off axis ellipse or rectangle be sure to turn on Elliptical in the Options Computations dialog box Otherwise all drawn beam widths will be computed and displayed on the X and Y axes Operator s Manual 51 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 3 2 3 Camera selection and display resolution The Camera dialog box is where you make the following selections e Identify current Camera type or Create a New Camera type e Select the maximum image Resolution e Select how large the Frame Buffer will be e Select the Sync Source of your camera e Modify the Pixel Scale if needed e Apply Gamma correction if needed e Choose the Lens mode if your camera is so equipped 3 2 3 1 Camera type selection Find your camera Camera types are saved in lt camera gt cam files Camera files contain setup information that will allow the LBA PC to operate correctly with the specified camera Included with the LBA PC installation is a group of common lt camera gt cam type files These files include most cameras that will be used with the LBA and apply to camera operation without a lens i e the camera s detector alone determines the pixel scale These files are write protected so that you will not be able to accidentally delete or modify them To permit easy identification these write protected camera files will have a tilde symbol included as part of their file name Click on the
28. the eyes and skin due to laser radiation 1 5 1 Optical Radiation Hazards With almost any camera used with the LBA PC the optical radiation at the camera sensor is low enough to be considered relatively harmless However usage of this instrument may require the operator to work in the optical path itself where exposure to hazards may be sufficient to warrant the use of protective equipment Unless the laser s optical path is enclosed at least to the point where the beam is attenuated for use with the camera system the operator should be protected against accidental exposure Exposure to personnel other than the operator must also be considered Exposure hazards include reflected radiation as well as the direct beam When working with an unenclosed beam path it is advisable to do so with the laser not operating or operating at reduced power levels Whenever there is risk of dangerous exposure protective eye shields and clothing should be used 1 5 2 Electrical Hazards The LBA PC utilizes only low voltages derived from the PCI bus in the host PC computer therefore it posses no risk of electrical shock When installing or removing the LBA PC frame grabber card the power to the computer should always be disconnected The computer should always be operated with its covers in place and in accordance with its manufacture s recommendations Your computer should always be operated with a properly grounded AC power cord If your camera
29. 126 120 CaptureResolution 2 EnergyOfBeamn 0 000e 00 EnergyOfFrame 0 000e 00 EnergyUnits 2 AC 1 RS 0 GC 0 CommentLine This is a test shot WriteProtect 0 END The following example describes how to set a frame comment and write protect frame number 52 Host sends Operator s Manual FST 199 Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 LBA PC FrameNumber 52 CommentLine This will appear in the title bar WriteProtect 1 END 10 6 3 PFS Pass Fail Status To retrieve the current pass fail status you must send the PFS command The LBA PC responds by repeating PFS followed by a key value parameter for each value that has pass fail testing enabled The key is an ASCII text string identical to the label displayed in the left hand column of the results window The value is a boolean where 0 equals fail and 1 equals pass The following example describes how the host controller retrieves the current pass fail testing status Total Peak Centroid X and Centroid Y are being tested Total passed Peak failed Centroid X failed Centroid Y passed Host sends PFS LBA PC sends PFS Total 1 Peak 0 Centroid X 0 Centroid 1 END 10 7 COORDINATE SYSTEMS 10 7 1 Spatial Coordinates The visible spatial coordinate system of the LBA PC is called world coordinates World coordinates are used for computed centroid location and peak location aperture location cursor and crosshair location a
30. 185 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 10 6 Transfer Commands Transfer commands allow you to do the following Download raw data whole frames or data at the cursors Read write upload or download data files Set or query conditions associated with a frame Download computational results Download pass fail results Log data or results to the host The LBA PC uses the IEEE 488 2 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Response Data specification to send and receive binary data This specification has the form nd d DAB DAB Where ASCII pound symbol 0x23 n ASCII decimal digit ranging from 1 to 9 This value specifies the number of digit elements d d that follow d d DAB ASCII decimal integer that specifies the number of data bytes that follow 8 bit data byte The LBA PC also uses a modified form of the specification that has the form nd d DAW DAW Where ASCII pound symbol 0x23 n ASCII decimal digit ranging from 1 to 9 This value specifies the number of digit elements d d that follow d d DAW ASCII decimal integer that specifies the number of data words that follow Data Word Two 8 bit data bytes low byte followed by high byte The second form is used to emphasize the fact that each pixel is a 16 bit value 10 6 1 Transferring Raw Data You can download a frame of data from the LBA PC If you do not specify a specific frame then data from the current frame is trans
31. 2 Common Commands The following IEEE 488 2 common and related commands are supported by the LBA PC Identification LBA PC returns the string Spiricon LBA PC ssss v vv where ssss is the serial number of the board and v vv is the software version number ul Reset Causes the LBA PC to do the following Clear ELR ESR STB Stop running Restore last configuration saved or restored Clear Queues Clear output queue MAV and error and Status message queue EMAV Clear ELR ESR Registers STB Clear Status Clear ELR ESR STB Registers 300PC Event Set mask to enable event status Status Enable notification of corresponding bits set in ELR EM Return ELE contents 300PC Event Return and clear ELR contents s bit 7 Range Error flag set when host g attempts to set an input to a value that exceeds permissible range bit 6 Checksum Error flag set when locally computed checksum does not match transmitted value bit 5 unused bit 4 unused bit 3 unused bit 2 New Frame Available flag set each time the LBA PC has acquired a new frame of data bit 1 Results Available flag set each time the LBA PC completes a set of computations for a new frame of data bit 0 Results Pass Fail flag set whenever a pass fail alarm occurs while running Operator s Manual 212 LBA PC Event Status Sets mask to enable event status Enable notification of corresponding bits set in ESR Event Status Return and clear ESR con
32. 4 1 2 Digital Camera Zooming 113 4 4 2 Soft Zooming 113 4 4 3 Panning 113 4 4 4 Zooming and Panning Constraints 114 4 5 The Tilt Rotate Display Window 114 4 6 The Histogram Display Window 115 4 7 Shortcuts using the Mouse 116 4 7 1 Shortcut to the Computations Dialog Box 116 4 7 2 Shortcut to the Beam Display Dialog Box 116 4 7 3 Shortcut to the Capture Toolbar Dialog Box 116 4 7 4 Shortcut to the Capture Dialog Box 116 4 7 5 Shortcut to the Beam Display Toolbar Dialog Box 116 4 7 6 Shortcut to the Beam Display Dialog Box 116 4 7 7 Shortcut to the Aperture Dialog Box 116 Chapter 5 TRIGGERING TYPES amp CAPTURING METHODS 118 5 1 Triggering the LBA PC 118 5 1 1 A Note to Pulse Laser Users 118 5 1 2 Trigger Type CW 119 5 1 2 1 Interlaced Cameras o 119 5 1 2 2 Non interlaced Cameras 119 5 1 3 Type Trigger Out 119 5 1 3 1 Trigger Interval 119 5 1 3 2 Trigger Delay 120 5 1 3 3 CCD Frame Transfer Camera Interlaced 120 5 1 3 4 CCD Interline and Full Frame Transfer Camera Interlaced 120 5 1 3 5 CMOS Camera Interlaced y 120 5 1 3 6 Tube Camera Interlaced 120 5 1 3 7 CCD Frame and Interline Transfer Cameras Non interlaced Progressive scan 1 121 5 1 3 8 CMOS CID Line Transfer and Tube Cameras Non Interlaced Progressive scan 121 5 1 4 Type Trigger In 121 5 1 4 1 CCD Frame Transfer Camera Interlaced 121 5 1 4 2 CCD Interline and Full Frame Transfer Camera Interlaced 121 5 1 4 3 CCD Frame and Interline Transfer Cameras
33. 60 Hz can produce a trigger output pulse at a 60 Hz rate 5 1 3 2 Trigger Delay The LBA PC will produce trigger output pulses at the programmed frame Interval rate With the Trigger Delay check box deselected the trigger output pulses will occur at vertical sync time With the Trigger Delay check box selected the trigger output pulses will occur in the middle of the frame of a non interlaced camera or in the middle of field 2 of an interlaced camera The reason to delay the trigger pulse is discussed in the following sections 5 1 3 3 CCD Frame Transfer Camera Interlaced These camera types can only capture a laser pulse in one field Therefore 2x is the highest resolution possible with pulsed lasers The video output from each laser pulse will occur during the field outputting immediately after the laser trigger arrives Since the laser is not synchronized with the camera this means that the pulse can occur in either field As a result you will observe a field hopping effect in the displayed image 5 1 3 4 CCD Interline and Full Frame Transfer Camera Interlaced These camera types can capture a laser pulse in both fields at the same time Therefore 1x high resolution images are possible with pulsed lasers The video output from each laser pulse will occur during the next two fields outputting immediately after the laser trigger arrives When the LBA is running each digitized pixel is being tested for the trigger level pixel value When a
34. Black Level and Shutter controls Click on the drop down to select which camera is affected the current settings are displayed and then make the desired changes Note that Video Trigger Level Trigger section below can also be set for each camera On the toolbar changing the Video Gain Black Level Shutter and Video Trigger Level affects only the current camera listed in the video enunciator located at the bottom of the main display window Operator s Manual 61 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 3 2 4 3 3 Automatic Camera Switching Using the Four Camera Option With the four camera option automatic switching between camera inputs is made possible by checking more than one camera enable at a time Input data frames are repeatedly cycled into the frame buffer starting with the lowest numbered camera after clicking Start Example If cameras 1 3 and 4 are checked data will be placed into the frame buffer sequentially from camera 1 3 4 1 3 4 etc Clicking Stop will halt data collection at whichever camera last input data into the frame buffer WARNING Do not check on a camera unless a camera is actually connected to the indicated camera input An enabled input without a camera will cause data collection to stall when the nonexistent camera is selected 3 2 4 3 4 Ultracal Operation with the Four Camera Option If more than one camera is checked on when the Ultracal menu item is activated each of the enabled cameras will be separ
35. CMOS CID Line Transfer and Tube Cameras Non Interlaced Progressive scan These camera types can produce 1x high resolution images Leave the Trigger Delay box disabled for all of these camera types 5 1 4 Type Trigger In The Trigger In mode will not operate correctly with X Y Scan Line Scan and Tube cameras These include CID style cameras and almost all CMOS cameras Use only CCD Frame and Interline transfer style cameras In the following discussions it is assumed that the laser is fired simultaneous with the arrival of the trigger pulse 5 1 4 1 CCD Frame Transfer Camera Interlaced These camera types can only capture a laser pulse in one field Therefore 2x is the highest resolution possible with pulsed lasers The video output from each laser pulse will occur during the field outputting immediately after the laser trigger arrives Since the laser is not synchronized with the camera this means that the pulse can occur in either field As a result you will observe a field hopping effect in the displayed image 5 1 4 2 CCD Interline and Full Frame Transfer Camera Interlaced These camera types can capture a laser pulse in both fields at the same time Therefore 1x high resolution images are possible with pulsed lasers The video output from each laser pulse will occur during the next two fields outputting immediately after the laser trigger arrives 5 1 4 3 CCD Frame and Interline Transfer Cameras Non Interlaced Progressive scan
36. Camera type drop down arrow Camera Pulnix_TM 745 C4M Select your camera type from the list If your camera type does not appear e Check that your camera path is pointing to the location where the cam files are stored Click on CAM Path and select the path as required e Create a new Camera type e Contact Spiricon s Service Dept for assistance 3 2 3 2 Creating a new Camera Type Do you really need a new camera type One common reason that you may need to create a new camera type would be if you use a camera with a lens that changes the effective pixel scale In this case it is best to begin by selecting the supplied common camera type that matches your camera For example you might be using a Pulnix TM 745 style camera fitted with a special lens Start out by selecting the Pulnix_TM 745 cam type and clicking OK This will cause the LBA to load in all the basic setup information needed for this camera Now return to the Camera dialog box and do the following e Double click inside the Pixel Scale V edit text control Operator s Manual 52 LBA PC e Type in the new camera pixel scale value e Verify that the Pixel Units are set correctly change as required e Double click inside the Camera type edit text control e Type in a new 8 character file name The Cam extension will automatically be added if you fail to include it e Click on Save CAM e Ifthe file path and name specified is correct click OK e You will ret
37. Fit item is not Checked then no fit is computed and thus no data will be copied to the Reference frame 3 2 4 10 Convolution The term Convolution indicates a type of two dimensional spatial filtering that can be applied to a digitized image We will not attempt to use this term in any restricted construct Rather we will apply it generally to a variety of area process transformations At the time of this release we are providing just a few convolution algorithms these primarily aimed at simple low pass spatial filtering We expect this list to grow in time and welcome suggestions from our users for additional implementations Click on this edit control to see a list of Convolution algorithms Entries in this list that begin LPF indicate a Low Pass filter This is the most commonly used algorithm for simple image smoothing operations The numbers following define the size of the convolution kernel in pixels For example 3x3 indicates a 9 pixel kernel 3 pixels by 3 pixels Other common sizes are 5x5 and 7x7 We recommend that you experiment with these selections until you find a process that meets your specific needs See Convolution in Section 6 27 for more details regarding how these algorithms are applied 3 2 5 Capture Toolbar design the toolbar contents You can select which functions you want to appear on the Capture Toolbar by checking the desired item The functions will appear on the toolbar in the same order that they are lis
38. Frame Buffer Size refers to the total amount of memory that is allocated in your system for the temporary storage of digitized frames of video There are two ways to set the size of the frame buffer You can enter the amount of memory that you want to allocate to this buffer or you can specify the number of frames that you want the buffer to contain We recommend that you set the number of Frames rather than the Buffer Size This will allocate just the optimum amount of memory for the set Resolution value 3 2 3 4 1 What is the Frame Buffer The Frame Buffer is an allocated block of memory in your PC It will receive and temporarily retain frames of digitized video data The frames in the Frame Buffer are numbered from 1 to N where N is the maximum number of frames that the allocated amount of memory can hold You must always have at least 1 allocated frame in the frame buffer The Frame Buffer is loaded in a sequential round robin fashion Frames of data can be placed into the frame buffer by e Digitizing the video input signal e Transferring data from a digital camera e Loading in data from disk files e Post processing data already in the frame buffer e Post processing data coming from a disk file In the far lower right hand corner of the Main Screen display is a Frame edit and spin control Frame 2 D 2 E The number showing in the edit control is the number of the frame currently displayed You can edit this number by doub
39. If you purchased your camera from Spiricon you may have been provided with a Camera Control Cable The cable will provide the digital data connection to your camera and may control signals for your camera s electronic shutter if it has one Your camera may also be supplied with a separate power supply Connect it according to the instructions provided with the camera Digital cameras may require additional software to control the camera Check with the camera manufacture and follow their instructions 2 1 3 Step 3 LBA PC Software Installation After the frame grabber is physically installed in the computers PCI slot and the PC is rebooted windows may tell you that it has found new hardware and ask you to install its driver If this occurs exit out of the found new hardware wizard without installing a driver and instead allow the LBA PC installation application to load the necessary files and drivers After the installation application has run the hardware should be installed properly and you will not see the found new hardware wizard If problems do occur during the installation and the drivers are not properly installed windows will launch the new hardware wizard after the installation If this situation should occur tell the wizard to search automatically for the necessary drivers finish the wizard and reboot Here are two ways to install LBA PC in Windows XP the second method will also work for Windows 2000 Choose only one of the foll
40. Initialize the LbapcActiveX object and initialize communication with LBA PC There are two list boxes at the top of the code window In the left list box select Form An outline of the Form Load subroutine is placed in the code window In this subroutine type Set LbapcActiveX New LbapcX LbapcActiveX without the quotation marks This statement creates a new LBA PC ActiveX server object and assigns it to the LbapcActiveX variable On Operator s Manual 159 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 the next line type LbapcActiveX Open without the quotation marks This statement initiates communication between the LBA PC ActiveX control and LBA PC 5 Respond to LBA PC ActiveX events In the left list box select LbapcActiveX A new subroutine called LbapcActiveX OnNewFramer is created This subroutine is called every time the LBA PC collects a new frame of data An example Visual Basic project LbapcActiveXExample vbp can be found in ActiveX Examples Visual Basic directory under the LBA PC installation directory 9 2 3 LabVIEW Follow these steps to use the LBA PC ActiveX control in National Instruments LabVIEW 1 Place an ActiveX reference on the Front Panel On the Controls palette select ActiveX and then select Automation Refnum you cannot use ActiveX Object Place the control on the Front Panel 2 Reference the LBA PC ActiveX server Right click on the Automation Refnum and select Select ActiveX Class then select Browse
41. LBA PC data file File s camera does not match configuration camera Press OK to change the configuration camera File s resolution 9od does not match configuration resolution d Press OK to change the resolution to d File s pixel scale 3le does not match configuration pixel scale 3le Do you want to change the pixel scale to 3le This is not a Demo frame File s camera does not match configuration camera File s resolution 9od does not match configuration resolution d Cannot write to file created by previous version of LBA PC Not enough memory for PassFail buffers PassFail will be disabled Not enough memory for Computations buffers Computations will be disabled Error Loading WING DLL d LBA PC device driver not found LBA PC set to Off Line mode Frame Grabber not found LBA PC set to Off Line mode Device Driver v9od 9od detected LBA300 PC requires v od d 300 PC set to Off Line mode Operator s Manual Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 249 Generated By File Load File Save As File Load File Load File Load File Save As File Load File Load File Load File Load File Save As File Save As File Save As File Save As results results device driver device driver device driver LBA PC s detected but cannot be initialized LBA PC set device driver to Off Line mode Unable to load LCA program file s Pr
42. LBA PC provides three different methods to assist you in removal of unwanted background energy from the quantitative calculations They are e Ultracal processing e A Drawn Aperture that can be drawn around the energy of interest isolating the beam and effectively forcing all the energy outside the aperture to zero e An Auto Aperture feature that will draw an optimally sized aperture around your beam energy 6 4 1 What is Ultracal The Ultracal processing feature should be used instead of manual energy nulling techniques Ultracal employs a sophisticated proprietary algorithm that will yield greatly improved accuracy over various operating conditions and signal dynamic range In addition it can quickly be rerun if changes in setups are required as experimental conditions are modified Before executing Ultracal be sure to optimize your beam presentation This is essential as the Ultracal cycle will be specific to the current Pan Zoom and Video Gain settings You may also place a manually drawn aperture at this time or later if you wish The aperture is not locked by the calibration cycle and may be manipulated by the operator at any time The Ultracal cycle can be run at any time either in 2D or 3D mode You must have the laser beam blocked from the camera detector After completion of the Ultracal cycle the results will be accurate as long as the setup conditions remain the same and your camera black level shading and noise condi
43. Non Interlaced Progressive scan 1 121 5 1 5 Type Video Trigger 121 5 1 5 1 CCD Frame and Interline Transfer Cameras Interlaced 122 5 2 Capture Methods and Rate Control 122 5 2 1 Programming the Capture Interval 122 5 2 1 1 With Trigger Type set to CW 122 5 2 1 2 With Trigger Type set to Trigger Out 123 5 2 1 3 Trigger Type set to Video Trigger with the LBA firing the laser 123 5 2 1 4 Trigger Type set to Video Trigger without the LBA firing the laser 123 Operator s Manual 7 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 5 3 Integration Control 123 5 3 1 Integration Operation 124 5 4 Digital Camera Operations 124 5 4 1 Digital Camera Control 124 5 4 1 1 Digital Camera Binning Effects L b 5 4 1 2 Digital Camera ROI Formating 125 5 4 1 3 Digital Camera Exposure Controls LA 5 4 1 4 Digital Camera Triggering 125 5 4 1 5 Digital Camera Gain and Black Level Control 126 Chapter6 COMPUTATIONS 128 6 1 Computational Accuracy 128 6 2 Numerical Formats 128 6 3 Beam Presentation Affects Results 129 6 4 Manual Background Energy Nulling 129 6 4 1 What is Ultracal 129 6 5 Clip Level 130 6 6 Total Energy 130 6 7 Percent in Aperture 131 6 8 Peak and Min 131 6 9 Peak Location 131 6 10 Centroid Location 131 6 11 Beam Widths and Diameters 132 6 11 1 D4 Sigma Method 132 6 11 2 Knife Edge Method 133 6 11 3 Percent of Energy Method 134 6 11 4 Percent of Peak Method 134 6 12 Elliptical beam 134 6 13 Ga
44. an escape sequence To specify a single backslash you must send two For example c spiricon ba 300pc bapc cfg is interpreted as c spiricon ba 300pc bapc cfg Although other escape sequences are recognized there is no reason ever to use them with LBA PC T Time ASCII numeric integer values in the form HHH MM SS D Date ASCII numeric integer values in the form MM DD YY You can obtain the current settings associated with any configuration command by sending the command followed by the query character Any parameters that are part of a query command is a command error unless they are specifically allowed in the command description Configuration query commands return all of the keys for the specified configuration in the following format CCC key value key value key value key value END Other query commands respond in ways that are specific to a particular command See the individual command listings in Appendix A for details The following example illustrates the process for setting the Crosshair Location Mode to Peak Host sends DIS Crosshair 3 END The following example illustrates the process for querying the current Aperture configuration Host sends APTA END LBA PC sends APT DrawShape 1 CenterXLoc 1 600e 01 CenterYLoc 1 500e 01 Major 8 000e 00 Operator s Manual 184 LBA PC Minor 7 500E 00 Rotation 0 DisplayShape 0 AutoAperture 1 Operator s Manual
45. and assigns it to the LbapcActiveX variable On the next line type LbapcActiveX1 Open without the quotation marks This statement initiates communication between the LBA PC ActiveX server and LBA PC 8 Respond to LBA PC ActiveX events In the left list box select LbapcActiveX A new subroutine called LbapcActiveX OnNewFramer is created This subroutine is called every time the LBA PC collects a new frame of data 9 Do something during the event In LbapcActiveX OnNewFrame subroutine type Range B2 Value LbapcActivex Results 0 without the outer quotation marks This statement puts the frame Total result in cell B2 An example Workbook LbapcActiveXExample xls can be found in Activex Examples Excel directory under the LBA PC installation directory 9 2 2 Visual Basic Visual Studio In this section Visual Basic refers to the Visual Basic part of the Microsoft Visual Studio family of development products Follow these steps to use the LBA PC ActiveX server in Microsoft Visual Basic 1 Start a new Visual Basic project 2 Reference the LBA PC ActiveX server On the Project menu select References Scroll down until you see LbapcActiveX EXE Select the checkbox to the left of LbapcActiveX EXE 3 Declare a variable to hold a LBA PC ActiveX server object On the View menu select Code A new code window appears At the top type Dim WithEvents LbapcActiveX As LbapcX LbapcActiveX without the qutotation marks 4
46. another frame Vote in this case the results format Ze ignored Note RDR is ignored if the LBA PC is not in remote ResultsFormat Results log format 0 math 1 spreadsheet ExportLogging E Export logging enable ExportFileName Name of export log file Any file extension is ignored and an appropriate extension is used depending on the type of export file that is being logged Operator s Manual 222 LBA PC LoggingMethod Logging duration 0 continuous 1 frames 2 time NumberFrames PassFailFilter Number of frames to log if LoggingMethod is frames 1 to 100000 Amount of time to log if LoggingMethod is time 0 0 1 to 999 59 59 Which frames to log 0 all 1 passed 2 failed A 5 1 7 GAI generate gain frame This command is equivalent to selecting File Generate Gain To read or write the gain frame data use the RDD or FRM command with the StartFrame parameter set to 1 GAP A 5 1 8 REF set reference This command is equivalent to File Set Reference To read or write the reference frame data use the RDD or FRM command with the StartFrame parameter set to 0 REF A 5 1 9 PRN set print configuration and print PRN configuration PRN Key Value Description Operator s Manual 223 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Value Description e start printing now default true JBeamimage JBeamimage B Print beam enable Print Print beam enable enable
47. beam in three different ways 1 Data Only pixels with intensity levels above the clip level will be use to compute the Top Hat results If an aperture is present it will further limit the analysis to the pixels inside the aperture 2 Area Aperture The Top Hat Area Aperture selection is intended to be used to analyze the data within a specific region lying on the upper surface of a Top Hat beam Use a Drawn Aperture to isolate regions of the beam and compute results over the entire area enclosed by the aperture the clip level is ignored for all but the Effective Area and Diameter results While this method is intended for use with a Drawn Aperture it will however work with no aperture and with an Auto aperture see the notice below 3 Line Aperture The Top Hat Line Aperture is intended to be used to analyze the data lying along the axes of a Drawn Aperture As in Area Aperture above this should be limited to regions lying on the upper surface of the Top Hat beam Except for Top Hat Factor a separate result will be computed for each axis of the aperture Use a Drawn Aperture to isolate regions of the beam and compute results over only the orthogonal axes of the aperture the clip level is ignored for all but the Effective Area and Diameter results This method is intended for use with a Drawn Aperture however it will work with no aperture and with an Auto aperture see the notice below Operator s Manual 138 LBA PC Notice In general it
48. by LBA PC and to hold the data bitmap picture results statistics and pass fail flags The NewFrame property is set TRUE each time the LBA PC collects a new frame of data You must reset NewFrame to FALSE to detect when the next new frame of data is collected If HoldNewFrame is TRUE then the data bitmap results statistics and pass fail flags will not change until you reset NewFrame to FALSE The LBA PC will continue collecting and processing frames of data 9 3 1 6 FrameData FrameWidth FrameHeight These properties provide LBA PC data frames and information about the data FrameData is a two dimensional array of double packaged as a Variant The leftmost dimension is the number of rows and has the range 0 to FrameHeight 1 The rightmost dimension is the number of columns and has the range 0 to FrameWidth 1 The FrameData is in the same order as displayed in the LBA PC Beam Display Window top to bottom left to right 9 3 1 7 PixelHScale PixelVScale These properties are the horizontal and vertical pixel scales The scale units are specified in the LBA PC Options Camera dialog 9 3 1 8 FrameMonth FrameDay FrameYear These properties provide the date when the frame was collected Operator s Manual 162 LBA PC 9 3 1 9 FrameHour FrameMinute FrameSecond FrameMilliseconds These properties provide the time when the frame was collected 9 3 1 10 Cursorx CursorY CursorZ These properties provide the cursor x and
49. can arise if your digital camera has a contrary number of digital outputs than the LBA 400 500PC can support e The LBA 400PC can support a maximum of 10 data bits e The LBA 500PC can support a maximum of 12 data bits If your camera has more digital outputs than the LBA has inputs use the upper MSB s from your camera starting with VD11 on the LBA Operator s Manual 151 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 If your camera has fewer data output signals than the LBA has inputs then use the upper most data inputs starting at VD11 and cut open the following jumper traces e For an LBA 500PC with a 10 bit digital camera cut open E7 and E8 e For an LBA 500PC with an 8 bit digital camera cut open E7 E8 E9 and E10 e For an LBA 400PC with an 8 bit digital camera cut open E9 and E10 Note Jumper cuts are made between square shaped circuit pads labeled with E designators An Exacto knife with a sharp blade is recommended for making these cuts If you are unsure how to go about performing these small surgical like operations then please call Spiricon s service department and we can walk you through it 7 3 Digital Camera Advanced Timing Setup The following Camera Advanced settings Transfer Mode Scan Mode Horizontal Start Horizontal Size Vertical Start and Vertical Size must be correctly set in order to capture and display the data transmitted from your digital camera These settings are best accomplished by making a few good
50. convert a sixteen bit fixed point data word to a floating point value divide the data word by 2 raised to the power of PixelBitsFraction 128 32 8 or 2 for the LBA 300 708PC LBA 400 710PC or LBA 500 712PC or LBA 714PC respectively The LBA PC responds to the query by repeating RDD followed by three parameters specifying the frame number number of data columns and number of data rows Next comes the definite length arbitrary block response data specification which has the form nd d DAW DAW Where Operator s Manual 189 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 ASCII pound character 0x23 n ASCII decimal digit ranging from 1 to 9 This value specifies the number of digit elements d d that follow d d ASCII decimal integer that specifies the number of data words that follow DAW Data Word Two 8 bit data bytes low byte followed by high byte The data is transmitted in a row and column sequence beginning at the display s upper left hand corner proceeding row by row and ending at the lower right hand corner The following example describes how the host controller requests the current frame and receives the data The received data frame has the dimensions of 64 X 60 Therefore the LBA PC transmits 3840 data words pixels or 7680 bytes to the host controller Host sends RDD END LBA PC sends RDD FrameNumber 9 Wiath 64 Height 60 43840 DAW DAW END The following example describes how t
51. data captured in the frame buffer If you do not send the frame number parameter then the current frame is used The column or row counted from the upper left corner of the beam window parameter is optional and is numbered from 1 to n n is the frame width or frame height respectively If you do not send a column or row parameter then the current cursor location is used The data at the cursors is sent as a modified IEEE 488 2 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Response Data The number of bytes in a column or row is two times the number of pixels For example a row of a 128 X 120 frame consists of 256 bytes and a column has 240 bytes Each pixel is a sixteen bit two s complement fixed point value having one of the following forms sl ifffffff LBA 300PC 256 to 255 9921875 sl iiifffff LBA 400PC 1024 to 1023 96875 sl iiiiifff LBA 500PC 4096 to 4095 875 siiiiiii ifffffff LBA 708PC 256 to 255 9921875 sl iiifffff LBA 710PC 1024 to 1023 96875 sl iiiiifff LBA 712PC 4096 to 4095 875 sl WE LBA 712PC 16384 to 16383 5 Where S sign bit i integer f fraction Operator s Manual 187 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Use the FST command to determine the specific fixed point format of pixels in a frame The PixelBits parameter specifies the number of integer bits The PixelBitsFraction parameter specifies the number of fraction bits To convert a sixteen bit fixed point data word to a floating point value divide the data word by 2
52. data output by your camera If you only want to input a portion of the detector you can reduce the Vertical Size and Horizontal Size to smaller values Operator s Manual 153 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Adjust the Vertical Start value according to the following rules Remember you must input even values To move the image DOWN decrease the Vertical Start value To move the image UP increase the Vertical Start value Adjust the Horizontal Start value according to the following rules Remember you must input even values To move the image LEFT decrease the Horizontal Start value To move the image RIGHT increase the Horizontal Start value When the image is centered be sure to save a lt camera gt cam and a lt config gt cfg configuration so that you can restore these setup conditions 7 4 Digital Camera and Ultracal Operation The Ultracal operation can be adversely affected by how your digital camera is adjusted Some digital cameras will have their A to D converter black levels set such that some or all of the negative pixel energy is clipped at Zero Some may even clip a portion of the positive signal region From the LBA PC s point of view a properly adjusted camera will never generate a Zero pixel value thus preserving all of the black baseline negative temporal noise If your camera has a straight binary output then the Ultracal operation will yield one of the following three results 1 If your output image data co
53. defined as the fraction of total energy above a particular fluence value See figure below If we calculate the area under the energy fraction curve we will have a single normalized Operator s Manual 139 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 parameter to describe quality of a Top Hate energy distribution A perfect Top Hat has a single fluence value that makes up 100 percent of energy and plots curve A The area under this curve yields the Top Hat Factor value of 1 0 A Gaussian beam plots the curve labeled C The area and thus the Factor for beam C is 0 5 Real world Top Hat beams will plot curves somewhere between A and C such as curve B Thus as the area under the curve approaches unity the quality of the Top Hat is seen to improve Energy Fraction 4 Fluence Fraction Figure 56 The equation below describes how the curve of a particular beam profile would be derived from the pixel intensity data The plot of such a curve is formed by the sum of the product of the number of pixels and the corresponding fluence for each fluence value in a range starting from the maximum fluence value to the current value ix NPix EUS ee Ca Total Where E The fraction of energy contained between the fluence value and the peak value f The fluence value Pk The peak fluence value Total The total energy in the beam Npix The number of pixels that have the value of I To find the Top Hat Factor
54. depicts the Capture window i e the region on the camera detector where the image is being acquired Because this relates to how the frame grabber hardware is configured it is referred to as the Hardware Zoom box If you Double left click inside this box you will cause this box to Zoom in by a factor of 2x If you Double left click outside this box you will Zoom out Observe that the image resolution will increase as you zoom in x4 x2 X1 is in the increasing direction As you zoom in the image size will remain the same until the resolution can no longer increase At this point the image size will start to decrease making the apparent size of the image larger The center of the Hardware Zooming action will be the intersection point of the Cursors If the Cursors are turned Off the zoom center will be about the center of the current frame See also Zooming Constraints in Section 4 4 4 Operator s Manual 111 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 4 4 1 1 Analog Camera Zooming The chart below depicts the zooming process for an analog non digital style camera The starting point is based upon how you configured the image size and resolution in the Camera dialog box First find your resolution factor in the top row Then drop down to the display width size In the example below the resolution is x8 and the width is 64 Each time you zoom in you ll be following the arrows leaving each location and leading to the next In this example y
55. display Cursor options include e Off No Cursors will be displayed e Manual Cursors will be displayed and the operator manually determines their location e Centroid Cursors will be displayed but their location is automatically drawn to pass through the computed centroid of the beam Note This operation will revert to Manual if the results window is minimized e Peak Cursors will be displayed but their location is automatically drawn to pass through the peak energy location of the beam Note This operation will revert to Manual if the results window is minimized There are two ways to move and position the Cursors in the 2D display mode and only one way to move them in the 3D mode At the bottom of the main display window are two spin controls one labeled X and one Y X 2 520e 02 H Y 3 480e 02 E Z 1 163e 03 These controls indicate the location of the Cursor s intersection The Value displays the energy at the Cursor s intersect point You can edit these controls to redraw the cursors to a new location Note The above method is the only way to move the cursors in the 3D display mode The second way to move the Cursors is to use the mouse to drag and drop them Move the mouse pointer to the intersection of the Cursors When the pointer changes to the cursor drag symbol amp press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the Cursors to a new location Release the mouse button to drop the Cursors The Cur
56. displayed or hidden based upon operator preference Check the action that applies The Capture and Display toolbars can be user defined to match the operators needs The Aperture toolbar is predefined and can not be altered by the operator 3 2 2 Aperture display and define apertures The LBA PC can display three types of apertures in four different shapes The three types of apertures are e Drawn You can manually draw a WHITE aperture for the purpose of isolating beam analysis to the pixel data contained within the aperture This feature allows you to eliminate the effects of noise or stray energy in regions outside of the beam under test e Displayed The BLACK displayed aperture is not really an aperture Rather it is an overlaid graphical representation of the computed shape and size of the beam width diameter results This BLACK aperture provides a way for the user to visually see the beam width and observe how it changes e Auto This feature automates the task of drawing an optimally sized and placed aperture around the beam profile being measured This aperture is displayed in YELLOW It performs the same function as the Drawn aperture except that it will continuously resize itself to changing beam conditions All three of the above apertures can be enabled and visible at the same time on a 2D display In the 3D display mode no apertures are ever displayed however the Drawn and Auto apertures can be operating as described ab
57. facilitate making this entry v Divergence Far Fid v G i enn 2 1 000e 00 Separation m 5 000e 01 H X Ref Dia EE 3 395e 02 H et Y Ref Dia 3 473e 02 Figure 27 Move your camera to the larger beam width sample location noting the distance traveled by the camera The distance traveled is the separation distance between the two sample locations Enter this Separation distance in meters Click OK and then Start The divergence results will be computed for both the X and Y axes based upon how the current beam size has increased from that of the Reference sample Notice It is not recommended that Elliptical be enabled when making this measurement rather you should rotate your laser camera to be X and Y axis aligned Under certain conditions the rate of divergence could cause the major and minor axes to swap in the far field region yielding false results 3 2 6 9 Histogram Check this box if you want to view a Histogram of your laser beam s energy distribution The Histogram graphic and numerical results will appear in its own window of the LBA s main display The size of each bucket in the histogram is user programmable Bucket size is based upon the integer values produced by the A to D converter If required the bucket size will be converted to floating point values to reflect the processing effects of an energy calibration The buckets are sized up plus and down minus from zero Operator s Manual 73
58. fail divergence configuration Type Value Description DivergenceMajor Min Max test enable DivergenceMajorMin Divergence X or Major min in milli radians 0 0 to 3142 0 DivergenceMajorMax Divergence X or Major max in milli radians 0 0 to 3142 0 DivergenceMinorMin Divergence Y or Minor min in milli radians 0 0 to 3142 0 DivergenceMinorMax Divergence Y or Minor max in milli radians 0 0 to 3142 0 A 5 4 Remote Specific Commands If a key is not specified with the command then the default value is the last value set restore config previous command unless otherwise specified in the description Range checking is performed on all values in key value for each transmitted command If any value is invalid or out of range then the entire command is ignored and the range error bit is set see ELR A 5 4 1 CAL ultra cal CAL configuration If you do not send a parameter then the LBA PC begins an automatic camera calibration process When the process is completed the LBA PC sets the Operation Complete bit bit 0 in the Event Status Register see ESR Operator s Manual 241 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 UltracalOff true disable frame calibration default false A 5 4 2 CHR read write cross hair location This command is valid only when cross hair is set to manual see DIS The range of allowable values is returned by the WLD command CHR configuration F x location
59. fall in a grid like pattern This is to be expected when you are capturing every 4 pixel 3 2 9 3 3 Real World Units Setting LBA PC s Quantitative results to real world units of length such as um and mm may be accomplished by going to the main menu and choosing Option Camera Make the appropriate real world unit selection in the Pixel Units drop down box This method of analyzing beam stability is in many ways similar to that discussed above however when viewing the scatter plots the user must understand that the X Y axes will be in whatever units are selected above Also the grid lines of the scatter plots will not have the same granularity as the pixel grid on the detector This method is best when scientific units of length or beam centroid displacement are needed When one understands the method explained above this method should be intuitive Remember to reset the scatter plot whenever units are changed in LBA PC Operator s Manual 93 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 3 2 9 3 4 Increment Bins and Reset The centroid scatter plot is also a histogram of the centroid location The color bar between the Peak and Centroid plots provides the user insight about centroid location frequency Colors in the upper part of the bar indicate higher frequencies When running the user will notice that blocks of data points have the same color These blocks of color represent the binning of the histogram The program based on the range of dat
60. ignored false 2 do not overwrite The file will be created if it does not exist An error occurs if Append is also false and the file exists true overwrite existing file The file will be created if it does not exist The file will be replaced if it exists forced to true if StartFrame lt 1 default false 220 LBA PC A 5 1 5 EXP set export configuration amp export image s EXP configuration EXP Value Description n false set configuration only true set configuration then export images Images cannot be exported while running default true Replace Overwrite if file exists default false ExportFileName Base name of export file Extension automatically created by LBA PC based on export file type Maximum 256 characters StartFrame I First frame to export 1 to n n is the size of the frame buffer NumberFrames Number of frames to export 0 all frames 1 ton n is the size of the frame buffer BMP B BMP export enable AsciiSpace P SPC export enable CursorData ies CUR export enable ColumnRowSum B SUM export enable A 5 1 6 LOG set logging configuration NOTE There is no default path for this command Ifyou want the data log file results log file or export log file s to be saved in a particular path then send the path with the file name Data amp Results logging will append to an existing file once opened It will overwrite an existing fi
61. in world coordinates y location in world coordinates Cursor true snap the cross hair to the location of the cursor Any X or Y values in the same command are ignored default false CHR Returns CHR configuration If cross hair is set to centroid peak or origin then returns centroid peak or origin location respectively Otherwise returns manual cross hair location A 5 4 3 CUR read write cursor location This command is valid only when cursor is set to manual see DIS The range of allowable values is returned by the WLD command CUR configuration Type Value Description x location in world coordinates Yo ae y location in world coordinates CUR Returns CUR configuration Operator s Manual 242 LBA PC Key Value Description x location in world coordinates5 Value of pixel at cursor distance from cross hair to cursor y location in world coordinates5 Z F A 5 4 4 DSF display frame DSF lt configuration gt DSF Value Description Ee frame number 1 gain frame 0 reference frame 1 to n n is the size of the frame buffer default current frame A 5 4 5 ERR error reporting ERR configuration Value Description ee true remote error messages if a communications error occurs then the EMAV bit is set in the status byte STB and a text message containing a brief explanation of the error is placed in the error message queue To retri
62. is not supported COMMAND ERROR A command was sent with a question mark at the end but a query is not allowed unrecognized COMMAND ERROR LBA PC detected a key it does key not recognize The LBA PC does not always detect such keys cannot be set COMMAND ERROR A key was specified whose value cannot be set Bad file name EXECUTION ERROR The specified file or path does not exist Out of range RANGE ERROR The indicated key value is out of range contains no data EXECUTION ERROR FRM RDD The requested frame contains no data ifferent camera EXECUTION ERROR FRM LDD SDD The specified frame was captured using a different camera than the Operator s Manual 244 LBA PC Error Type Description current configuration and Replace false different camera EXECUTION_ERROR FRM LDD SDD The specified resolution frame was captured at a different camera resolution than the current configuration and Replace false cannot set while EXECUTION_ERROR The specified value s cannot be set while the LBA PC is running CAM file error EXECUTION_ERROR CAM There was an error reading a specified CAM file check path filename contents file name EXECUTION ERROR LDD SDD DIS contains illegal characters directory path EXECUTION ERROR LDD SDD DIS does not exist error in EXECUTION ERROR LDD SDD DIS directory path or file name file error EXECUTION_ERROR LDD SDD An unknown error occurred while readin
63. is not advisable to use the Auto Aperture feature when making Top Hat measurements 6 18 1 Top Hat Mean and Standard Deviation The computation of the Mean and Standard Deviation are described in the equations below for the Mean SE n Where Z Mean intensity n Number of summed pixels Az Sum of the pixel intensities above the clip level or in the area or on the line being evaluated for the Deviation Where G std deviation n Number of pixels summed XZ Z Sum of the square of the differences between the mean intensity and the pixel intensity values above the clip level or in the area or on the line being evaluated 6 18 2 Top Hat Minimum and Maximum intensities The values appearing here represent the highest and lowest energy intensities that are found within the Top Hat area as defined by the Data Area or Line Aperture selection Note In Data mode the Minimum will often be the clip level value determined by the Beam Width Method 6 19 Top Hat Factor The Top Hat Factor provides a numerical measure of quality for a Top Hat beam profile Itis a normalized value that compares your beam profile against a perfect Top Hat a perfect Top Hat being a beam with vertical sides and an absolutely uniform intensity on the top A Factor value of 1 0 describes a perfect Top Hat Examining a plot of a beam s energy fraction versus its normalized fluence derives the Top Hat Factor The energy fraction is
64. item labeled Wavelength Increment nm must be set by the operator to the wavelength per pixel scale value Units are nanometers Control range is 10 000 000 The edit control item labeled Center Wavelength nm must be set by the operator to the value of the wavelength at the center of the vertical column of pixels Units are nanometers Control range is 001 to 10 000 Operator s Manual 46 LBA PC 3 1 16 2 FROG Data Orientation The FROG software has the ability to flip axial assignments and directions There is however a legacy defined orientation that we use as a basis for defining our axial representations This is also the FROG default condition Looking into the front of the camera the upper left corner defines a starting point for the vertical Spectrum axis and then the horizontal Delay axis See figure below Ayaan CAMERA DETECTOR front view FROG DATA FILE SPECTRUM Se QUTPUT FORMAT directions is top to bottom left to right Aem 128 pixels iym DELAY tuak Figure 12 In the vertical Spectrum direction the top represents a maximum wavelength lowest frequency moving down to a minimum wavelength highest frequency In the horizontal Delay direction the left represents a minimum time delay moving right to a maximum time delay If you align your axes differently than shown you can make the necessary adjustments by altering the Delay and Wavelength settings in the dialog box and in the Exp Data tab section of t
65. kv BMP BMF ASCII Comma CMA ASCII Space SPC Cursor Data CLIR Column Row Sum SUM Figure 9 If you choose Export Logging select the Format that you want the data to be logged in The BMP format will produce bitmapped image files The SPA format will produce an ASCII text image file with space delimited entries The CMA format will produce an ASCII text image file with comma delimited entries The CUR format will log only the Cursor image in and ASCII format with comma delimited entries The SUM format will log only Column Row summed data in an ASCII format with comma delimited entries See the Export Image section for more information regarding these file types 3 1 11 3 Logging Method You can choose between three different methods to log data or results e Continuous Logging will commence when you click Start on the menu tool bar and will terminate when you click Stop or run out of available disk space e Frames You can limit the logging process to a specified Number of Frames Enter the number of frames you want to log Logging will commence when you click Start on the menu tool bar e Time You can limit the logging process to a specified amount of time At the HHH MM SS entry item enter the amount of time that you want logging to run Double click inside the entry item and type in the time value in the format shown Logging will commence when you click Start on the menu tool bar Opera
66. major axis Operator s Manual 167 Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 LBA PC 8 Top Hat minor axis 9 Divergence This is the same order as listed in sections 3 1 15 through 3 1 19 above under individual results properties also the same order as displayed in the LBA PC Results Window The leftmost index is identical to the index used to access the Results property The rightmost index is defined as follows 0 Mean 1 Standard Deviation 2 Minimum 3 Maximum All results values will be loaded into the array all the time Results not enabled in the LBA PC will be zero Note there are three sets of Gauss Fit and Top Hat results Either the whole beam section or the major and minor sections will contain valid results depending on how the LBA PC is configured 9 3 1 23 Pass Fail Results The PassFailFlag and PassFail properties provide all of the LBA PC pass fail test results The PassFailFlag is a combination of all the individual pass fail results The value of PassFailFlag is defined as follows Fail Some test failed No test No individual test enabled Pass All tests passed The PassFail property provides individual pass fail results in a one dimensional array of integers packaged as a Variant The pass fail results are loaded into the array in the following order 1 Quantitative e There is no test for Peak Location X or Y The value of both of these flags is always zero e There is no test for Radius so the flag is always zero
67. no way to associate the cursor location in world coordinates described below with a particular data frame column or row Download cursor column and row are intended to be useful only when the cursor is set to follow the centroid or peak location Operator s Manual 204 LBA PC See section 2 3 1 1 RCC RCR Read Cursor Transfer for additional information 10 7 4 Beam Window World Coordinates Most parameters that specify spatial coordinates must be in LBA PC world coordinates World coordinates are used for locations in the current frame as displayed in the beam window with no magnification World coordinates are displayed for computed centroid location and peak location results aperture location cursor and crosshair location and pass fail locations World coordinates are dependent on the frame size capture resolution origin location and pixel scale These dependency values may change from frame to frame World coordinates are based upon the Origin Location which defines x 0 y 0 If the origin is set to Detector lower left Window lower left or manual then y values increase going up and decrease going down as viewed in the beam window If the origin is set to Detector upper left or Window upper left then y values increase going down and decreases going up If manual origin is enabled then negative x values are to the left and positive to the right and y negative values are down and positive up See the LBA PC online help for more inform
68. of the dialog or create a custom color using the controls on the right Clicking OK will place the selected color into the upper bar Continue to add seed colors until the displayed palette matches your desired effect To remove a seed color from the upper bar simply right click on it 3 2 10 1 Saving the Palette Once you have the palette design looking the way you want it click the Save Palette button Enter the file name that you want the palette to be known by and save it into your c Spiricon LBAPC Palette directory The file extension pal will automatically be applied 3 2 10 2 Save Colors The palette generation tools purpose is to create palettes of 128 entries with minimal user input Thus the user may enter only 2 seed colors and the tool will interpolate the remaining colors It is however difficult to move the other direction that is to say given a palette with 128 colors please reduce it to the original 2 seed colors Therefore a second file type was created to save the users seed colors for the purpose of editing later This file type has a sp2 extension The Save Colors button is for the purpose of saving sp2 file types or in other words palettes that you can edit Operator s Manual 96 LBA PC Note Palettes saved as pal file types cannot be loaded into the Palette Generation Tool PaletteGen2 exe for editing 3 2 10 3 Load Colors The Load Colors button is used to load the seed colors from sp2 files into th
69. operator password in the Options Password menu item While in the lockout state access is denied to many of the LBA PC menu items When the LBA PC exits the lockout state access to all menu items is restored MLA My Listen Address 0x20 to 0x3e MSA My Secondary Address 0x60 to 0x7e MTA My Talk Address 0x40 to 0x5e PPC Parallel Poll Configure 0x05 Handled by GPIB board and NI 488 2M PPD Parallel Poll Disable 0x70 to 0x7e Handled by GPIB board and NI 488 2M PPE Parallel Poll Disable 0x60 to 0x6e Handled by GPIB board and NI 488 2M PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure 0x15 Handled by GPIB board and NI 488 2M SPD Serial Poll Disable 0x19 SPE E Serial Poll Enable 0x18 UN 7 Unlisten Ox3f UNT Untalk Ox5f The following IEEE 488 1 commands are not supported Operator s Manual 179 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 DCL GET SDC TCT 10 4 2 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands The following IEEE 488 2 common commands are supported by the LBA PC IDN RST CLS ESE ESE ESR SRE SRE STB Identification Query Reset Clear Status Registers E Event Status Enable Write Event Status Enable Query Event Status Register Query Service Request Enable Write Service Request Enable Query Status Byte Register Query All other IEEE 488 2 common commands are not recognized by the LBA PC and will return a Command Error 10 4 3 LBA PC Command and Data Formats
70. or 1 2 Hz 5 2 1 3 Trigger Type set to Video Trigger with the LBA firing the laser The frame rate of the camera and the Trigger and Capture Intervals will combine to determine the capture rate Example If the LBA is being used to trigger the laser and the Capture Interval is set to 10 with the Trigger Interval set to 10 the captures will occur once for each 100 frames If your camera has a 25 Hz frame rate the capture rate will be once every 4 seconds or 1 4 Hz In the above example only frames that satisfy the Video Trigger Level threshold value will be counted Thus if some of the laser shots are too low in energy the resulting acquisition rate will lengthen in multiples of the Trigger Interval 5 2 1 4 Trigger Type set to Video Trigger without the LBA firing the laser The frame rate of the camera and the laser pulse rate will combine to determine the capture rate Only frames that satisfy the Video Trigger Level threshold value will be counted Thus if some of the laser pulses are too low in energy those shots will not be included in the Capture Interval count resulting in slower acquisition rates Example If the LBA is not being used to trigger the laser and the Capture Interval is set to 10 the captures will occur once for each 10 times that the laser fires If the laser fires at a 2 Hz rate then the capture rate will be once every 5 seconds or 1 5 Hz 5 3 Integration Control If you have purchased the digital camera op
71. or directory is specified then the current Windows drive or directory is used In Windows the current drive and directory can be changed at any time by another program some internal operation or some user action This is probably not what you want We very strongly recommend that you always specify the drive and directory If no extension is specified then CFG is used Operator s Manual 182 LBA PC If the file name is not specified then the current value from the last previous restore File Restore Config LDC command File Save Config or SDC command is used The default configuration file name can be retrieved with the SDC command Note that the backslash character V has special meaning known as an escape sequence To specify a single backslash you must send two For example c spiricon ba 300pc config cfg Is interpreted by the LBA PC as c spiricon ba300pc config cfg Although other escape sequences are recognized there is no reason to ever use them with LBA PC The following example describes how to save the current LBA PC configuration to the file c spiricon remote cfg Host sends SDC ConfigFileName c spiricon remote cfg END 10 5 2 Configuration Commands Configuration commands allow you to change the current configuration of the LBA PC These commands are modeled after the dialog boxes displayed on the screen after selecting some items in the File menu and all the items in the Options and Pass
72. pin connector on its rear cover it can not be interfaced as a digital camera However you can still interface it by using the analog method described in the LBA 300PC interface topic Alternately you can contact Spiricon s service department and arrange to have your Pyrocam I upgraded with digital camera output capability NOTICE When interfacing with a Pyrocam I DO NOT USE THE ULTRACAL Feature of the LBA PC Rather it is ESSENTIAL that you periodically re calibrate the Pyrocam I Calibrating the Pyrocam I is the only calibration that should be used with this type of interface Operator s Manual 29 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 2 6 2 1 1 Set video switch The Pyrocam must be set to output digital video This is accomplished by setting the MONO DIG VGA switch to the LBA position See Chapter 6 in your Pyrocam Operator s Manual 2 6 2 1 2 Connect cable Connect the Pyrocam s digital output to the digital input connector of the LBA 500PC A special interface cable is required to make this connection If you ordered your Pyrocam I LBA PC and LBA Digital Option together as a system then a cable was supplied 2 6 2 1 3 Pyrocam settings With the Pyrocam set to the DIG mode the Vertical Scale setting has no effect on the output However the Gain switch is still operating and can be set to any position All other operating requirements for the Pyrocam I are still applicable and must be set up correctly Don t forget to periodically
73. results are as in 2 above Note Almost all cameras will exhibit baseline drifi When making adjustments to your camera always allow the camera to come to thermal equilibrium and allow a little headroom on the adjustments to accommodate additional drift over time and temperature variations If your camera does not have a black level adjustment and gives on of the above warnings then you must either accept the reduced accuracy or have your camera manufacturer modify the camera for you Operator s Manual 154 LBA PC If your camera has a signed two s compliment data format the Ultracal function will be disabled Under this condition it is assumed that the camera is self calibrating or provides a calibration capability to the operator Operator s Manual 155 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Chapter 8 REMOTE OPERATION 8 1 Remote Operation The LBA PC has nearly full GPIB remote control capabilities and partial ActiveX remote control capabilities During the installation phase you were asked if remote operation was required If you answered yes to the query the installation process will have loaded the appropriate device drivers that allow the LBA PC to communicate with a National Instruments GPIB interface card The ActiveX servers are always available If you installed the remote operation by mistake see How to Disable Remote Operation in section 8 2 Note The LBA PC application will only support National Instrument GPIB device d
74. s Manual 45 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 3 1 16 1 Save FROG as Dialog Box Enter the drive paths and lt filename gt of the FROG File that you want to save Press Browse if you want to overwrite an existing file and you are not sure of the file s name or location and wish to search for it The FROG file format can be of two types without a header or with a header We recommend that you use the header format to add to the unique identity of each FROG file Click on the Use Header Information check box to enable Header information to be automatically placed at the start of the FROG data file Default is for this box to be checked When it is not checked all the following items in this dialog box are disabled Save FROG As File C SPIRICONSLBAPCADATA Untitled FRG OK y Use Header Information Cancel Number of Delay Points H 28 Number of Wavelength Points 20 Delay Increment fs 1 000e 01 2 Wavelength Increment nm 1 230e 01 27 Center Wavelength nm 4 137e 02 H Figure 11 The item labeled Number of Delay Points automatically sets to the number of horizontal pixels in the current beam The item labeled Number of Wavelength Points automatically sets to the number of vertical pixels in the current beam The edit control item labeled Delay Increment fs must be set by the operator to the delay per pixel scale value Units are femto seconds Control range is 10 000 000 The edit control
75. second lowest level e Trigger In If your laser can provide a compatible trigger input pulse to the LBA then you can use that pulse to synchronize the capture of your video frame In general this technique is inferior to the preceding Video Trigger mode Its only advantage would be to allow you to capture an event that occurs independently of other things that might be occurring in the video frame that preclude the use of Video Trigger See Polarity Trigger Type Positive Trigger Out while Running Interval 6 Trigger Out Delay Video Trigger Level 512 D Figure 20 The other settings operate and apply as follows e Trigger Out Applies to Trigger Out and Video Trigger modes Output pulses from the LBA PC can be programmed to output Always or only when the frame grabber is sampling video While Running i e beginning when you click Start ending when you click Stop Note The output trigger pulse is always positive and its pulse width is fixed see Specifications e Interval Applies to Trigger Out and Video Trigger modes You can program the rate at which the LBA will produce trigger output pulses The rate is based upon the camera frame rate The value entered in this edit control specifies how many frames will occur for each trigger pulse generated A setting of 1 will output a trigger pulse once for every frame of the camera 2 will output a pulse on every second frame 3 every third and so on Divide this
76. setting into the camera frame rate to compute the rate at which the LBA will output trigger pulses i e a 3 will cause a 30 Hz frame rate camera to fire a laser at 10 frames per second e Trigger Out Delay Applies to Trigger Out and Video Trigger modes If this item is not checked the trigger output pulse will occur at the same time as the camera s vertical sync i e at the start of each video frame For many CCD cameras this is not a good time to receive a laser pulse If you check this item the trigger output pulse will be delayed to a time near the middle of the video frame or field if the camera is interlaced e Polarity Applies to the Trigger In mode only The LBA response to a trigger input is edge sensitive You can program the response to the input trigger pulse to be either Positive rising edge sensitive or Negative falling edge sensitive Operator s Manual 63 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 See Chapter 5 for additional information and examples regarding Triggering 3 2 4 5 Processing The Processing panel is where you select how to process digitized frames of data This processing determines how each frame that is stored in the frame buffer will be constructed This processing occurs prior to the calculating of any numerical results Processing Frame Summing 8 Frame Average 8 Gain Correction Reference Subtract Convolution None Figure 21 The Processing option
77. size large enough to be measured with a CCD camera Check the Divergence box and select Focal Length in the drop down edit control Enter the Focal Length of your optical system in meters The divergence results will be computed for both the X and Y or the Major and Minor beam widths depending upon Elliptical being enabled vi Divergence FocalLength Focal Length m 1 000e 00 EX i i BOAGAN n 5 000e 01 Figure 26 The Focal Length method is most appropriate for lasers that exhibit small angular divergences For larger divergence angles like those seen with laser diodes the Far Field method is much more accurate Operator s Manual 72 LBA PC 3 2 6 8 2 Far Field Divergence Measurements The Far Field method requires you to measure the beam widths of your laser at two known locations in the beams far field The change in size is used to compute the rate of beam divergence in mili radians First collect a pair of Reference beam widths The Reference data should be acquired at the smaller beam width location Click Stop and note the location of your camera in the beam path Open the Options Computations dialog box Check the Divergence box and select Far Field in the drop down edit control Click the Set button to transfer the current Reference beam widths into the provided edit control boxes Note You can manually enter these values from a previous measurement if you know what they are The Set button is provided to
78. still focus their attention on the most recent data it may be necessary to limit the number of displayed samples Sample limit edit box allows the user to specify how many of the most recent samples will be displayed in the strip chart Operator s Manual 88 LBA PC Example If the user has collected samples 1 1000 and the Sample limit it set to 100 samples 900 1000 will be the only samples visible in the strip chart Statistical results will be computed using all the samples 1 1000 3 2 9 2 2 Samples The Samples indicator shows the total number of samples collected 3 2 9 2 3 Check Boxes The Check Boxes allow the user to specify what results items are to be graphed on the strip chart One or all of the following may be selected Centroid X Centroid Y Peak X Peak Y Radius 3 2 9 2 4 Radius Relative to The Radius Relative to control modifies the display of radius information The radius is referenced from an Origin set up in the LBA PC or from the continuously calculated Average Centroid position 3 2 9 2 5 Strip Chart Zooming All strip chart data is plotted on the same horizontal and vertical scale This situation will cause traces that vary greatly along the vertical axes to dominate the vertical scale Traces that have small vertical fluctuations will show up as flat lines In order to see small details the user must stop or pause the data collection and drag a zooming box around the region of interest To do
79. sum the area under the curve formed from the above equation as shown below AE EE 2 F Pk Operator s Manual 140 LBA PC Where F The Top Hat Factor area under the curve 6 20 Effective Area and Effective Diameter All of the pixels that are above the clip level are included in the Effective Area and Diameter results If an aperture is present then the analysis is confined to just the pixels inside the aperture The sum of the areas of all the pixels above the clip level is the Effective Area The Effective Diameter is the diameter of a circle that will just contain the Effective Area as shown below ed 2x lt up Where ed Effective diameter ea Effective area 6 21 Far Field Divergence Angle computations The LBA PC can calculate Far Field Full Angle beam divergence in two orthogonal axes Two methods are provided the Focal Length and the Far Field The Focal Length method requires the use of a focusing optic while the Far Field method requires that all measurements be performed in the far field of your laser beam Each method is discussed below In each discussion you can assume results are duplicated for each axis 6 21 1 The Focal Length Method This method is based upon the beam width of a focused beam s spot size and the focal length of the focusing optic Divergence results will be computed in the X and Y aligned axes of the beam if Elliptical results are disabled or for Major and Minor axes beam orienta
80. that case the image and cursors will snap to the nearest pixels that comply with the above constraints Therefore a point of interest may disappear when you zoom out to a lower resolution 4 5 The Tilt Rotate Display Window This child window is visible only when in the 3D display mode It provides you with graphical and numerical information of how your 3D image is orientated in both Tilt and Rotation This window can be minimized but not resized Figure 54 The XYZ corner markers allow you to orientate your image with respect to the 2D display This marker will represent either the Upper Left or Lower Left corner of the 2D display depending upon how you have placed the Origin Location If the Origin is placed in the Upper Left of either the Window or Detector then the XYZ marker will be in the Upper Left corner of the display If the Origin is placed in the Lower Left of either the Window or Detector then the XYZ marker will be in the Lower Left corner of the display If the Origin is Manual placed then the XYZ marker will be in the Lower Left corner of the display For more information see Origin Location in Chapter 3 Operator s Manual 114 LBA PC 4 6 The Histogram Display Window This Histogram display window is visible only when the Histogram check box is enabled in the Computations dialog box This window can be minimized and resized This bar chart is a fluence Histogram of the currently displayed frame of data Each bar
81. the HSYNC and VSYNC signals must be the same FIELD This signal is only used when the camera Scan Mode is Interlaced Most digital cameras are sequentially scanned i e Non interlaced If your camera is interlaced this signal will indicate to the LBA which field is being input FIELD must go high during the Odd or 1st field time and must go low during the Even or 2nd field time It should change state at the beginning of VSYNC VD11 0 LBA 400 500 Connect the digital data signals to these inputs VD11 is the MSB and VDO is the LSB Connect the MSB from your camera to VD11 Unused connections must always involve the LSB s VD must be a logic high to denote a true condition of a data bit Set the Pixel Bits value to the number of data connections supported Note If the output from your digital camera is in a signed two s compliment data format connect the sign bit to VD11 and the MSB data to VD10 The Pixel Bits entry should be a negative value for signed data For example If your data is a 12 bit signed two s compliment format enter a 12 for the Pixel Bits Operator s Manual 150 LBA PC VD15 0 LBA 7XX Connect the digital data signals to these inputs VD11 is the MSB and VDO is the LSB Connect the LSB from your camera to VDO Unused connections must always involve the MSB s VD must be a logic high to denote a true condition of a data bit Set the Pixel Bits value to the number of data connections supported Note
82. the Origin is located only with respect to the Pan window thus the Origin moves relative to the detector as the Pan window is moved Manual origin locations are always absolutely referenced to the camera detector see note above You must be in 2D display mode and have the Cursors enabled to manually place the origin Move the Cursors to the location where you want the Origin be placed then double click the right mouse button Observe that the X and Y cursor locations now show zeros Also observe that the Pan Zoom windows red dot is in the approximate location inside the Pan window where you just placed the Origin E 128 x 120 X 4 a Figure 30 Note Ifthe Origin is set to Manual and the Crosshair is set to Origin then you can move the Origin by dragging and dropping the Crosshair Operator s Manual 77 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 3 2 7 5 Beam Colors Your choice of beam display colors depends upon which display mode you have selected There are 3 choices available in both 2D and 3D modes plus 2 additional choices in 3D mode They are e Color Bands 16 colors plus white to indicate intensities at or near A D converter saturation Available in both 2D and 3D e Color Continuous 128 colors plus white to indicate intensities at or near A D converter saturation Available in both 2D and 3D e Gray Scale 128 shades of gray plus red to indicate intensities at or near A D converter saturation Available in both 2D an
83. the camera In the example above the pixel scale read form the camera dialog was 13 microns per pixel Thus the centoid would become roughly 232 66 pixel e fs 3024 58 um From the left X pixe 247 80 pixel e fs a 3221 4 um From the bottom Y pixe The ellipses in the histogram windows have X and Y diameters two standard deviations wide and tall respectively Operator s Manual 91 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Sd X 27 13 260 Pea Sd Y 53 72 240 220 200 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 X Avg X 252 02 Avg Y 166 40 Figure 38 3 2 9 3 1 Zooming Histogram Plots The zooming feature for histogram plots works basically the same as it does for the strip chart window See Strip Chart Zooming 3 2 9 3 2 Capture Resolution Settings When setting capture resolutions to settings other than Full and 1X it is important to note that the peak location scatter plot will not have peak locations on any pixel location in the array A 4X resolution for example would have peaks occurring every forth pixel as a result the Peak Scatter plot would look like something like the following figure Operator s Manual 92 LBA PC Sd X 27 36 pea Sd Y 19 20 a mm aa a Ga am ua dj enam Am NR a ae am H aa am GR a s je gm d na ma am e en s am dm T 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 Avg X 227 27 Avg Y 244 61 Figure 39 Note how peak locations seem to
84. the changes to the camera dialog Now we will setup the origin in LBA PC to match that of the histogram plot On the main menu select Options gt Beam Display Set the Origin Location to Window LL to coincide with the Beam Stability plot convention Setting the origin to values other that Window LL will work but the user should be aware that the beam window and histogram might be horizontally or vertically inverted with respect to one another Make sure that LBA PC is collecting data and return to the Beam Stability window Press the reset button to restart the histogram Note Whenever units are changed in LBA PC the scatter plot should be reset because previously plotted samples will not be adjusted to reflect the new plot axis dimensions Operator s Manual 90 LBA PC Sd X 0 35 Sd Y 0 28 Centroid 248 4 gt 247 UE e Reset 232 233 234 X Avg X 232 69 Avg Y 247 80 Figure 37 The Centroid and Peak Histogram windows now have horizontal and vertical plot scaling in units of pixel with histogram bins the size of a single pixel Note also that we have the same plot orientation as the LBA PC beam window In the Figure above we can see that most of the centroids are falling 232 pixels from the left and 247 pixels from the bottom assuming that your origin is set to Window LL In order to get this into real world units we would simply multiply the pixel units by the pixel scale of
85. this start in the top left drag a box spanning downward and to the right until the region of interest is selected More than one zoom operation may be performed to achieve the desired detail Zooming out can only be done once The plot will return to full zoomed out mode Zooming out is accomplished by dragging a box from the bottom right back to the top left The size of the zoom out box does not matter because all zoom out operations return the plot to the full view Note The direction of the zoom operation in or out is controlled by the direction the box is drawn down and to the right to zoom in and up and to the left to zoom out 3 2 9 3 Peak Centroid Scatter Plot and Histogram There are two ways to use the Scatter Plots in the Beam Stability window One is to test stability from the standpoint of spatial dimension using units such as millimeters or microns The other is Operator s Manual 89 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 to use it as it relates to pixel units on the detector array If you choose to do pointing stability using spatial units such as mm or um the bins of the scatter histogram plot and the horizontal and vertical grid lines will not have any correlation to the individual pixels on the detector In other words the bins in the histogram and the pixel grid of the detector will not have the same crosshatch granularity On the other hand if you do it from the pixel units standpoint the bins on the histogram will c
86. to insert color Right click on colors to remove them b View the resulting palette below Clear Colors Load Colors Save Colors Save Palette Figure 40 Upon opening the above two horizontal color bars will be black The designer can create a new palette by placing seed colors into the upper bar and observing the resulting palette in the lower bar Colors on the left represent low intensities while colors on the right represent high intensities The upper bar contains entries for 128 individual colors numbered from 0 on the left to 127 on the right You must define at least 2 colors to create a palette or as many as 128 if you want to choose the color of all possible displayed colors LBA PC uses a 128 color palette to describe all beam display images As you slide the mouse pointer along the upper bar a number just below the upper bar will indicate which of the 128 color position is selected Left mouse clicking on a location in the upper bar will allow you to place a seed color at that physical location A Color selection dialog box will appear as shown below Operator s Manual 95 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Edit Colors Basic colors EI ee See EESTE ETE i f Ene S E E EU EH SE NN NN D I EE EEE Ee g Wer mM Custom colors e ie 8 53 38 gp Hue 160 ia ieee ie SONS i Geo OK Cancel Add to Custom Colors Figure 41 The user can either select one of the basic colors from the set on the left
87. to replace an existing configuration The frame parameter is optional and is numbered from 1 to n n is the number of frames in the frame buffer Frame 1 is the Gain Frame 0 is the Reference frame and frames 1 to n are data captured in the frame buffer If you do not send the frame number parameter then the current frame is used The replace parameter is optional and is a boolean with a value of 0 or 1 i e false or true The default for the replace parameter is 0 i e false e Ifthe replace parameter is true and the camera type or camera resolution of the file being uploaded is different than the current configuration then the camera type resolution or both are changed to match the file and the file is stored in the frame buffer Note that the frame buffer is cleared when the camera type or camera resolution is changed e If the replace parameter is false and the camera type or camera resolution does not match the current LBA settings then an execution error is reported and the file is discarded e Ifthe replace parameter is true and the pixel scale of the uploaded file is different than the current configuration then the pixel scale is set to the value in the file and the file is stored in the frame buffer e If the replace parameter is false and the pixel scale is different then the pixel scale is not changed and the file is stored in the frame buffer e If the replace parameter is true and the energy calibration of
88. trigger field is detected the data is retained in the frame buffer and displayed The timing delay to the next frame that can be acquired depends upon the overhead needed to process the first frame As in earlier examples the Interline camera can display a pulse acquired in both fields while the Frame transfer camera can only use one field Because of the asynchronous arrival of the laser pulse the Frame transfer image will randomly hop fields 5 1 3 5 CMOS Camera Interlaced Most CMOS cameras employ either line or X Y scanning methods As a result they are poorly suited for operation with pulsed lasers Leave the Trigger Delay box disabled for all of these camera types 5 1 3 6 Tube Camera Interlaced With pulsed lasers these camera types will yield an image in both the odd and even fields Therefore 1x high resolution is possible Leave the Trigger Delay box disabled for all of these camera types Note many tube style cameras will suffer image degradation in the second field during the readout of the first Tube cameras also suffer from long lag times which make them poor devices for any but the slowest rep rate pulsed lasers Operator s Manual 120 LBA PC 5 1 3 7 CCD Frame and Interline Transfer Cameras Non interlaced Progressive scan These camera types can produce 1x high resolution images The video output from each laser pulse will occur during the next frame outputting immediately after the laser trigger arrives 5 1 3 8
89. valid LBA PC data file Processing End of Post Process file Processing Stopped Attempt to read beyond end of file Processing This is not a Demo frame Processing Aborted Frame 96d contains no data Processing Aborted Frame size of this record ld is d X d Frame post process size of first record is d X d Processing Aborted Data logging file and Post Process file are the same Operator s Manual 246 LBA PC File name contains illegal characters File Export Directory path does not exist File Export Error in directory path or file name File Export Error reading Gain file File Load Gain some value in the Gain file is greater than File Load Gain maximum allowed value of 2 Load Gain Aborted Some value in the Gain file is less than 0 Load File Load Gain Gain Aborted Error writing Gain file File Save Gain As Some value in the Gain frame is 0 Generate Gain File Generate Aborted Gain Some value in the Gain frame is greater than File Generate maximum allowed value of 2 Generate Gain Gain Aborted Check Data Logging Path logging Check Results Logging Path logging Check Export Logging Path logging Insufficient memory to compute aperture Error Writing Configuration File Save Config Error in configuration path or file name File Save Config File Restore Config Frame d contains no data Save aborted File Save As The following error messages will always appear on
90. when using the Line Gaussian Fit results If you have set your Reference Source to either Last Gauss or Auto Gauss no full frame Gaussian beams will be available to be placed into the Reference frame buffer Thus any Beam Display selections that involve the Reference frame will not be updated nor display any images based upon the Line fit results Use only Whole Beam fits if you want to use them in conjunction with the various Beam Display options 6 16 Deviation of Fit The Deviation of fit result is a measure of the standard deviation of the beam intensity data from the fitted Gaussian surface or line As this result approaches zero the data more nearly matches the Gaussian surface The definition of the Deviation is Where 34 NA l o La n 2 Standard deviation Pixel intensity Gaussian surface intensity Number of pixels For Line fits there will be a separate Deviation result for each axis 6 17 Correlation of Fit The Correlation result gives you a relative value for how well the data matches the fitted Gaussian surface The Correlation is useful in the sense that the result approaches one as the fit to the data Operator s Manual Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 137 LBA PC becomes better and vice versa The Correlation gives a relative feeling for how well the data matches a Gaussian surface However this result is relative not absolute A result of 0 8 tells us the data is a better Gaussian shape than a result
91. with each summed frame but temporal noise will increase at approximately the square root of the number of frames summed thus the resulting signal to noise ratio will be improved 3 2 4 7 Frame Average H Check on this item if you want the LBA to average frames Specify the Number of Frames that you want to average into each frame placed in the frame buffer Frames are always averaged in the order that they are input Frame averaging will improve the signal to noise ratio by approximately the square root of the number of frames averaged Note Ifthe frame that you are averaging has poor pointing stability then the reliability of the computed results of an averaged frame may not be very good 3 2 4 8 Gain Correction E Check on this item if you want to apply Gain Correction You must have Generated or Loaded a gain correction table before you can apply gain correction processing to newly acquired or post processed frames of data See 3 1 8 Generate Gain for further details 3 2 4 9 Reference Subtraction R Check on this item if you want to subtract the reference frame from newly acquired or post processed frames of data The reference frame is location 0 zero in the frame buffer This location is always reserved for the reference frame The content of frame 0 will be subtracted from the results of all other processing operations Associated with creating and saving a reference frame is the Set Reference Source edit control shown above
92. y location and the value of the pixel at the cursor 9 3 1 11 CrosshairX CrosshairY CrosshairZ These properties provide the crosshair x and y location and the value of the pixel at the crosshair 9 3 1 12 CursorDelta This property provides the straight line distance from the cursor to the crosshair 9 3 1 13 EnergyOfBeam This property lets you calibrate the LBA to the energy of your laser Setting this property is identical to setting Energy of Beam in the LBA PC Computations dialog See sections 3 2 6 1 and 3 2 6 2 in the LBA PC Operator s Manual for a detailed description of Energy of Beam and the Energy of Beam calibration procedure 9 3 1 14 Bitmap This property is a one dimensional array of integer packaged as a Variant This information can be used to create a Windows bitmap or a LabVIEW picture Bitmap is an exact copy of the LBA PC Beam Display Window If the cursor is on then the cursor will appear in the bitmap if the color bar is on then the color bar will appear in the bitmap etc The data in the array is packed as follows BitmapInfoHeader Windows BITMAPINFOHEADER structure Palette 256 element array of Windows PALETTEENTRY Bits Two dimensional array of byte The size of this array is specified in BitmapInfoHeader biSizeImage In LabVIEW convert this property using the Variant To Data VI and then pass the resulting array to the LbapcBitmap vi The output from this VI is a LabVIEW picture OnNewBitmap
93. y values increase going down and decrease going up WLD Returns WLD configuration Key Value Description UpperLeft EF X Y upper left corner as viewed in beam window LowerRight EF XY lower right corner as viewed in beam window A 5 4 24 ZOM zoom in out This command is identical to CAP ZoomIndex z and is provided for convenience Allowable range is defined by CAP and NumZoomszn ZOM configuration Zoom new zoom z Z zoom out Operator s Manual 262 LBA PC Key Value Description z new zoom Z zoom in ZOM Returns ZOM Zoom z A 5 4 25 ZMM zoom information ZMM Returns ZMM lt index zoom gt lt index zoom gt Where Index zoom list of zooms by index The index is an integer index used or returned by the ZOM command The zoom is of the form W x H x R W width H height R resolution For example ZMM 0 128x120x4 1 128x120x2 2 128x120x1 3 64x60x1 4 32x30x1 A 6 Footnotes Commands to set a configuration have the following format CCC key value key value key value key value Where ASCII colon character 0x3A CCC three character command code case is ignored followed by space or tab key code for which parameter to set case ignored ASCII equal sign 0x3D value value to be assigned to the parameter specified by key The particular parameter type format and allowable range are dependent on wh
94. 0 and Windows XP Pro Copyright 2005 Spiricon Inc All rights reserved NOTICE 2 Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 General Information 1 2 System Requirements 1 3 Optional Equipment 1 4 Specifications 1 5 Safety Considerations 1 5 1 Optical Radiation Hazards 1 5 2 Electrical Hazards Chapter 2 EQUIPMENT SETUP 2 1 Equipment Setup 2 1 1 Step 1 Installation of the Frame Grabber Board 2 1 2 Step 2 Camera Connections 2 1 2 1 Analog Cameras 2 1 2 2 Digital Cameras 2 1 3 Step 3 LBA PC Software Installation 2 1 4 Step4 Start LBA PC 2 1 5 Step5 Configure Camera Type 2 1 6 Step6 Collect Data 2 1 7 Step 7 Sample Configurations 2 2 Error Messages 2 3 Optional Equipment 2 4 Connections 2 4 1 Camera Power 2 4 2 Shutter Controls Signals 2 4 3 Trigger Out 2 4 4 Pass Fail Out 2 4 5 Trigger In 2 4 6 Video In 2 5 Camera Control Cables 2 6 Special Setup for Pyrocam I Operation 2 6 1 Pyrocam I with Non Digital LBA PC s LBA 300 400 500 708 710 712 714PC w o digital camera option 2 6 1 1 Pyrocam I Setup Requirements 2 6 1 2 Setup requirements for LBA PC with pyrocam cameras Operator s Manual 3 Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 2 6 1 3 Some Restrictions apply when interfaced to a Pyrocam I 2 6 1 4 Image synchronization considerations 2 6 2 Pyrocam I with Digital LBA PC s 2 6 2 1 Pyrocam I setup requirements 2 6 2 2 LBA 500 7XXPC D Setup requirements 2 6 2 3 Image Synchronization Considerations Chapter 3 MENUS AND DIALOG BOXES 3 1 File Drop Dow
95. 10654 001 Rev 4 10 123 Frame 4 Samples Current Mean 47 47 Quantitative 90 10 Knife Edge otal in Aperture 367 114 800 269 789 884 85 54 85 55 2 488e 03 1 745e 03 4 420e 02 3 253e 02 4 108e 03 3 971e 03 8 840e 02 2 364e 03 3 692e 03 3 682e 03 2 792e 03 2 914e 03 7 583e 03 7 660e 03 7 404e 03 7 373e 03 7 516e 03 3 736e 03 3 745e 03 2 174e 03 2 627e 03 1 119e 04 1 198e 04 1 496e 04 1 386e 04 2 131e 03 1 541e 03 1 246e 02 7 626e 01 0 945 0 961 Deviation 47 72 962 809 A 5 319e 02 7 786e 01 3 084e 01 2 439e 02 9 271e 00 2 573e 01 5 586e 01 2 215e 01 2 083e 01 1 574e 01 7 742e 01 6 053e 02 6 716e 02 4 412e 02 3 274e 01 010 Figure 49 Minimum 47 198 257 456 85 50 1 246e 03 2 320e 02 3 432e 03 8 840e 02 3 610e 03 2 708e 03 7 539e 03 7 322e 03 7 474e 03 3 622e 03 1 839e 03 1 075e 04 1 269e 04 1 112e 03 4 565e 01 0 937 Maximum Units 47 470 332 976 86 65 3 157e 03 5 540e 02 4 108e 03 3 016e 03 3 789e 03 3 168e 03 7 759e 03 7 424e 03 7 549e 03 3 895e 03 3 197e 03 1 316e 04 1 555e 04 2 734e 03 1 554e 02 0 971 Hint A short cut that will turn off the computed results is to minimize this window 4 3 1 Shortcuts In the Results Display Window Double left click to bring up the Computations dialog box Right click to bring up a Shorthand Results selection pop up window This pop up will allow you to enable or disable the individual results it
96. 2 How to create a Drawn Aperture 3 2 2 3 Drag and Drop Apertures 3 2 2 4 Using Auto Apertures 3 2 2 5 Display Beam Width 3 2 3 Camera selection and display resolution 3 2 3 1 Camera type selection 3 2 3 2 Creating a new Camera Type 3 2 3 3 Resolution and Frame Size 3 2 3 4 Frame Buffer Size 3 2 3 5 Am I using Virtual Memory yet 3 2 3 6 Sync Source 3 2 3 7 Pixel Scale Pixel Units 3 2 3 8 Gamma Correction 3 2 3 9 Lens 3 2 3 10 Special Camera Settings 3 2 4 Capture define acquisition method and processing 3 2 4 1 Capture 3 2 4 2 Capture Interval 3 2 4 3 Camera 3 2 4 4 Trigger 3 2 4 5 Processing 3 2 4 6 Frame Summing Z 3 2 4 7 Frame Average UI 3 2 4 8 Gain Correction 3 2 4 9 Reference Subtraction R 3 2 4 10 Convolution 3 2 5 Capture Toolbar design the toolbar contents 3 2 5 1 Logging 3 2 5 2 Print al 3 2 5 3 Write Protect Ki 3 2 6 Computation Energy calibration select results items 3 2 6 1 Energy of Beam 3 2 6 2 Energy Calibration Procedure 3 2 6 3 Quantitative display on off 3 2 6 4 Beam Width Method 3 2 6 5 Elliptical 3 2 6 6 Gauss Fit 3 2 6 7 Top Hat 3 2 6 8 Divergence 3 2 6 9 Histogram 3 2 6 10 Statistics 3 2 7 Beam Display define the beam display 3 2 7 1 Beam View 3 2 7 2 Cursors Operator s Manual Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 3 2 7 3 Cursor Orientation 3 2 7 4 Origin Location 3 2 7 5 Beam Colors 3 2 7 6 Z Axis Scale 3 2 7 7 Beam Display 3 2 7 8 Set Reference Source 3 2 7 9 Display Thresho
97. 5 TM 765 TM 6 and TM 7 will be supported In the future we intend to add additional camera types that feature electronically controlled exposure times adjustable gain settings and programmable electronic shutters Note This feature is only available when operating with the Trigger Mode set to CW It is disabled in all Pulse modes 3 7 1 AutoExposure Operation When this menu item is enabled it indicates that your camera selection is set for a camera with some type of remotely controllable shutter or exposure timing and that your Trigger Mode is set to CW If you click on this menu item the LBA PC application will attempt to automatically set the camera shutter or exposure to a value appropriate for the amount of power incident upon your camera s focal plane array The AutoExposure algorithm will start with the maximum exposure time and reduce the exposure until the peak fluence is less than 90 of the camera s dynamic range If it reaches the shortest exposure time allowed by your camera and can not meet the above criteria it will leave the exposure setting at this minimum value and request that you attenuate your laser using some external means I e either place additional ND filters into the laser beam path or reduce the output power of your laser source After attenuating your laser it may be a good idea to rerun the AutoExposure operation 3 7 2 AutoExposure Interacts with Ultracal With most any camera that has a programmable shutte
98. A PC User s Manual for more information Statistical results for QuantRadius are also provided in the Statistics property array 9 3 1 18 Elliptical Results These properties provide individual Elliptical beam LBA PC results For more information see chapter 6 in the LBA PC Operator s Manual Property Name LBA PC Result EllipRotation Rotation EllipRoundness Roundness 9 3 1 19 Gauss Fit Results These properties provide individual Gauss Fit LBA PC results For more information see chapter 6 in the LBA PC Operator s Manual Property Name LBA PC Result Operator s Manual 165 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 GaussWholeCentroidX Centroid X GaussWholeCentroidY Centroid Y GaussWholeWidthX Width X GaussWholeWidthY Width Y GaussWholeHeight Height GaussWholeDeviation Deviation GaussWholeCorrelation Correlation GaussMajorCentroid Centroid X GaussMajorWidth Width X GaussMajorHeight Height X GaussMajorDeviation Deviation X GaussMajorCorrelation Correlation X GaussMinorCentroid Centroid Y GaussMinorWidth Width Y GaussMinorHeight Height Y GaussMinorDeviation Deviation Y GaussMinorCorrelation Correlation Y 9 3 1 20 Top Hat Results These properties provide individual Top Hat LBA PC results For more information see chapter 6 in the LBA PC Operator s Manual Operator s Manual Property Name LBA PC R
99. BA is integrated into Microsoft Excel Follow these steps to use the LBA PC ActiveX server in Microsoft Excel 1 Create a new Workbook in Excel Operator s Manual 158 LBA PC 2 Go to the Visual Basic Editor On the Tools menu select Macro and then select Visual Basic Editor A new VBA window will open 3 Reference the LBA PC ActiveX server On the Tools menu select References Scroll down until you see LbapcActiveX EXE Select the checkbox to the left of LbapcActiveX EXE 4 Forthis example we will use the LBA PC ActiveX server in a form Create a new form On the Insert menu select UserForm A form is displayed in a new window Add controls to the form such as Start Stop Ultracal buttons etc 6 Declare a variable to hold a LBA PC ActiveX server object On the View menu select Code A new window appears with an outline of the UserForm Click subroutine At the top of the code window above the UserForm Click Function type Dim WithEvents LbapcActiveX As LbapcX LbapcActiveX without the quotation marks 7 Initialize the LbapcActiveX object and initialize communication with LBA PC There are two list boxes at the top of the code window In the left list box select UserForm In the right list box select Initialize A new subroutine called UserForm Initialize is created In this subroubtine type Set LbapcActiveX New LbapcX LbapcActiveX without the quotation marks This statement creates a new LBA PC ActiveX server object
100. BA PC is designed to give you a set of measurement tools that will allow you to make this measurement as you see fit During the past few years there has been some movement toward a consensus regarding a standard definition of beam width This definition has grown out of laser beam propagation theory and is called the Second Moment or D 4 Sigma beam width The D erroneously stands for Diameter Sigma refers to the common notation for standard deviation Thus an X axis beam Width is defined as 4 times the standard deviation of the spatial distribution of the beam s intensity profile evaluated in the X transverse direction Taken in the Y transverse direction will yield the Y axis beam Width Note For a TEM Gaussian beam 2 Sigma is the I e radius about the centroid The term Diameter implies that the beam is radially symmetric or circular in shape The term Width implies that the beam is non radially symmetric but is however axially symmetric and characterized by two principal axes orthogonal to each other Beams that are asymmetric distorted or irregularly shaped will fail to give significantly meaningful or repeatable beam width results using any of the standard methods 6 11 1 D4 Sigma Method From laser beam propagation theory the Second Moment or 4 Sigma beam width definition is found to be of fundamental significance It is defined as 4 times the standard deviation of the energy distribution evaluated separately in the X and Y transver
101. C Returns LOC A 5 4 9 ORG set manual origin to cursor location This command is valid only when origin is set to manual see DIS ORG A 5 4 10 PAL read color palette This command retrieves the color palette currently used to display the beam on the LBA PC The LBA PC uses a base palette of 128 colors to display pixels in the range of 0 to 255 PAL Returns PAL 3384 RDAB GDAB BDAB RDAB GDAB BDAB Where pound symbol 3 number of digits to follow 384 E number of data bytes to follow RDAB GDAB BDAB 24 bit red green blue color value A 5 4 11 PAN pan left right up down PAN configuration new upper left corner x x move left by x X new location see PNW for limits x move right by x C center horizontally new upper left corner y Note that the top is 0 and y values always increase going down Operator s Manual 254 LBA PC y move up by y y new location see PNW for limits y move down by y C center vertically x and y use units defined by the camera resolution in the current camera configuration For example if the camera resolution is x2 then x and y will move the capture window by 2 x Liv pixels If the camera resolution is x8 then x and y will move the capture window by X8 x 8 y pixels Absolute locations will be snapped to integer multiples of the camera resolution PAN Returns PAN configuration Key Value Des
102. C application program will complete loading but the software will be forced to the Off Line mode This means you can only view files and perform Post Processing of data from and or to data files Unable to load LCA program file File Not Found This message will precede the following error message if the IcaXXX exo file is not found or is not in the same path as the LBA PC application LBA PC frame grabber detected but cannot initialized LBA PC set to Off Line mode The LBA PC frame grabber contains a programmable LCA device If this device fails to program during application initialization the above error message will occur Contact the Spiricon Service Department for assistance The LBA PC application program will complete loading but the software will be forced to the Off Line mode This means you can only view files and perform Post Processing of data from and or to data files Not Enough Memory for Frame Capture LBA PC set to Off Line mode Operator s Manual 23 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 The device driver was unable to allocate enough memory in order to capture video frames This may occur the first time you boot the computer after installing the Frame Grabber card Try rebooting the computer If the error continues to occur you will need to add memory to the computer LBA PC requires a minimum 256 MB of main memory 512 MB is recommended If the error occurs after adding memory then contact the Spiricon Service Depa
103. Calibrate your Pyrocam Hint First set up your Pyrocam to operate in one of its stand alone configurations and then connect it to the LBA PC only after you re sure that it is operating satisfactorily with your laser 2 6 2 2 LBA 500 7XXPC D Setup requirements Two files are provided for configuring the LBA PC digital interface to a Pyrocam I They are PYRODIG CFG and PYRODIG CAM 2 6 2 2 1 Set the Pyrocam configuration Go to file Restore Config and set the configuration to PYRODIG CFG 2 6 2 2 2 Set the camera options Go to Options Camera dialog box and set the Camera selection to PYRODIG CAM This may already have happened when you did the previous step The PYRODIG CAM file is absolutely required for correct operation with your Pyrocam The PYRODIG CFG configuration is a good starting point configuration You will undoubtedly need to make changes to your configuration to suit your application Do so and then save off your new configurations into new filename cfg config file Remember the PYRODIG files are read only so don t try to use those file names Under no circumstances make any changes to the Advanced Camera settings for the Pyrocam I Operator s Manual 30 LBA PC 2 6 2 3 Image Synchronization Considerations The Pyrocam I s Digital Output only produces an image each time new data is available It will not continuously output the same frame repeatedly Thus the rate of new output beam imag
104. Configures the LBA to continuously acquire new frames of video images from the frame grabber card as fast as possible or at a rate determined by the value set in the Interval edit control See 3 2 4 2 e Single Shot Choose if you only want to acquire a single frame of video from the frame grabber card Each time you click on Start the frame grabber will capture one video Operator s Manual 58 LBA PC frame and then Stop Successive clicks on Start will each cause one additional frame to be acquired The Interval setting has no effect e Block This method will cause a Block Length specified number of video frames to be acquired from the frame grabber What is unique to this method is that the frames will not be displayed nor have results computed during the acquisition time This is so the frame grabber can capture frames contiguously with no delays or lost frames owing to time spent performing results computations When acquisition of the Block of frames is completed the last frame acquired will be displayed and the results computed for that frame Note Ifyou specify a Block Length larger than the frame buffer capacity the data will wrap the buffer and overwrite the earlier frames The Interval setting is operational If you are using Block Mode in combination with Logging or Statistics computations you should read Implications of Combining Logging Statistics in Section 3 1 12 e Live Video This is a raw video display only m
105. DIS BeamView2D Beam display type false 3D true 2D Cursors L Cursor display enable 0 off 1 manual 2 centroid 3 peak CursorProfiles P Cursor profile display enable Origin L Spatial coordinate origin 0 manual 1 detector upper left 2 detector lower left 3 window upper left Operator s Manual 231 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Type Value Description aa 4 window lower left ManualOrigin I X Y detector location of manual origin Range depends on camera BeamColors L Beam display color 0 bands 1 continuous 2 gray scale 3 user specified palette 4 green 5 yellow PaletteFileName Name of the color palette file ScaleType BeamDisplay ReferenceSource L Reference source Maximum 256 characters default drive path name of lat palette file loaded Beam display scale 0 xi 1 x2 2 x4 3 x8 4 x16 5 auto L L What beams to display 0 current 1 current amp reference 2 current amp current reference 3 current amp current reference 4 reference 5 current reference 6 current reference 0 frame 1 gauss 2 auto gauss LowerThreshold F Lower color energy display threshold If energy is uncalibrated COM Operator s Manual 232 LBA PC Type Value Description eae Dace eae l EnergyOfBeam 0 then the range is 0 to 255 If energy is calibrated then the range depends on the energy calibration UpperTh
106. Error NewFrame HoldNewFrame FrameData FrameWidth FrameHeight PixelHScale PixelVScale FrameMonth FrameDay FrameYear FrameHour FrameMinute FrameSecond FrameMilliseconds CursorX CursorY CursorZ CrosshairX CrosshairY CrosshairZ CursorDelta EnergyOfBeam Bitmap FrameNumber Results Quantitative Results Elliptical Results Gauss Fit Results Top Hat Results Divergence Results Statistics Results Pass Fail Results 9 3 2 Methods 9 3 2 1 9 3 2 2 9 3 2 3 9 3 2 4 Operator s Manual LoadConfig Open OpenIndex Start Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 148 148 148 152 152 152 152 153 153 153 154 156 156 156 158 158 158 158 159 160 160 161 161 161 161 162 162 162 162 162 163 163 163 163 163 163 164 164 164 165 165 166 167 167 168 169 169 170 170 170 LBA PC 9 3 2 5 Stop 9 3 2 6 Ultracal 9 3 2 7 Auto Exposure 9 3 3 Events 9 3 3 1 OnNewFrame 9 3 3 2 OnOperationComplete 9 4 DCOM 9 4 1 Remote Access 9 4 1 1 Server LBA PC Computer 9 4 1 2 Client Application Computer 9 4 2 If you have a problem Chapter 10 REMOTE GPIB OPERATION 10 1 Introduction 10 2 Hardware and Software Requirements 10 3 Remote GPIB Setup 10 4 Command Formats and Responses 10 4 1 IEEE 488 1 Command Support 10 4 2 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands 10 4 3 LBA PC Command and Data Formats 10 4 4 Establishing Remote Control 10 5 Configuration Commands 10 5 1 Restore and Save Configuration Files 10 5 1 1
107. Fail menus Commands to set a configuration have the following format CCC keyzvalue key value key value key value END Where ASCII colon character 0x3A CCC three character command code case is ignored followed by a space Key ASCII text code for which parameter to set case ignored ASCII equal sign character 0x3D value value to be assigned to the parameter specified by key The particular parameter type format and allowable range are dependent on which key is being set ASCII semi colon character 0x3B In this document key value is collectively called a parameter Parameters can occur in any order Range checking is performed on all values in key value for each transmitted command A Range Error occurs if any value is invalid or out of range the entire command is then ignored The following is a list of LBA PC configuration command data types used for value Type Description L Selection ASCII numeric value corresponding to the desired selection All selections start with a base value of zero Operator s Manual 183 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 I Integer ASCII numeric value in integer format B Boolean ASCII numeric integer value 0 false 1 true F Fixed Floating ASCII numeric value in fixed or floating point notation S String Series of ASCII characters Note that the backslash V has special meaning in strings known as
108. IEEE 488 1 standard according to the following Subset Codes SH1 AH1 T6 L4 SR1 RL2 PPO DC1 DTO E2 CO These Subset Codes are defined in the IEEE 488 1 standard and describe interface capabilities of the LBA PC The following multiple line interface message commands are supported by the LBA PC GTL LLO MLA MSA MTA PPC PPD PPE PPU SPD SPE UNL UNT Go To Local 0x01 When the LBA PC detects the GTL message it returns to local command mode Local Lockout 0x11 When the LBA PC detects the LLO message it enters what is called the lockout state This is equivalent to entering the operator password in the Options Password menu item While in the lockout state access is denied to many of the LBA PC menu items When the LBA PC exits the lockout state access to all menu items is restored My Listen Address 0x20 to 0x3e My Secondary Address 0x60 to 0x76 My Talk Address 0x40 to 0x5e Parallel Poll Configure 0x05 Handled by GPIB board and NI 488 2M Parallel Poll Disable 0x70 to 0x7e Handled by GPIB board and NI 488 2M Parallel Poll Disable 0x60 to 0x6e Handled by GPIB board and NI 488 2M Parallel Poll Unconfigure 0x15 Handled by GPIB board and NI 488 2M Serial Poll Disable 0x19 Serial Poll Enable 0x18 Unlisten 0x3f Untalk Ox5f The following IEEE 488 1 commands are not supported DCL GET SDC TCT Operator s Manual 211 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 A 2 IEEE 488
109. LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Bucket Size 16 Figure 28 Enter the Bucket Size in the provided edit control A good value to start with is 16 64 256 or 1024 depending upon which model frame grabber you are using an 8 10 16 or 14 bit format respectively Refer to the Histogram section in Chapter 6 for additional details 3 2 6 10 Statistics Check this box to enable the addition of Statistical information in the Results window Statistical results will be computed for every numerical results item that is appearing in the Results window The statistical results provided are Mean Standard Deviation Maximum and Minimum To view the statistics results you must either maximize the Results window or use the horizontal scroll bar to bring the values into view kv Statistics Y 64 HHH MM SS 15 00 Figure 29 There are three ways to control how many samples are used to generate the statistical results calculations The following choices and their usage is as follows 1 Continuous Statistical results will begin to accumulate when you click Start and do so until you click Stop 2 Frames Enter the number of frames of data that you want to accumulate for statistical purposes After you click Start the LBA will run until the number of frames is collected and then automatically Stop 3 Time Enter the collection duration in Hours Minutes Seconds that you want to accumulate statistical results After y
110. LBA PC menu STT A 5 4 22 SYC synchronize with remote SYC forces the LBA PC to wait until data results or both have been queried and sent before capturing another frame This command is similar to LOG with the file name set to FRM RDD or RDR except the LBA PC does not automatically send the response data SYC configuration Data true synchronize remote data download Do not capture another frame until the controller sends a FRM or RDD Command and reads the response data false 2 normal operation Operator s Manual 261 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 hoc o NS default false Results true synchronize remote results download Do not capture another frame until the controller sends a RDR command and reads the response data false normal operation default false A 5 4 23 WLD read current frame boundaries This command returns the boundaries of the current frame as viewed in the beam window i e this is the range of values that will be displayed in the status bar if you move the cursors in the beam window from the upper left corner to the lower right corner The commands APT CHR CUR require world coordinates World coordinates are dependent on the frame size capture resolution origin location and pixel scale This command returns the upper left and lower right corners of world coordinates of the current frame Note If the origin is set to upper left window or upper left detector then
111. LDC Restore Config 10 5 1 2 SDC Save Config 10 5 2 Configuration Commands 10 6 Transfer Commands 10 6 1 Transferring Raw Data 10 6 1 1 X RCC RCR Read Cursor Transfer 10 6 1 2 RDD Read Frame Transfer 10 6 2 Transferring Data Files 10 6 2 1 FRM Download Data Frame 10 6 2 2 FRM Upload Data Frame 10 6 2 3 LDD Read Data File 10 6 2 4 SDD Save Data File 10 6 2 5 RDR Read Results 10 6 2 6 LOG Logging 10 6 2 7 FST Transferring Status Information 10 6 3 PFS Pass Fail Status 10 7 COORDINATE SYSTEMS 10 7 1 Spatial Coordinates 10 7 2 Pan Zoom Window Detector Coordinates 10 7 2 1 DIS Set Manual Origin Location 10 7 2 2 PAN Set Capture Window Location 10 7 3 Frame Coordinates 10 7 4 Beam Window World Coordinates 10 8 ERROR MESSAGES 10 9 SERVICE REQUEST 10 9 1 Service Request Response Operator s Manual 10 171 171 171 171 172 172 173 173 173 174 176 177 177 177 177 179 179 180 180 181 182 182 182 182 183 186 186 187 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 197 198 200 200 200 201 202 202 204 205 206 209 209 LBA PC 1 1 Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION General Information The Spiricon Laser Beam Analyzer Models LBA 300 400 500 700 708 710 712 714PC is a low cost PC based product for use in modern Pentium generation personal computers with high performance PCI bus architecture It provides all the essential features needed for laser beam analysis Some of these featur
112. LoadConfig may fail and LBA PC display an error message e The file does not exist e The file does not contain a valid LBA PC configuration This method returns the following 1 The LBA PC is not available 0 OK 1 LBA PC is collecting frames of data 2 File path name is too long 3 Load configuration error Operator s Manual 169 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 9 3 2 2 Open This method initiates communication between the LBA PC ActiveX control and LBA PC You must call this method or the OpenIndex method before calling any other method or accessing any of the properties If you do not call this method then all the properties will be zero methods will have no effect and no events will fire The first caller to Open will connect to the first available LBA PC application the next callers will connect to the second LBA PC etc If you want to specify the LBA PC application then use the AppInfo property and call the OpenIndex method This method returns the following 1 The LBA PC is not available 0 OK 1 Other initialization error 9 3 2 3 OpenIndex This method initiates communication between the LBA PC ActiveX control and LBA PC You must call this method or the Open method before calling any other method or accessing any of the properties If you do not call this method then all the properties will be zero methods will have no effect and no events will fire OpenIndex takes one parameter which is the index of
113. MB of main memory 512 MB recommended e Atleast 15 MB of hard disk space available Much more gt 1 GB if you want to log data files Operator s Manual 11 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 f A high resolution color monitor g Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional operating system with at least 64MB of main memory h A CD ROM Drive i APC compatible mouse amp keyboard Pentium and Pentium Pro are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation Windows 2000 and Windows XP Pro are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Notice PC operating system component and hardware manufactures are constantly revising their products Therefore Spiricon Inc makes no guarantee that any one brand or model of Personal Computer will be compatible with any or all of the features contained in the LBA PC application either now or in the future 1 3 Optional Equipment 1 Four camera adapter allows you to choose between 1 of 4 connected analog cameras or automatically cycle between them 2 Digital Camera adapter allows you to interface the output from an RS 422 or LVDS digital camera 3 A printer with appropriate Windows compatible drivers 4 LBS 100 BA VIS NIR or BB Laser Beam Attenuator Most laser beam energy will need to be attenuated before applying it to the camera sensor Attenuation requirements vary greatly depending upon application Spiricon offers optional equipment for beam attenuation Consult your Spiricon R
114. ND 10 6 2 6 LOG Logging You can configure the LBA PC to automatically send a FRM or RDD and RDR response each time new data is acquired Remote logging is the fastest method available to transfer new frames from the LBA PC Use the File Logging dialog box or the LOG configuration command to specify logging new data or results to the host If the data log file name is FRM or RDD then each time a new frame of data is acquired the LBA PC will automatically send a response as if you had sent FRM or RDD respectively If the results log file name is RDR then each time a new frame of data is acquired the LBA PC will automatically send a response as if you had sent RDR The LBA PC will not capture another frame until the host reads the current logging response This example describes how to enable data file logging to the host controller Host sends LOG DataLogging 1 DataFileName FRM END Host sends RUN LBA PC sends FRM FrameNumber 1 516384 DAB DAB END LBA PC sends FRM FrameNumber 2 Operator s Manual 197 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 516384 DAB DAB END LBA PC sends FRM FrameNumber 3 516384 DAB DAB END etc 10 6 2 7 FST Transferring Status Information The commands RCC RCR and RDD will permit you to download raw binary data This data does not tell you under what conditions the data was acquired More information needs to be t
115. OPERATOR S MANUAL Version 4 xx Laser Beam Analyzer Models LBA 300 400 500PC Models LBA 700 708 710 712 714PC For Windows 2000 and Windows XP Pro Spiricon Inc 60 W 1000 N Logan Utah 84321 Phone 435 753 3729 Fax 435 753 5231 E mail Sales sales spiricon com E mail Service service spiricon com Copyright 2005 Spiricon Inc All rights reserved Operator s Manual 1 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Hz KR bhTS m 7160 0014 RRA TER ARE 1 Bib PRETI JL 774 277 TEL 03 3356 1064 ao D 7532 0011 ARTH Ip gar ES 7 7 2 Sr B C VERRE TEL 06 6305 2064 em RAR 2 F H 4 SE A A 7450 0002 4A BHA KAER2 37 21 RAZR TEL 052 569 6064 http www optoscience com E mail info noptoscience com NOTICE Spiricon Inc reserves the right to make improvements and changes to the product described in this manual at any time and without notice While Spiricon Inc has taken every precaution in the preparation of this product Spiricon Inc assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions that might cause or contribute to a loss of data Spiricon Inc makes no guarantee that any one brand or model of Personal Computer will be compatible with any or all of the capabilities in the LBA PC application software or hardware either now or in the future Operator s Manual 2 LBA PC Table of Contents OPERATOR S MANUAL Version 4 xx Laser Beam Analyzer Models LBA 300 400 500PC Models LBA 700 708 710 712 714PC For Windows 200
116. OX citer 109 divergence cn ees eoa reae t rn 141 effective area eeseeeeeneneees 141 effective diameter 141 elliptical sipanas 71 134 energy calibration 67 68 energy of Deam 67 far field ee eet 73 142 focal length method 141 frame averaging 65 144 frame summing 65 144 gamma correction 56 145 gass fitis tee r ces 135 histogram eee 115 142 knife edge einen 70 133 numerical formats sss 128 peak and min 131 peak location eeeeenese 131 percent in aperture 131 percent of energy 70 134 percent of peak 70 134 LBA PC Shortcuts nn i eere rint ed 110 Statistics des tenens 74 143 COP Nat 2 2 oper e ere return 138 top hat factor 138 139 total e VE 130 whole beam fit 135 136 x y amp major minor fit 136 Configuration CAMO EE 21 l estOle oio e anaa pa aru 37 E 37 CODLOUF wack hii kooks 83 line resolution ssssssessssrseesssrrsesrrersens 84 Contour Map 83 wire density s ssssssssssessssrnsssrnerssrrrees 84 Convolution eee 66 128 146 Correlation Of It 137 giro ari pom 82 Crossh
117. The minimum Bucket Size is based upon a single count of the digitized output of the A to D converter The Bucket will be scaled if energy calibration is in use With energy calibration in effect the raw values are simply multiplied by a scaling factor that converts them to energy densities For simplicity all of the following discussions will assume no energy calibration Thus a raw A to D pixel intensity range of from 0 to 255 1023 4095 16383 32767 will be assumed Image processing can alter the numerical value of a pixel s intensity Ultracal Reference Subtraction Frame Averaging and Frame Summing are all processes that transform the simple 8 10 12 14 15 bit integer input from the A D conversion into a signed 16 bit fixed point value For ease of use we have forced all buckets to be defined in raw pixel integers Thus a Bucket size of 4 starting at zero will contain the intensity values from 0 to 3 992 the next bucket goes from 4 to 7 992 and so on Operator s Manual 142 LBA PC E Histogram Bucket Size r Display Depth 2508 2486 2464 2442 2420 2398 2376 2354 2332 2310 2288 2266 2244 2222 2200 2178 2156 2134 2112 2090 2068 2046 2024 2002 lt Figure 57 The numbers displayed along the left edge of the Histogram indicate the lower value of each Bucket The numbers along the right edge of the display is the total count of the number of pixels that have been placed into each of the Buckets The length of
118. a being presented automatically defines the bin size If the user desires to decrease the size of the bins simply click the Inc Bins button and the bins will be divided in half both vertically and horizontally creating 4 bins out of each existing bin Bin size will be decreased when the program collects the next data point and previously plotted points will be re plotted with respect to the new bin size If the Pointing Stability program is paused the change will not take place until the program is started and the next data point is collected 3 2 10 Create Palette Clicking on this option will cause a separate color palette generation application to be launched This application will allow the user to design their own custom beam display color palette Spiricon has included a sample set of palettes that you can use or alter as you wish Using this tool the user can easily create their own palettes or modify the standard palettes provided with Spiricon products The Spiricon Palette Generation program c Spiricon LBAPC PALETTEGEN2 EXE is shown below This program is very easy to use once a few concepts are understood This program can be launched independently via the Windows Start button or from within the LBAPC application as follows From the Options menu select Create Palette the following window will appear Operator s Manual 94 LBA PC is Spiricon Palette Generation E P3TPROJ PaletteGen2Wefault1 SP2 Left click below
119. a configuration does not force a read of a lt camera gt cam camera type file Rather it restores the Camera dialog box settings just as they where when the configuration file was created 3 1 6 Set Reference copy the current to the reference frame Set Reference Ry Click on this button to copy the Current Frame or the Gauss fit results of the current frame to the Reference frame buffer The Reference frame is frame number 0 zero in the frame buffer You can view the reference frame by single or double clicking into the Frame indicator edit control Frame H EN located in the lower status bar and entering a O zero You cannot bring the reference frame into view by cycling the Frame spin controls The Set Reference Source item in the Capture dialog box determines the style of the Save Reference data Operator s Manual 37 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 3 1 7 Generate Gain Clicking this item will cause the LBA PC to execute an automatic Gain Correction calculation cycle The results of this operation will store a gain correction table that will be used to preprocess all data frames newly acquired from the Frame Grabber card The status of the Gain Correction condition is visible in the Gain correction Enunciator shown here and at the bottom of the LBA PC s main display screen If the color of the Gain Correction Enunciator is GRAY Gain Correction processing is turned OFF GREEN The Gain Correction calculation was successf
120. ages in either 128 or 16 colors the dark violet background color will be converted to a shade of light gray This may not always be appropriate as you may want to preserve the dark background for example if you are printing transparencies To restore the normal background appearance click on the 2D Dark Background check box 3 1 14 File Print Setup This is the standard Windows style Print Setup dialog box From here you can select which printer to use and make some basic print format choices You may also be able to go from here to your specific printer s Options dialog box and make other choices that pertain to your printer 3 1 15 File Exit Click on Exit to leave the LBA PC application and return to the Windows Program Manager This will end your current Beam Analysis session Before exiting e Do you want to save the current setup to a configuration file e Have you correctly terminated any logging files e Do you need to save any frame data files e Do you need to save any important Reference frame data e Do you need to save a Gain Correction table 3 1 16 File Save FROG as Af You can save a frame of data to an ASCII disk file that can later be used as input data to Femtosoft s FROG or X FROG software application All FROG ASCII files saved by the LBA PC will have a frg file name extension Only the currently displayed frame can be saved to a FROG file A FROG file can contain only 1 frame of data Operator
121. aking your beam profile displays disappear Use a Gray Scale selection if you want to preserve the beam profile displays 3 2 7 10 Color Bar If you check the Color Bar item a color coded Z axis intensity scale will appear along the right hand edge of the beam display window This scale will reflect the colors that are currently operating on the beam display The numerical amounts indicate the intensity value that is required to produce the associated color Use this only as a guide unless you have perfect color gray scale acuity Operator s Manual 81 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 3 2 7 11 Copy Image to Clipboard a If you click on the above button the currently displayed frame image will be copied to the Clipboard in a bmp format This is a handy method for quickly exporting images from the LBA PC application to another application without having to go through the Export Image process 3 2 7 12 Copy Image to Wallpaper E If you click on the above button the currently displayed frame image will be copied to your Desktop Wallpaper This tool has no real practical application except to provide bored operators with something meaningless to do 3 2 7 13 2D Only Beam Display Items The following Beam Display dialog box items only affect the 2D beam display 3 2 7 13 1 Cursor Profiles Check this item if you want Cursor Profiles to appear along the bottom and left edges of the beam display The profiles will display a projection o
122. amera and our digitizer system In general you will begin to receive diminishing returns when you average more frames than the square of the number of noise counts For CCD cameras the noise is about 4 5 counts so averaging more than 16 to 25 frames will be of little benefit Pulse to pulse variations for a pulsed laser will be reduced by a like amount When Frame Averaging is enabled the display will update with the averaged results only after all frames have been received Any calculations will similarly be performed only after all frames have been received Notice When Frame Averaging is enabled and you click on Stop the LBA will immediately abort the collection of frames for averaging and will display the last completed set of averaged data Any frames that were in the process of being averaged are discarded thus when you again click Start a totally new averaging process is begun Notice Do Not use Frame Averaging if your beam suffers from poor pointing stability and you want to make accurate beam width measurements Instead enable statistics and find the mean beam width by using results averaging This is independent of centroid position 6 25 Frame Summing You can use Frame Summing to observe the cumulative effect of a pulsed laser The LBA PC can sum a maximum of 256 frames Be careful that your pulse rate is not greater than the LBA and Camera system can keep up with and that the total energy doesn t exceed the available dynam
123. ameter specifies the number of integer bits The PixelBitsFraction parameter specifies the number of fraction bits A 5 4 16 RDD read raw data Returns the binary frame data RDD configuration FrameNumber frame number 1 gain frame 0 reference frame 1 ton n is the size of the frame buffer default current frame Returns RDD FrameNumber f Width w Height h dn n DAW DAW DAW Where f frame number w number of columns h number of rows pound symbol d number of digits to follow in n n n n number of data words DAW data word is two 8 bit data bytes low byte followed by high byte Each data word is a two s complement fixed point value in one of the following formats siiiiiii ifffffff LBA 300PC 256 to 255 9921875 sl iiifffff LBA 400PC 1024 to 1023 96875 sl iiiiifff LBA 500PC 4096 to 4095 875 siiiiiii ifffffff LBA 708PC 256 to 255 9921875 sl iiifffff LBA 710PC 1024 to 1023 96875 sl iiiiifff LBA 712PC 4096 to 4095 875 sl iiiiiiif LBA 714PC 16384 to 16383 5 Operator s Manual 259 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Where S sign bit i integer f fraction Use the FST command to determine the specific fixed point format of pixels in a frame The PixelBits parameter specifies the number of integer bits The PixelBitsFraction parameter specifies the number of fraction bits A 5 4 17 RDR read results RDR configuration Return labels displayed in left hand column o
124. an object and specify the remote computer See the Visual Basic documentation for more information Operator s Manual 175 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 In LabVIEW the Automation Open VI contains a Machine Name input terminal where you can specify the remote computer See the LabVIEW documentation for more information 9 4 2 If you have a problem e Start simple Don t try to do everything in the first shot Start with a test application that simply creates a LBA PC ActiveX server object On the LBA PC computer you will briefly see a small window appear then disappear when the LBA PC ActiveX server object is created e Verify all the DCOM settings on both computers Make sure you check both the default settings and the LBA PC ActiveX server specific settings e Reboot both computers after configuring DCOM on each computer e Minimize network problems Remove all network protocols from both computers except one and try again Note The Default Protocols tab in DCOMCNFG appear to be only guidelines Network protocols can still cause DCOM problems even if they are removed from the Default Protocols list You must remove the protocol from your network connection e Use Microsoft resources Search Microsoft articles and knowledge base for an error code or error message The Microsoft Developer Network web site msdn microsoft com contains a wealth of information for developers e Use National Instruments resources The NI Developer Z
125. an the maximum for your camera and then work up to a number that the frame grabber can actually support This is particularly important for mega pixel style cameras with high speed pixel clocks Pixel clock frequencies below 15MHz will allow large mega pixel cameras to interface with the largest image sizes Cameras with high clock frequencies will require a reduction of the image size that can be acquired We have successfully interfaced cameras with clock rates at 25MHz but with a loss in image width This will vary from camera to camera depending upon how the image is formatted After making the above settings click Start and see if you are able to acquire some data frames At this point it is best to operate in Continuous capture and CW trigger mode Also make sure that your Zoom setting is indicating X1 resolution and the Lens check box is not checked If the above guesses were close you should be acquiring data frames If not then further reduce the Vertical Start and Horizontal Start values until data frames are collected With your camera detector illuminated you should see the boundary of two sides of your camera s detector that is unless one or both of the above guesses turn out to be exactly correct The next step is to adjust the Vertical Start and Horizontal Start values such that the camera image is set to just fill the acquired data window Note It is not a necessity that you configure the capture width and height to acquire all the
126. an type any notations here and it will be printed out with the charts Information entered here will remain from one reset to the next and from one application startup to the next 3 2 9 2 Strip Chart Controls These controls allow the user to configure the way Beam Stability data samples are displayed Operator s Manual 87 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 The total number of samples The number of samples to display on the strip chatt sed in the calculation Sample limit 10000 Samples 171 Iv Centroid X Iv Centroid Y Iv Peak X Iv Peak Y iv Radius Current 4388 95 Max R 4390 04 Avg R 4384 48 Sdev R 1 91 D 1 D 1 Oar ee Radius relative to g2299zs zg9g ert Q PF Hi Q x oc oO lt C4 C4 oh 5 st st st iD iD oOo r Origin Sel all ell aks du EUER ON st st st c st st st st st st st st SS C Avg Centroid S22 222222228 Figure 36 A sample of data is defined as any results computed from a discrete beam image captured from LBA PC The beam stability window will compute it s results based on samples taken from the time the Start arrow n is clicked until the beam display is Reset o or until the application is closed H and restarted 3 2 9 2 1 Sample Limit The strip chart display may become so compact that recent data points become visually indiscernible from the rest of the data in the strip chart If the user desires to collect several samples and
127. and with the Top Hat results enabled the LBA sets the clip level to the value that is equal to 80 of the current peak energy value e With the Percent of Energy method the LBA totals the pixel energy values in descending order until it finds the pixel which causes the sum to exceed the set Clip of the total energy value The energy value of this pixel becomes the clip level e With the Percent of Peak method the LBA sets the clip level to the value that is equal to the set Clip of the current peak energy value The number of pixels with values above the clip level establishes the Effective Area of the beam The locations of the pixels with values above the clip level are used to determine the beam s Centroid Location and Elliptical beam Orientation Note When using a Knife Edge method the Clip value relates only to the Knife Edge measurement process and not to the above Clip Level description 6 6 Total Energy The cameras used with the LBA PC are not calibrated to directly provide energy of a laser beam The Energy of Beam dialog box edit control lets you calibrate the LBA PC to the energy of your laser You must measure the energy of your beam using an external measuring device then enter the energy here The value entered must be the total energy of the beam for the frame currently displayed For accurate results the beam must fit inside of the current Pan Zoom window If you enter a calibrated value of zero the Total Peak Gaus
128. ase note some of the example VI s use advanced National Instruments VI s that are not part of the base package In order to use all of the example VI s you must have the LabVIEW Full Professional or Developer Development System 9 3 Properties Methods and Events ActiveX components operate on the PME system where PME is Properties Think of these as data items Operator s Manual 160 LBA PC Methods Functions you can call to perform some operation Events Notification when things happen 9 3 1 Properties 9 3 1 1 AppInfo AppInfo is a two dimensional array of integer packaged as a Variant The leftmost dimension is 0 to 31 and the rightmost is 0 to 2 This array contains information about LBA PC applications that are running and available for ActiveX connection AppInfo is used to decide which application to connect to and which index to send to the OpenIndex method The array is formatted as follows 0 Application type 1 Model Number 2 Serial Number Application type will always contain a value of 11 to indicate LBA PC Other Spiricon software products have other numbers but the LBA PC ActiveX server will only find LBA PC applications Model Number will contain 1 for LBA PC with a framegrabber or 2 for LBA PC connected to a Pyrocam III Serial Number will contain the serial number of the framegrabber or Pyrocam III respectively Not all array rows will contain application information If the Appl
129. at apply to the value in the center column If more that one parameter is specified then each is sent in a separate response If these parameters are not specified then the default is Labels 0 Values 1 Units 0 The Labels and Values response changes when statistics is on For the Labels response each label displayed in the left hand column of the results window is followed by the text Mean Deviation Minimum Maximum The statistics Results response is all numeric values in each row displayed in the center columns of the results windows Therefore when statistics is on you will receive five numeric values for each row corresponding to the current mean deviation minimum and maximum values Operator s Manual 195 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 The following example describes how to download the current result values displayed in the results window Host sends RDR END LBA PC sends RDR 3298655 86 96 1 776 02 2 288e 01 1 846 03 1 950e 03 1 696e 03 1 519e 03 3 842e 03 3 781e 03 3 812e 03 END The following example describes how to download the current labels and units displayed in the results window Host sends RDR Labels 1 Values 0 Units 1 END LBA PC sends RDR Total Above Clip Peak Min Peak Loc X Peak Loc Y Operator s Manual 196 LBA PC Centroid X Centroid Y Width X Width Y Diameter END LBA PC sends RDR 96 um um um um um um um E
130. atch sini ne 83 Current and Reference 79 Cursor Files eene 35 Cursor Ortentation ss scssiiesiis iisa 76 Cursor Profiles 78 80 82 IR LU 132 Deviation of EI NENNEN 137 Device Driver 19 22 Digital Cameras see camera digital 19 Display iol pe EK 49 Display Windows beam display eeeeeeeeee 106 histogram display 115 main W NdOW AN 106 pan zoom display 111 results display essere 109 BUERG rotate iiec ene 114 DISPLAY WINDOWS eere 106 Divergence ai needs 72 141 far fieldi sde enge ge eee 72 141 focal length AAA 72 141 Effective Area 141 Effective Diameter esses 141 Elliptical Beam eese 134 Energy Nulling sss 129 Environmental littmidity oie nerve 13 operating temperature 13 storage temperature ss 13 Error Messages iere EN eeh 22 sq 45 Export format Dvpes RENE 36 Operator s Manual Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 279 number Of Trames EN 36 Start frame meinte tree 36 Export Image eret 35 dialog BOX 4 2 iretur neret nns 36 JOGGING eoe eterne 39 Export Logging E 40 Far Fieldi uerit 142 Far Field Divergence
131. ate to the position of the Origin Note The Crosshair might not be displayed if the Origin location is outside the display window or it might be in an upper or lower left corner To manually position the Crosshair use the mouse to drag and drop it Move the mouse pointer to the intersection point of the Crosshair When the pointer changes to the Crosshair drag symbol R press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the Crosshair to a new location Release the mouse button to drop the Crosshair The Crosshair can also be used to position the Manual Origin Location If the Origin is set to Manual mode and the Crosshair set to Origin if you drag and drop the Crosshair the Origin will move with it Note It is possible for the Crosshair Origin to be outside of the current viewing area of the Display and thus not visible Check the Pan Zoom windows red dot to locate the origin 3 2 7 13 3 Grid Check this item to cause an X Y Grid to overlay the display The Grid scale will vary based upon the spatial calibration setting You can use the Grid to make rough distance measurements 3 2 7 14 3D only The following Beam Display dialog box items only have an effect on the 3D beam display 3 2 7 14 1 Wire Frame A Crosshatch amp The 3D beam display is drawn as a wire frame The above two check items will cause the wire frame display to have wires running only in the horizontal direction or in a crosshatch pattern If just the Wi
132. ately Ultracal d in rotation Data collected from each camera will be individually baseline corrected according to its respective Ultracal reference frame 3 2 4 3 5 Auto Exposure Operation with the Four Camera Option The Auto Exposure feature will automatically set the exposure or electronic shutter of certain compatible types of cameras If the four camera option is present the LBA application will attempt to find a correct shutter setting for each enabled camera It will apply the correct shutter setting to each camera during the data collection process 3 2 4 3 6 Acquisition Rate Effects with the Four Camera Option The data acquisition rate when cycling between cameras will depend upon the number and types of enabled processing features Without any processing overhead the camera switch rate is the frame rate of the camera This means that if one camera can be input at 30 frames per second then camera switching will progress at 30 switches per second If your system is not capable of sustaining this rate then the resulting rate will be whatever maximum rate can be sustained When various types of image processing or complex computations are being performed the acquisition rate may slow down These effects will delay the switching rate accordingly The rule affecting the switching rate is that it will take as long to switch to the next camera as it takes to acquire and process data for the current camera Note Image processing rules ap
133. ation about using Origin Locations NOTE When the Origin Location is set to Window UL or Window LL the World Coordinate system moves relative to the detector coordinates as the Beam Window is panned or hardware zoomed World coordinates are used to set the aperture center location APT the manual cross hair location CHR and the manual cursor location CUR Use the WLD command to retrieve the location of upper left and lower right corner of the current frame in world coordinates The following example describes how to retrieve the boundaries of the current frame then set the cursor to the center of the frame Host sends WLD LBA PC sends WLD UpperLeft 0 000e 00 0 0008 00 LowerRight 6 630e4 03 6 214e4 03 Host sends CUR 3 315e 03 3 107e 03 END Operator s Manual 205 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 10 8 ERROR MESSAGES Since the LBA PC is pretty much of a black box and the GPIB is not much better we have included descriptive error messages and other information to make debugging a little easier The LBA PC maintains two output queues the response output queue and the error message queue To enable the error message queue you must send the ERR command with a parameter specifying verbose error reporting The verbose parameter is optional and is a boolean with a value of 0 or 1 i e false or true The default for the verbose parameter is 1 true When verbose error reporting is true then the LBA PC e
134. ave As Dialog Box Enter the drive paths lt filename gt of the File that you want to save Press Browse if you want to append or overwrite an existing file and you are not sure of the file s name or location and wish to search for it Save Data to File File C Spiricon LbaPC data Untitled LB5 From Cancel Start Frame Browse Number of Frames Help Figure 7 Enter the Start Frame buffer location from which you want to begin saving or appending frame data files If you wish to save multiple records enter the Number of Frames that you want to save or append Multiple data frames can only be saved sequentially from the Start Frame location You can specify 0 or 1 to the number of frames in the frame buffer A value of 0 means all of the frames in the frame buffer 3 1 3 Export Image to a disk file Exporting is an operation that is designed to take data and images out of the LBAPC and use them in other applications Exports are a bad choice for data storage because there is no way to reload exported data into the LBA PC Bitmaps for example are one of the exporting options Bitmaps bmp are simply pictures of the beam image and do not represent a viable data source for numerical analysis If the user desires to do some external computations on exported data ASCII formats have been provided and are the only viable method for doing so Bitmap images will appear just as the current beam display window image ap
135. c cfg The original default configuration cw_basc cfg A CW laser setup w basic results Cw_gaus cfg A CW laser setup w Gauss Fit results cw_hist cfg A CW laser setup w Histogram display cw_fram cfg A CW laser setup w 8 frame averaging cw_elip cfg A CW laser setup w elliptical results vt_toph cfg Video trigger mode for a pulsed laser w Top Hat results enabled to5gaus cfg A Trigger Output at 5 Hz to fire a pulsed laser w Gauss Fit results PYROCAM cfg For use with Pyrocam De w o digital camera option PYRODIG cfg For use with Pyrocam I s w digital camera option 2 2 Error Messages The explanations of the following error messages assume that you are Windows savvy If you find that after reading an error message s meaning you still do not know what to do then contact Spiricon s Service department for assistance You may encounter the following error messages LBA PC device driver not found LBA PC set to Off Line mode This error usually indicates that your LBA PC frame grabber is either not installed or is not working If the frame grabber card is not detected by Windows then the device driver will not be loaded when the system starts This error may also indicate that the device driver was not properly installed To determine the cause do the following Windows 2000 e Click on Start Settings Control Panel Or for Windows XP e Click on Start Control Panel Then for Both e Double click on the Sy
136. cal is finished or the LBA PC is stopped because Statistics Frames or Time has expired This event passes an integer bit flag as a parameter This bit flag is identical to the OperationComplete property and is defined as follows Ultracal complete 0x0001 Auto Exposure complete0x0002 In LabVIEW the parameter data is part of the Event Data cluster output from the Wait On ActiveX Event VI Unbundle the Event Data index the ParamData array and convert the result using the Variant To Data VI Ultracal vi contains an example of calling the Ultracal method and Operator s Manual 172 LBA PC responding to the OnOperationComplete event Example VI s are packaged in LbapcActivex lb which can be found in the ActiveX Examples LabVIEW directory under the LBA PC installation directory 9 4 DCOM ActiveX is based on Component Object Model COM technology DCOM Distributed COM extends COM to support communication among objects on different computers on a local area network LAN a wide area network WAN or even the Internet The LBA PC ActiveX server supports DCOM The LBA PC ActiveX server always runs on the LBA PC computer and can easily be configured for local or remote access Properties methods and events are the same as described above whether local or remote Local access is always the default When LBA PC is installed the LBA PC ActiveX server is automatically registered for local access 9 4 1 Remote Access 9 4 1 1
137. ce of the data frames can be either live video input to the Frame Grabber card if installed or from previously stored data files Refer to the Capture Method section for source selection Activating the Stop menu item will cause the LBA PC to stop collecting and processing new data During Ultracal operations the Stop menu item can also be used to abort the calibration process An abort will cause the last previously generated if any Ultracal conditions to be restored 3 6 Ultracal Menu Action Item Ultracal is a trademark of Spiricon Inc Ultracal processing is protected under United States Patent Nos 5 418 562 and 5 440 338 Activating the Ultracal menu item will cause the LBA PC to begin an automatic camera calibration cycle The results of this operation will be to store a calibration frame that will be used to preprocess all data frames newly acquired from the Frame Grabber card Note The Ultracal process is only applied to newly acquired data frames not to data that was acquired prior to an Ultracal execution nor is it applied to data from a data file If you execute a Post Processing operation Ultracal will be turned OFF at the start of Post Processing and remain OFF after it s completion The status of the Ultracal condition is visible in the Ultracal Enunciator shown here and at the bottom of the LBA PC s main display screen If the color of the Ultracal Enunciator is Ultracal processing is turned OFF GREEN Ul
138. commands can generate error messages See the ERR query command for a list of error messages Range checking is performed on all values in key value for each transmitted command If any value is invalid or out of range then the entire command is ignored and the Range Error flag is set in ELR All footnote references can be found on the last page of this Appendix A 5 1 1 LDC restore configuration NOTE There is no default path for this command If you want the configuration to be restored from a particular path then send the path with the file name LDC configuration LDC Type Value Value Description ConfigFileName S Name of MDC RN file to load If no extension i e no period then CFG is Operator s Manual 217 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Value Description appended Maximum 256 characters default drive path and filename from last load or save config A 5 1 2 SDC save configuration NOTE There is no default path for this command If you want the configuration to be saved in a particular path then send the path with the file name SDC configuration 1 SDC Value Description ConfigFileName S Name of configuration file to load If no extension i e no period then CFG is appended Maximum 256 characters default drive path and filename from last load or save config A 5 1 3 LDD load data from file NOTE There is no default path for thi
139. conditions that were in effect when the Generate Gain operation was executed are no longer in effect In all cases these conditions are the result of an operators change to the spatial acquisition settings The DISABLED condition will occur if you make changes to Operator s Manual 38 LBA PC e The Hardware Zoom e The Hardware Pan location e The Camera Type or Resolution setting e The Camera Electronic Shutter setting e The Video Gain and or Black Level settings Warning Gain Correction should be used with only one camera at a time It will not correctly operate in conjunction with the for camera option when automatic camera cycling is enabled 3 1 8 File Load Gain You can restore a previously saved gai Gain Correction file from disk The Gain Correction enunciator will turn GREEN if the loaded file will operate under the current setup conditions If it cannot operate under the current setup conditions it will show RED Note It is highly recommended that you perform a Restore Config on a cfg configuration file that was saved at the same time that the gai Gain Correction file was created This will insure that you can restore the settings to the configuration that will allow the Gain Correction to operate correctly 3 1 9 File Save Gain As You can save the current Gain Correction table to a file All gain correction files will have a gai file name extension You will not be able to save the Gain Correction tabl
140. connections are NOT SCSI compatible A typical compatible cable assembly is AMP 750254 2 Sample compatible connector cable components are e Plug AMP 750913 5 for 032 036 OD 28 awg wire e Plug AMP 1 750913 5 for 029 031 OD 28 awg wire e HousingAMP 749193 2 for 400 max cable OD e Cable Madison SPEC4084 5A or SOSDO8TIA The signal inputs to the LBA must be differential RS 422 or RS 644 LVDS compatible Each input pair is terminated into 110 ohms at the LBA PC For good noise immunity and signal integrity we recommend a twisted pair cable with a characteristic impedance of about 100 120 ohms per pair with an overall shield There is not an industry standard for digital camera connectors so each camera type will require a custom interface cable assembly Consult your camera operator s manual for particular connector requirements Most cameras will have similar output signal functionality while each will have slightly different signal timing properties The Figures below describes the signal pin outs for the 50 pin digital camera connector based on the model frame grabber in use The first figure is for the older LBA 400 500 models while the second figure is for the newer LBA 7XX models Note Cables for LBA 400 500 models that support 12 bit cameras will work as is with the LBA 7XX models Cables for 8 or 10 bit cameras are not compatible with the LBA 7XX models and must either be rewired or replaced with newer designs Co
141. create Press Browse if you want to overwrite an existing file and you are not sure of the file s name or location and wish to search for it Export Image Export File Name C SpiriconsLbaPC dataNespart bmp Cancel From Browse Start Frame 4 Help Number of Frames 1 ES Export Formats and Extensions y BMP BMF ASCII Comma CMA ASCII Space SPC _ Cursor Data CUR Column Row Sum SUM Figure 8 Enter the Start Frame buffer location from which you want to begin exporting image data files If you wish to save multiple images enter the Number of Frames that you want to export Multiple export images can only be saved sequentially from the Start Frame location You can specify 0 or 1 to the number of frames in the frame buffer 0 means all the frames in the frame buffer When Exporting multiple images each image will be placed into a separate file The file name will automatically have a six digit number appended to the entered file name This number will designate each file in the sequence starting with 000000 and counting up Thus a given multiple export will create a series of files that will appear as follows Operator s Manual 36 LBA PC filename 000000 cma filename 000001 cma filename NNNNNN cma Click on the image file Export Format or Formats that you want to generate 3 1 4 Save Config to a file The current setup configuration of the LBA PC can be saved to a d
142. cription CaptureLocation LI X Y upper left corner of capture area CaptureSize LI X Y width and height of frame size CaptureResolution L 1 Full 1x 0 1x 1 2x 2 4x 3 8x 4 16x 5 32x A 5 4 12 PNW pan window limits PNW This command returns pan window limits These are the dimensions of the active area of the camera detector and the allowable limits of the manual origin These limits are defined in the Special Camera Settings dialog The current capture location and size must fit inside of the rectangle defined by the values returned from PNW The current capture location and size can be obtained with the PAN or CAP command To determine the number of pixels actually covered by the capture area you must multiply the capture size by the capture resolution For example 128x120x4 actually covers 512x480 pixels 64x60x2 actually covers 128x120 pixels etc Operator s Manual 255 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 NOTE The detector origin is always the upper left corner so that y values increase going down and decrease going up Returns PNW configuration UpperLeft X Y minimum allowable capture location jl LowerRight I X Y maximum allowable capture location Note that the capture location plus the capture size times the capture resolution must be less than these values A 5 4 13 PFS read pass fail status PFS Returns PFS lt configuration gt Note Only results that are tested ar
143. ct what type of data will be loaded into the reference frame Note This edit control is repeated in the Capture dialog box e If the Set Reference Source item is set to Current Frame the data in the currently viewed frame will be copied to the Reference frame e If the Set Reference Source is set to Last Gauss and the Gauss Fit item in the Computations dialog box is checked then the beam profile resulting from a computed Gaussian fit to the currently viewed frame will be copied to the Reference frame Operator s Manual 80 LBA PC e If the Set Reference Source is set to Auto Gauss and the Gauss Fit item in the Computations dialog box is checked then the beam profile resulting from a computed Gaussian fit to newly acquired frames will be automatically copied to the Reference frame In this mode setting a reference frame manually does not make any sense because the next frame brought into view will automatically update the contents of the reference frame Note In the last two examples if the Gauss Fit item is not checked and set to Whole Beam then no fit data will be available and therefore nothing will be copied to the Reference frame 3 2 7 9 Display Thresholds You can add Display Thresholds to the beam display that permit you to see when energy intensities fall into regions that may be of significance to your application You can set a Lower and an Upper threshold Setting the Lower threshold to zero will disable its operation Settin
144. ctions X and Y The Whole Beam selection assumes the beam is round or elongated parallel to the horizontal or vertical axis The definition of the bivariate normal equation and the displayed results are as follows o Where J Amplitude at the point x y Jo Amplitude at the Gaussian center x X location of pixel x X location of the Gaussian center Horizontal width at 1 e of energy Wy y y location of pixel y ylocation of the Gaussian center Wy Vertical width at 1 e of energy Parameters marked with an asterisk are the variables fitted 6 15 X Y or Major Minor line fit equations The univariate normal equation is used to fit data in one direction The definition of the equation and the displayed results are shown below for the X or Major axis d jy Jue Ae Where J Amplitude at the point M de Amplitude at the Gaussian center M Location of pixel M location of the Gaussian center w Width at 1 e2 of energy Operator s Manual 136 LBA PC for the Y or Minor axis J J KS m Amplitude at the point m Amplitude at the Gaussian center Location of pixel M location of the Gaussian center Width at 1 e2 of energy Parameters marked with an asterisk are variables fitted M amp mare not the same as the displayed Centroid Major and Centroid Minor results However they are used to compute those results items Note There is some display limitations
145. d 3D e Green Available only in 3D mode a monochrome shade of green that can be used with laser goggles that do not filter the green wavelengths White is used to indicate intensities at or near A D converter saturation e Yellow Available only in 3D mode a monochrome shade of yellow that can be used with laser goggles that do not filter the yellow wavelengths White is used to indicate intensities at or near A D converter saturation Note In the above selections data that is representing negative energy values will be displayed in dark gray except in the case of the gray scale dark blue e User Palette This selection allows the user to select a color palette that they have custom designed When selected a Palette button SI will appear in the Display Toolbar When you click on this button you will be allowed to select one of your custom palette files for both 2D and 3D displays See section 3 2 10 about how to create a custom palette These basic color schemes can be augmented by some other display choices In particular choosing Z Axis Scaling greater than x1 enabling 3D Contour displays and Beam Display selections that involve more than one beam at a time will modify how your beam will be displayed 3 2 7 6 Z Axis Scale You can expand the intensity or Z Axis Scale in both 2D and 3D display modes An expanded Z axis will allow you to view a narrower range of intensities in more detail The Z axis scaling will yield slightl
146. ded two registers that are specific to the LBA 300PC The four IEEE 488 2 registers are accessible through the common command set as follows STB Read the Status Byte This byte contains the event related flags SRE Write or Read the Service Request Enable byte These bits determine which of the above Status Byte bits will cause the SRQ to be asserted ESR Read the Event Status Register This byte contains error bit flags ESE Write or Read the Event Status Enable byte These bits determine which error condition flags cause the ESB bit to be set and may cause the SRQ to be asserted The two LBA 300PC specific registers are accessible through commands similar to the common command set as follows ELR Read the LBA 300PC Event Status Register This byte contains event bit flags ELE Write or Read the LBA 300PC Event Status Enable byte These bits determine which event flags cause the ELB bit to be set and may cause the SRQ to be asserted Operator s Manual 209 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Operator s Manual 210 LBA PC Appendix A Remote Command Error Message Operation The LBA PC can be controlled as a remote device via GPIB For the most part communications between the LBA PC and the host controller will follow the data format and coding protocols outlined in the IEEE 488 1 and 488 2 standards A 1 IEEE 488 1 Command Support The LBA PC in combination with an appropriate National Instruments GPIB board conforms to the
147. e bit 3 Error Message Available bit EMAV set when an error message has been posted to the error message queue see ERR bit 2 LBA PC Event Status bit LSB set whenever an unmasked LBA PC event status condition exists ELR amp ELE bit 1 unused bit 0 unused 214 LBA PC Standard Standard LBA 300PC LBA 300PC Event Status Event Status Event Status Event Status Enable Register Enable Register ESE ESE ESR ELE ELE ELR 7 range error vvvvvvvy Logical AND MSS 6 RQS bi a Service Request Generation Status Byte Enable Register Status Byte Register STB SRE SRE Service Request Generation Figure 63 Operator s Manual 215 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 A 3 LBA PC Command and Data Formats The LBA PC does not support the IEEE 488 2 specification of sending multiple commands separated by semicolons Each command must be sent separately and terminated by asserting the EOI line with the last byte sent The following are some typical formats for command and response transmissions cmd X CCC END cmd CCC END cmd CCC_key value END cmd CCC_key value key value key value END rsp CCC keyzvalue key value key value END rsp CCC_FrameNumber f dn n DAB DAB DAB DAB END Where precedes a 488 2 common command precedes a LBA PC command ccce three character command code case is ignored qu
148. e lt 1 default false A 5 1 4 SDD save data to file NOTE There is no default path for this command Ifyou want the to be saved in a particular path then send the path with the file name SDD lt configuration gt SDD Value Description Fi leName S Name of file to load If no extension i e no period then LB3 4 5 7 is appended to data reference and ultracal frames GAI is appended to gain frame files Operator s Manual 219 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Key NumberRecords StartFrame Append Operator s Manual Value Description Maximum 256 characters default filename from last load or save data command 0 all records up to frame buffer size 1 to n n is the size of the frame buffer forced to 1 when StartFrame 1 First frame saved 1 gain frame 0 reference frame 1 to n n is the size of the frame buffer default current frame Append existing file false 2 do not append The file will be created if it does not exist An error occurs if Replace is also false and the file exists true append to existing file The file will be created if it does not exist Frames will be appended to the file if it exists An error occurs if the file exists and the file s version camera or resolution do not match the current configuration forced to false when StartFrame 1 default true Overwrite existing file If this key is true then the Append key is
149. e Aperture Dialog Box Double right click in the Aperture Toolbar Operator s Manual 116 LBA PC Operator s Manual 117 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Chapter 5 TRIGGERING TYPES amp CAPTURING METHODS 5 1 Triggering the LBA PC The LBA PC can support four basic types of triggering e CW or no trigger required for lasers whose light output is continuous or pulsed at such a rate as to appear continuous to a camera typically faster than 1000 Hz e Trigger Out for lasers that can be pulsed by the LBA s trigger output e Trigger In for lasers that can supply a trigger pulse to the LBA s trigger input e Video Trigger for pulse lasers that cannot be either triggered by the LBA nor provide a trigger pulse to the LBA Note Your degree of success with the various trigger modes will be linked closely to the type of camera you use Most cameras will operate well when observing CW laser beams A linear or predictable response to light and good spatial uniformity are all that is usually needed for a camera to run successfully with the LBA PC In Trigger Out mode the timing of the arrival of the laser pulse is critical in successfully capturing all of the beam s energy This is particularly true when employing Line Scan X Y Scan and Tube style cameras which read out their images in a line by line and pixel by pixel destructive manner Frame and Interline transfer cameras are less sensitive to pulse timing The LBA PC provides a Tri
150. e Palette Generation Tool for editing Note Users should save a sp2 file for each pal file they desire to tweak at some later date 3 2 10 4 Clearing Colors Removes all seed colors and resets the palette display Operator s Manual 97 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 3 2 11 Password Lockout You can enter a Password that will cause all of the LBA PC setup functions to become inaccessible The password acts as a toggle Type in the password once and all setup options will become disabled Type it in a second time and setup capability will be restored The password has been factory set To find out your password call the Spiricon Service Department at 435 753 3729 between the hours of 9 00 am and 5 00 pm MST The password will only be given out to an authorized individual An authorized individual is one whose name appears on the original Purchase Order the person whose name appears on the completed warranty card or to an individual who knows the Purchase Order Number used to make the purchase It can also be obtained by a written request on your company letterhead signed by an officer of the company 3 3 Pass Fail Drop Down Menu Selections 3 3 1 Pass Fail enable and define its operation All pass fail operations are enabled or disabled by checking the Master Enable box Pass Fail OK Action s to Perform When Test Fails e Cancel _ TTLPulse w Beep Stop Running Help Figure 42 You can choose what Act
151. e buffer location or the Operator s Manual 59 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 file record number and the Number of frames or records to post process The number of frames can be 0 or 1 to the number of frames in the frame buffer or file 0 means all the frames The resulting frames will be placed sequentially into the frame buffer beginning at the current frame buffer location Be careful that you do not overwrite something you intended to save The post processing toolbar switch B is a shortcut to selecting the above file name If you are using Post Processing in combination with Logging or Statistics computations you should read Implications of Combining Logging Statistics in Section 3 1 12 Operating hints e When setting up use the Continuous method with Interval set to 1 e Always Post Process from a File source e You cannot use Post Process to Ultracal old data It must have been calibrated when it was captured 3 2 4 2 Capture Interval The Interval setting determines the capture rate up to the fastest rate achievable under the present setup conditions The value entered in this edit control specifies how many frames will occur for each frame captured A setting of 1 will attempt to capture every frame from the camera 2 will capture every second frame 3 every third and so on Divide this setting into the camera frame rate to compute the rate at which the system will attempt to digitize frames i e a 3 wil
152. e current frame Note You can not perform Hardware Zoom operations once you have caused a Soft Zoom to occur To change the Hardware Zoom you must first zoom all the way out of the soft zoom until the Light Gray box is no longer visible 4 4 3 Panning You can Pan the Dark Gray capture window across the camera s active detector region Panning works at all zoom and resolution settings that do not already contain the entire digitizable area of the camera s imager If Soft zooming is activated then the Panning controls will only pan the Light Gray zoom box Two scroll bars are provided to allow you to perform the panning operations The Horizontal scroll bar will allow you to pan Left and Right the Vertical allows you to pan Up and Down 128 x 120 X 4 EI Operator s Manual 113 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Figure 53 4 4 4 Zooming and Panning Constraints The Camera Resolution that you have set in the Camera dialog box will constrain how your displayed image can be positioned by the Panning and Zooming controls For example If you have set the Camera Resolution to 4x then the image can only be positioned onto pixels whose locations are even multiples of 4 such as 0 4 8 12 16 128 etc Likewise when you zoom out to an image that contains a lower resolution you may have positioned the Cursors to select a zoom center point that is on a pixel that is not a multiple of your present Camera Resolution In
153. e design method is the same We use SubVIs to manipulate each function then link them together IS Beam Viewer vi erate Project Windows Help Beam Viewer Panel Figure 65 In order to display intensity graphics we used LabVIEW s Attribute Note feature to handle the size and palette etc Another LabVIEW tool we used to share data is Local Variables This allows you to use any variable value anywhere in a diagram Let us go through each major process step in the Beam Viewer vi diagram Before the while loop we enable frame Service Request and get Palette if you want to change the palette you should include get palette inside of this while loop Then 1 Check if each of the Run Stop UltraCal and AutoAperture buttons is on or off 2 Check if Set energy unit button has been clicked Operator s Manual 273 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 3 Check if the status of the cursor display has changed 4 Check if any Cursor Move button has been clicked 5 Check if the ZoomIn and ZoomOut button has been clicked Check if any Pan Move button has been clicked 6 Get current frame data and cursor location to display B 3 3 Basic Divergence vi This program is similar to the Basic Results vi but contains only those items needed to make divergence measurements Inputs include the lens Focal Length and results items are Peak Div X and Div Y B 3 4 Basic Logging vi This program allows you to log data
154. e native file extension denoting a data file created by the LBA 100A If the saved file was generated using Autocal processing then the results obtained when loading and viewing this file type are of high quality All of these files produce images that are 120 x 120 pixels bb Files Is the native file extension denoting a data file created by the LBA 100A All file types of this designation are created without the benefit of any calibration and thus can not be relied upon for accurate results All of these files produce images that are 256 x 240 pixels bc Files Is the native file extension denoting a data file created by the LBA 100A All file types of this designation are created without the benefit of any calibration and thus can not be relied upon for accurate results All of these files produce images that are 512 x 480 pixels NOTICE File Compatibility with New versions of LBA PC Software We will try very hard to make all future releases of the LBA PC application backwards compatible with all prior 1b3 4 5 file formats However we cannot guarantee that new versions will produce 1b3 4 5 files that will be backward compatible with older versions Operator s Manual 32 LBA PC Beginning with release v2 50 any of the three Ib3 1b4 and Ib5 file types can be read by any of the LBA 300 400 500PC model types However the new Ib4 and Ib5 file types cannot be read by software released prior to v2 5 Beginning w
155. e of the image size difference between the LBA and the Pyrocam I as noted above the LBA will clip off 4 rows from the Pyrocam two on top and two on the bottom Also the LBA will have 4 dark columns two on the left edge and two along the right 2 6 1 3 4 Scale and resolution restrictions Note also that the Pixel Scale setting is set to 25mm not 100mm which is the actual pixel scale of the Pyrocam I This is because the image output by the Pyrocam in CCIR mode is 4 times over scanned in both the x and y directions Thus the LBA s 1x resolution comes out to be 1 4th the 4x resolution Keep this in mind if you plan to change the scaling because of placing the beam altering optics in the beam path Operator s Manual 28 LBA PC 2 6 1 3 5 Camera settings restrictions Under no circumstances make any changes to the Advanced Camera settings for the Pyrocam I 2 6 1 4 Image synchronization considerations The Pyrocam I s CCIR video output is always producing video images at the rate of 25 frames per second Furthermore it only changes output image after acquiring and processing a new image Thus the rate of a new output beam image is a function of many variables including Pulse or Chop rates image processing time and results computational times If you are using a Pulsed laser with your Pyrocam I the Pyrocam will continue to output the image of the last laser pulse that it receives As a result your LBA will continue to collect data
156. e returned Key Type Value Description Label S Label string as displayed in the Results window Status 0 fail 1 pass Example return PFS Total 1 Peak 0 Centroid X 0 Centroid Y 1 Total Peak Centroid X and Centroid Y are being tested Total passed Peak failed Centroid X failed Centroid Y passed A 5 4 14 RCC read cursor column RCC configuration FrameNumber I Frame number 1 gain frame 0 reference frame Operator s Manual 256 LBA PC Where Type Value Description LLL NN 1 to n n is the size of the frame buffer default current frame Column I 1 tow wis the frame width default current cursor location Returns RCC FrameNumber f Column c dn n DAW DAW DAW DAW bel H n n DAW frame number which column is being returned pound symbol number of digits to follow in n n number of data words i e column height data word is two 8 bit data bytes low byte followed by high byte Each data word is a two s complement fixed point value in one of the following formats siiiiiii ifffffff siiiiiii iiifffff siiiiiii WITT siiiiiii ifffffff siiiiiii iifffff siiiiiii WITT siiiiiii WII s i f LBA 300PC 256 to 255 9921875 LBA 400PC 1024 to 1023 96875 LBA 500PC 4096 to 4095 875 LBA 708PC 256 to 255 9921875 LBA 710PC 1024 to 1023 96875 LBA 712PC 4096 to 4095 875 LBA 714PC 16384 to 16383 5 sign bit integer fraction Use t
157. e toolbar Choose an aperture Shape Enter the aperture s Center location in X and Y coordinate values Note You can modify any edit text control item by double clicking inside the item and typing the new value Aperture Define Manual Aperture Shape Ellipse v Cancel Center 12 400e 02 Help Y 2 200e 02 Size Major 3 280e 02 ES Minor 3 280e 02 ES Rotation E D kv Use Auto Aperture Display Beam Width Circle Y Figure 13 e Ifthe aperture is an ellipse or rectangle enter the Size of the Major and Minor axes followed by the Rotation angle of the Major axis in degrees e Ifthe aperture is a circle or square enter the Diameter not shown above 3 2 2 3 Drag and Drop Apertures Once you have enabled a Drawn aperture from either the dialog box or toolbar you can move resize and in the case of an ellipse or rectangle rotate it Operator s Manual 50 LBA PC Move the arrow cursor over the display window and press and hold down the RIGHT mouse button This will reveal the Drag Drop and Rotate hot spots of the Drawn aperture Move the arrow cursor onto one of these hot spots release the RIGHT mouse button and press and hold down the LEFT button The cursor will change shape indicating the selected Drag and Drop function Now drag the mouse to see what happens to the aperture The four cursor styles perform the following operations D Moves the aperture center D Size the aperture right
158. e unless you have previously created it using Generate Gain Note It is highly recommended that you perform a Save Config and a Save Gain As operation in conjunction with each Generate Gain operation This will insure that you can restore the settings to the configuration that will allow the Gain Correction to operate correctly 3 110 Gain Off On 7 Click on this button to turn Gain Correction processing OFF or ON This item will only operate if a Gain Correction table is present For a Gain Correction table to be present it must have been created by Generate Gain or by being loaded from a disk file via Load Gain 3 1 11 File Logging SU The LBA PC will allow you to log into disk files in any combination any of the following e Frame Data e Numerical Results e Frame Export Images Data Logging files will have a Ib3 4 5 7 file extension name The frames in a Data Logging file can be read back into the Frame buffer by using the File and Load menu selections Operator s Manual 39 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Results Logging files will have a rlg file extension name Results Logging files are for exporting numerical results to other applications such as Spreadsheets or Math programs Text editors can also view them Results files are saved in ACSII Export Logging files can be of four different file types bmp cma spa cur Export Logging files are write only They are created for logging images for use i
159. eadroom on both of these settings because they will drift as the camera warms up Operator s Manual 126 LBA PC Operator s Manual 127 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Chapter 6 COMPUTATIONS 6 1 Computational Accuracy Once you have mastered the skill of acquiring your laser beam s profile on the screen of the LBA PC your next thoughts will usually be directed toward the accuracy of the quantitative results The degree of accuracy of the computed results will be based primarily upon two factors The first and most significant is the correct nulling of the background energy The second has to do with optimizing the presentation of the beam display The background energy nulling operation establishes the zero reference from which all computed results are based Failure to correctly null and periodically monitor the background energy will yield inconsistent results Excessive background energy levels will yield oversized beam diameters and reduced magnitudes when energy relationships are compared The opposite effects will result if the background levels are excessively suppressed The LBA PC is equipped with an auto calibration feature called Ultracal Ultracal will perform a nulling operation that is significantly more accurate than that which can be manually achieved The Ultracal algorithm will also compensate for background noise and for camera shading The Ultracal processing feature is protected under United States Paten
160. ed then the associated item will not be printed In other words what you see is what you get If both Beam Image and Results are checked they will be printed Beam first then Results If the Separate Pages box is checked then the Beam and Results will be printed on separate pages Print What To Print kv Beam Image Cancel Came kv Results Print Setup o Hi Help kv Separate Pages kv Current Frame Only WW 2D Dark Background Figure 10 If you check the Current Frame Only box then on y the currently displayed frame and or its results will be printed If this box is not checked you can direct the LBA to print multiple frames by Operator s Manual 44 LBA PC specifying the From Start Frame location and the Number of Frames to print The Number of Frames can be 0 or 1 to the number of frames in the frame buffer 0 means all the frames in the frame buffer When printing multiple frames you will observe that the LBA will cycle through the designated frame locations It will compute the required results for each frame and then print whatever is required At the end of this process the last frame printed and its results will be displayed If Statistics results are enabled they will not update during the printing operation and thus will show the same values on each frame s printout Hint Keep the Current Frame Only box checked unless you really need to print multiple frames When printing 2D beam im
161. ed to operate with some ROI requirement then you must make appropriate changes in the Advanced Special Camera Settings dialog box We recommend that you contact the Spiricon service department for assistance in making these changes 5 4 1 3 Digital Camera Exposure Controls Many digital cameras have user programmable exposure controls These can range from very short integration times microseconds to very long integration times of many seconds The exact nature and operation of these features can vary dramatically from one camera manufacturer to another In general most of these capabilities are fully compatible with the LBA application without special considerations Our suggestion is to try it and see how it works With very long integration times some cameras will stop outputting frame syncs to the frame grabber When this occurs the Video sync enunciator may turn RED Under this condition this signal can be ignored Warning Some cameras do not maintain good linearity of response when very short integration times are used If you suspect this type of distortion then you should run a response test to determine if the problem lies with the camera The only solution to this is to either avoid the short exposure times or employ gamma correction to try and compensate for the errors Besides programmable exposure control some cameras can have their exposure times controlled by externally applied digital signals Some of these camera are compatible
162. ems plus provides a quick way to Reset the Statistics results and also a method to save the current results to the Clipboard Operator s Manual v Quantitative Elliptical v Gaussian Top Hat Divergence Histogram v Statistics Reset Statistics Copy Results to Clipboard Figure 50 110 LBA PC 4 4 The Pan Zoom Display Window This window provides you with a graphical representation of where and how the digitized image relates to the detector on your camera and the tools to modify those setting The regions indicated in this display are not drawn to scale This window can be minimized but not resized In this window you can e Hardware Zoom in and Zoom out e Soft Zoom in and Zoom out e Pan the Window vertically and horizontally The title bar indicates the current image size that is being captured and stored into the frame buffer and the current resolution setting Because this window is kept as small as possible the image size text is often truncated Move the mouse pointer into the title bar and a hints display will pop up and show the full text The outer White area represents the photosensitive surface area of the camera s detector The Red Dot indicates the approximate placement of the X Y origin You can not change or affect the location of the origin in this window To make changes see the Origin Location edit control in the Beam Display dialog box Figure 51 4 4 1 Hardware Zooming The Dark Gray region
163. ence Min Gauss Height etc will be computed in processed digitizer units Processed digitizer units are called counts and are dimensionless In this case no units will be displayed in the results window Any non zero entry will cause the displayed results to be reported in the units selected Fluence results will also rely upon the Pixel Units entry to complete the energy density definition A Pixel Unit selection of PX stands for pixel spatial units The PX unit is dimensionless When the Scale Units are set to ym mm or cm the energy density results are computed as energy cm2 When the scale units are set to PX or m the density results are displayed as energy PX or energy m2 respectively 3 2 6 2 Energy Calibration Procedure After you have set up the LBA PC and are ready to acquire data the energy calibration procedure involves the following three operation 1 Execute an Ultracal operation 2 Acquire a calibration frame on the 2D display and a matching energy measurement on an external power energy meter 3 Enter the energy and select the units in the Computations dialog box 3 2 6 3 Quantitative display on off Check the Quantitative box if you want to have the quantitative results item appear in the results window Checking this box only controls the display of these results Even if not checked these results will be computed The only way to turn off all computational activity is to minimize the Results display wind
164. epresentative or call Spiricon s Sales Department for further information Operator s Manual 12 LBA PC 1 4 Specifications ENVIRONMENTAL Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Humidity POWER REQUIREMENTS PCI bus loading Power consumption 0 C to 50 C 55 C to 75 C 95 non condensing 5 Vdc 350 mA 3 3Vdc 50mA 12 Vdc 140 mA w o camera 12 Vdc 110 mA 4 75 watts w o camera Total PCI load on 12 Vdc w camera not to exceed 500 mA WEIGHT Net Shipping INSTRUMENT CHARACTERISTICS Video Input Trigger Input Trigger Output Video Gain Adjust Pass Fail Output Shutter Control Outputs Operator s Manual Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Approximately 0 23 kg 0 5 Ib Approximately 1 4 kg 3 Ib 75 ohm Termination 5 volts dc max edge sensitive positive or negative max input 12 Vdc lower threshold 1 1Vdc upper threshold 2 5 Vdc minimum pulse width 10us 5 or 12 Vdc positive or negative pulse width 700us 7Ous 8 to 1 4 w LBA 7XX 8 to 5 w LBA 300 400 500 5 or 12 Vdc positive pulse 250ms TTL positive logic 13 LBA PC 1 5 Safety Considerations While the LBA PC does not present the operator with any safety hazards this instrument however is intended for use with laser systems Therefore the operator should be protected from any hazards that the laser system may present The greatest hazards associated with laser systems are damage to
165. era s detector responds linearly to monochromatic light For linearly responding cameras the Gamma setting should be set to 1 If you are using a vidicon tube style camera or a phosphor coated imager then your output response is less likely to be linear and you may need to enter a Gamma correction number that matches the gamma of your camera Note Correction is performed on the entered gamma value so enter the gamma value of the camera response not the inverse gamma correction factor Notice Many CCD cameras have selectable gamma settings Be sure to set your CCD camera to a gamma of 1 Operator s Manual 56 LBA PC 3 2 3 9 Lens Click on this box if your camera is fitted with a lens When enabled the 2D image orientation is adjusted to depict the image as if the observer is standing and viewing the scene from behind the camera When disabled the 2D image is oriented as if the observer is standing in front of the camera looking at the surface of the detector 3 2 3 10 Special Camera Settings The Special Camera Settings dialog box contains the electronic parameters that define a camera to the frame grabber board All of these values are saved inside of a cameras cam type file We are not going to tell you much about these settings because we don t want you accidentally changing something important and running amuck If you want to experiment with a new camera type one that is not in our camera selection list then we recommend that y
166. erator s Manual 226 LBA PC Key Value Description CameraInput Which camera input is in use Cannot be set To select which camera is in use set only one of the CameraInput below 0 or 1 to 3 if you purchased the four camera option CameraInput2 Which camera input s to use Valid only CameraInput3 if you purchased the four camera option CameraInput4 CameraShutter L Camera shutter setting for camera 1 ps own eats nance CameraShutter2 Camera shutter setting for cameras 2 to 4 CameraShutter3 See e purchased the four CameraShutter4 0 to 7 Effect depends on camera CameraGainEffect F Camera input gain for camera 1 1 0 to 5 0 equivalent gain multiplier effect CameraGainEffect2 Camera input gain for cameras 2 to 4 CameraGainEffect3 Valid only if you purchased the four camera option SE 1 0 to 5 0 equivalent gain multiplier effect CameraBlack Camera input black level for camera 1 0 to 511 CameraBlack2 Camera input black level for cameras 2 to 4 Valid only if you purchased the four camera option CameraBlack3 CameraBlack4 0 to 511 TriggerType L Trigger type 0 cw 1 out 2 video 3 in TriggerOutAlways B Trigger out always enable TriggerOutDelay UNE Trigger out delay enable TriggerPolarity Trigger out polarity 0 negative 1 positive TriggerInterval I Frames between triggers 1 to 100000 Operator s Manual 227 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Type Value Description
167. ere Menu Bar To gain access to the various operational and setup menus click on the drop down items File Options Pass Fail Window and Help To enable Ultracal processing an AutoExposure cycle or to Start and Stop data acquisition click on these action menu items Toolbars The number and types of toolbars that can appear is as many as three and as few as none The number of toolbars is a user selectable option The types of tools that they contain are partly programmable by the user Child Window area This largest region is where the child windows of the LBA PC application will appear Three of these child windows can be resized and all can be minimized The possible child windows are e The Beam Display window e The Results Display window e The Pan Zoom Display window e The Tilt Rotate Display window e The Histogram Display window Status Bar Indicates various status information regarding the above displays Beam Stability The Beam Stability Window is not actually a part of the Main Window When activated it launches a totally separate application window that can be manipulated independent from the Main LBA PC application The Beam Display Window You can view your laser beam profile in either a 2D or 3D display format You can resize this window and minimize it The top title bar in this child window will indicate the displayed Frame number Operator s Manual 106 LBA PC A OEC Figure 45 4 2 1 Frame Comme
168. ery character to illicit a response an ASCII SPACE character 0x20 key E command dependent parameter value value assigned to key DAB 8 bit data byte in binary format END indicates that EOI is asserted with the last byte sent A 4 Configuration Command Parameters Type Description L Selection ASCII numeric value corresponding to the desired selection All selections start with a base value of zero I Integer ASCII numeric value in integer format B Boolean ASCII numeric integer value 0 false 1 true Operator s Manual 216 LBA PC Type Description F Fixed Floating ASCII numeric value in fixed or floating point notation S String Series of ASCII characters Note that the backslash V has special meaning in strings known as an escape sequence To specify a single backslash you must send two For example c spiricon lba300pc lbapc cfg is interpreted as c spiricon lba300pc lbapc cfg Although other escape sequences are recognized there is no reason to use them with the LBA PC T Time ASCII numeric integer values in the form HHH MM SS D Date ASCII numeric integer values in the form MM DD YY Ab LBA PC Configuration Commands A 5 1 File Menu If a key is not specified with the command then the default is the last value set via restore config or a previous command unless otherwise specified in the description Many
169. es is a function of the Pulse or Chopping rate and image processing time For this reason you should operate the LBA 500PC in Video Trigger mode only If you are using a Pulsed laser with your Pyrocam I the Pyrocam will attempt to output a new image with each laser pulse however depending upon the pulse rate it may not be able to keep up The exact same type of problem occurs in Chopped mode The chop frequencies must be either 24Hz or 48Hz The Pyrocam may be able to keep up at 24Hz but will lose some frames at 48Hz Operator s Manual 31 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Chapter 3 MENUS AND DIALOG BOXES 3 1 File Drop Down Menu Selections 3 1 1 File Load A saved data file can be loaded into the frame buffer for display and results processing Four types of data file formats are supported and are delineated by their file extension labels The results obtained from these file types are not all of equal merit however The origin and meaning of these file types are as follows 1b3 4 5 7 Files Is the native file extension denoting a data file created by the LBA PC The number indicates that the data was created by either the LBA 300 8 bit frame grabber 400 10 bit frame grabber 500 12 bit frame grabber or with a new 7XX multi format frame grabber If the saved file was generated using Ultracal processing then the results obtained when loading and viewing this file type are of high quality ba Files Is th
170. es are 1 2 High speed high resolution false color beam intensity profile displays in both 2D and 3D Operates in Windows 2000 XP Professional or higher operating systems Numerical beam profile analysis employing advanced patented calibration algorithms User selectable choices for making beam width measurement including Second Moment methods Pass fail testing available on most measured parameters Both Whole beam and Linear Gaussian fits to beam data Top Hat measurements based on the beam profile or a user defined area or line Signal to noise ratio improvement through averaging and background subtraction Frame summing for cumulative effect analysis Statistical Analysis of all measured parameters Beam Stability analysis Histogram display and results Post processing capabilities Both Drawn and Auto Aperturing for isolating beam data Both Results and Data logging capabilities Flexible printing options for hard copy generation Two Divergence measurement techniques System Requirements A complete LBA PC system consists of the following equipment 1 The Spiricon LBA PC frame grabber card with software 2 ACCD style camera or a Spiricon Pyrocam III pyroelectric camera 3 A Pentium style or compatible PC with a High speed PCI bus one slot available b A Pentium or Pentium Pro or equivalent processor based motherboard C Graphics accelerator card support for 1024 x 768 minimum d Atleast 256
171. ess OK to stop Auto Calibration A 5 4 6 FRM upload download a data frame Only one frame at a time can be uploaded or downloaded FRM will upload a frame of data from the controller to the LBA PC while FRM will download a frame of data from the LBA PC to the controller Data is uploaded to or downloaded from the LBA PC s frame buffer FRM lt configuration gt LBA300PC CONTROLLER Value Description FrameNumber I frame number 1 gain frame 0 reference frame 1 ton n is the size of the frame buffer default current frame Returns FRM FrameNumber f dn n DAB DAB DAB DAB Where f frame number pound symbol d number of digits to follow in n n n n number of data bytes DAB data byte 8 bit data byte FRM FrameNumber f Replace B dn n DAB DAB DAB DAB FRM configuration CONTROLLER LBA300PC DAB DAB DAB DAB must be exactly what was returned by a previous FRM command Where f frame number pound symbol d number of digits to follow in n n Operator s Manual 250 LBA PC n n DAB number of data bytes data byte 8 bit data byte Value Description E frame number 1 gain frame 0 reference frame 1 ton n is the size of the frame buffer default current frame Replace default false true replace If the camera or the camera resolution stored in the file do not match the current configuration then the LBA PC m
172. esult TophatWholeMean Mean TophatWholeStdDev StdDev TophatWholeSDMean SD Mean TophatWholeMin Min TophatWholeMax Max TophatMajorMean Mean Major TophatMajorStdDev StdDev Major TophatMajorSDMean SD Mean Major 166 LBA PC TophatMajorMin Min Major TophatMajorMax Max Major TophatMinorMean Mean Minor TophatMinorStdDev StdDev Minor TophatMinorSDMean SD Mean Minor TophatMinorMin Min Minor TophatMinorMax Max Minor TophatEffectiveArea Factor TophatEffectiveDiameter Effective Area TophatFactor Effective Diam 9 3 1 21 Divergence Results These properties provide individual Divergence Fit LBA PC results For more information see chapter 6 in the LBA PC Operator s Manual Property Name LBA PC Result DivergenceX Divergence X DivergenceY Divergence Y 9 3 1 22 Statistics Results The Statistics property provides all of the LBA PC statistical results in a two dimensional array of doubles packaged as a Variant Each row of the array contains the statistical results for a particular LBA PC result For each row the columns contain the Mean Standard Deviation Minimum and Maximum The results are loaded into the array in the following order Quantitative Elliptical Gauss Fit whole beam Gauss Fit major axis Gauss Fit minor axis Top Hat whole beam ht En CUT ROOM E Top Hat
173. et enges geed 19 25 26 60 SPOClal eves c ee e ret reto e eege 57 SWING ics cece MEE DEED 61 jaro l oA 55 e lee WE 62 118 120 122 user defined ccccssseecessseeeeeseneeeeesenes 52 ZOOMMNG TEE 112 Cameras analogiae iiaa 55 Capture block mode eere 42 feel Ve Tele 64 Ela ei enr Auge ee gees 57 hardware ZOOMING 111 Operator s Manual 278 Integration eene rente peed 124 tea iosia aaant naia 60 122 Imethods nacen neret 58 Cl RR 122 toolbar 3 5 edet iot 49 66 DOE RS 62 119 CAUTIONS m 15 21 25 67 CCD Frame Transfer Camera 120 CCD Interline Camera 120 CD Contents configuration files 22 Ddf acce ehe E 20 Centroid Location 85 130 131 200 205 pass fail 255 5 reiner emet ente 100 Chopped Mode kk 29 Clip Leveling irritan 130 centroid location AN 131 eff area amp diameter 141 top HN AG Amie 138 width methods 70 133 Clipboard esee 82 110 116 oro ol ils oe 94 COIN BaN 2 gene gees ee reati E ER a 81 Computations sisirain ainssi 128 90 10 knife edge 70 ACGUIACY EE E 128 beam width 132 centroid location AN 131 convolution eeeeeeeeenennnn 146 correlation of TI 137 Re ET 69 132 deviation of Tt 137 dialog D
174. ethod Video frames will be continuously acquired based upon the Trigger Type selection and the Interval setting However the data will be totally unprocessed will not be placed into the frame buffer and will yield no computed results This is best described as the is my camera frame grabber working mode When you are in the Live Video mode the Frame indicator will be forced to a 6 and the Frame Comment will be forced to read Live Frame Note This method only operates in 2D display mode Hint It is best to set the Trigger Type to the CW mode when using Live Video to locate your laser beam on your camera s detector Capture Past Process Method m Frame Buffer E File C SPIRICONSLBAPCS mm Start 124 1 Number 1 a Interval Figure 18 e Post Process This method does not collect video frames from the frame grabber but rather allows you to run or rerun processing of old data that is either already stored in the frame buffer or stored in a disk data file When Post Process is selected the right half of the Capture panel becomes activated Click on the Frame Buffer radio button to select processing of data already in the frame buffer or click on File to post process data from a 1b3 4 5 7 data file If you have selected File type in the file name that you want to source the data from or click on Browse to search for the file name In either case you must specify the Start location of either the fram
175. ev 4 10 3 2 3 7 Pixel Scale Pixel Units For analog cameras that use the Genlock sync source only the V ertical Pixel Scale is set The pixel scale value is derived from your camera s detector specifications or is user programmable to match the characteristics of your optical system For the camera imager based scale setting the value to enter is the minimum line pitch of the camera s detector For Interline and Full Frame transfer type cameras the line pitch is the vertical element pitch of the CCD detector For pseudo interlaced Frame transfer type cameras the line pitch is 1 2 the vertical element pitch Check your camera specifications to accurately determine the correct value to enter here This value is not always as obvious as it may seem Pixel Scale Y 2 400e 01 H 2 400e 01 Pixel Units um z Gamma 1 000e 00 _ Lens Figure 16 The H orizontal Pixel Scale setting is only used with Digital output style cameras For digital cameras the data is clocked by the camera s element rate clock and its focal plane array determines the horizontal pixel scale In this case you must enter a value that is the horizontal pixel pitch of the camera Choose the Pixel Units that applies to your pixel scale value Camera detector pixel pitch is specified in micro meters um and all provided cam files are specified in pm 3 2 3 8 Gamma Correction If your camera employs a solid state CCD or MOS style detector then your cam
176. eve error messages use ERR All error messages begin with the characters 1117 default true A separate output queue is maintained for error messages Each time ERR is received the LBA PC returns the next message in the error message queue If the queue is empty the LBA PC returns the current verbose setting i e ERR Verbose b The status of the error message ERR Operator s Manual 243 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 queue can be monitored with the EMAV bit in the status byte register STB This bit is set when one or more messages is in the error message queue This bit is cleared when the queue is empty Note that you must set ERR Verbose 1 to receive error messages If Verbose 0 then no messages will be put into the error message queue and EMAV will remain clear Following is a list of possible remote error messages Ibrd time out EXECUTION ERROR LBA PC was addressed to listen A time out occurred when the LBA PC tried to read from the bus Any data received will be discarded ibwrt time out EXECUTION ERROR LBA PC was addressed to talk A time out occurred when the LBA PC tried to write to the bus The LBA PC will attempt to resend the entire response unrecognized COMMAND ERROR Command is unknown or not command supported or attempt to set a register that is read only ELR ESR STB etc Bad int COMMAND ERROR Integer parameter missing or parameter unsupported format binary
177. f frames and clicking OK The frame parameter is optional and is numbered from 1 to n n is the number of frames in the frame buffer Frame 1 is the Gain Frame 0 is the Reference frame and frames 1 to n are data captured in the frame buffer If you do not send the frame number parameter then the current frame is used The number of frames is optional and is numbered from 0 to n where n is the maximum number of frames in the frame buffer A value of 0 specifies all the frames in the frame buffer The number of frames is forced to 1 when the start frame is 1 or 0 If no number of frames is Operator s Manual 194 LBA PC specified then the value from the last File Restore Config LDC command File Load File Save LDD command or SDD command is used The file name is optional and is a string describing the drive directory file name and extension If no drive or directory is specified then the current Windows drive or directory is used In Windows the current drive and directory can be changed at any time by another program some internal operation or some user action This is probably not what you want We very strongly recommend that you always specify the drive and directory If no extension is specified then LB3 4 5 7 is used If the file name is not specified then the current value from the last previous restore File Restore Config LDC command File Load File Save LDD command or SDD command is used Note that
178. f results window Default false Return units displayed in right hand column of results window Default false Values Return values displayed in center column of results window Default true Returns each set is returned separately RDR label label If statistics is enabled then returns RDR label Mean Deviation Minimum Maximum label Mean Deviation Minimum Maxmum RDR value value If statistics is enabled then returns RDR value mean dev min max value mean dev min max RDR units units Operator s Manual 260 LBA PC A 5 4 18 REM go to remote When the REM message is sent or when the LBA PC goes from local to remote via the REN line then local control is automatically locked out equivalent to password lockout Note that remote logging LOG or synchronization SYC are allowed only when remote is enabled If remote logging was enabled in the configuration i e file name was FRM RDD or RDR and you set the LBA PC to remote then remote logging will be re enabled The synchronization state is not kept in the configuration so you must send a new SYC command after the LBA PC is in remote REM Returns REM A 5 4 19 RUN start running This command has no effect if the LBA PC is already running RUN A 5 4 20 STP stop running This command has no effect if the LBA PC is already stopped STP A 5 4 21 STT start stop toggle Toggle start stop equivalent to Start Stop on main
179. f the beam intensity through the pixels where the Cursors are drawn If you have the Cursors turned Off no profiles will be displayed If your beam display is in color the profiles will be drawn in White If your beam display is in shades of gray the profiles will be drawn in Red The Profile displays will not plot negative values below the noise floor 3 2 7 13 2 Crosshair A Crosshair mark can be added to the 2D display You can use the location of the Crosshair to make a straight line distance measurement from it to the intersection of the Cursors The distance from the Crosshair to the Cursor is shown on the lower status bar as the Delta Delta 3 374e 03 display Although the Crosshair is not visible in a 3D display the Delta distances are still valid and are based upon how they were last set The Crosshair can be configured as follows e Off No Crosshair will be displayed e Manual Crosshair will be displayed and the operator manually determines its location e Centroid Crosshair will be displayed and its location is automatically drawn at the computed centroid of the beam Note This operation will not function correctly if the results window is minimized Operator s Manual 82 LBA PC e Peak Crosshair will be displayed and its location is automatically drawn at the peak energy location of the beam Note This operation will not function correctly if the results window is minimized e Origin The Crosshair will loc
180. ferred Data frames are always transferred as raw data Data frames contain no information about conditions that created the data To obtain other information regarding the conditions under which the frame was created i e pixel scale energy calibration capture resolution etc you will need to also transfer the Frame Status data see A 5 4 7 FST If you want Operator s Manual 186 LBA PC quantitative results you will also have to retrieve that separately see A 5 4 17 RDR If you wish to associate this information with a data frame be sure to specify the same frame number for the data and status results Three commands allow you to download raw data or data at the cursors from any frame including the reference and gain frames These commands are RCC Download data in the column at the cursor RCR Download data in the row at the cursor RDD Download a frame of data The LBA PC may also be configured to automatically send a RDD response each time a new frame of data is acquired see A 5 4 16 RDD 10 6 1 1 RCC RCR Read Cursor Transfer To download data at the cursors from the LBA PC you must send the RCC or RCR command with optional parameters that identify which frame and column or row as appropriate you are requesting to transfer The frame parameter is optional and is numbered from 1 to n n is the number of frames in the frame buffer Frame 1 is the Gain Frame 0 is the Reference frame and frames 1 to n are
181. fits Line fits are X Y or Major Minor aligned Centroid X Y Centroid X or Major Centroid Y or Minor Width X Y Width X or Major Width Y or Minor Height Height X or Major Height Y or Minor Deviation X or Major Deviation Y or Minor Correlation X or Major Correlation Y or Minor The Centroid Major value is the distance from the fitted Major axis centroid to the origin axis which is most perpendicular to the Major axis The Centroid Minor value is the distance from the fitted Minor axis centroid to the origin axis which is most perpendicular to the Minor axis At 45 the Centroid Major value is the distance to the X axis and the Centroid Minor is the distance to the Y axis Whole beam fits are always X and Y aligned Line fits can be either X Y aligned where the fits will be performed upon the data in the X amp Y directions passing through the Centroid Or the fits can be Major Minor axes aligned with the fits performed upon the data on the Major and Minor axes passing through the Centroid All fits are least square fits meaning that the algorithm minimizes the sum of the square of the differences between the data and the fitted surface or line as described in the following equation Operator s Manual 135 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Where Zy Amplitude of the pixel data at x y Sy Amplitude of fitted surface at x y 6 14 Whole Beam fit equations The bivariate normal equation is used to fit data in two locked dire
182. frames or results onto the remote LBA PC computers hard disk The operation of this VI is similar to the operation in the LBA PC The user inputs a filename and selects the logging method Start Stop and Closing of the logging process is also provided B 3 5 Basic Tophat vi This program is similar to the Basic Results vi but is configured to enable the LBA s Tophat results and display these results locally B 3 6 Load Data vi This VI will emulate the Load Data operation found on the LBA PC One or more LBA data frames can be retrieved from the LBA s local hard drive The operator must enter a file name and path the Start Record the Number of Records and the Start Frame values B 3 7 Save Data vi This VI will emulate the Save Data operation found on the LBA PC One or more LBA data frames can be saved on the LBA s local hard drive The operator must enter the file name and path and the Start Frame and Number of Frames values B 3 8 Put Data vi This VI will upload a data frame from the local computer s hard drive to the LBA PC frame buffer The operator must enter the file name and path and the frame location number where the data is to be transferred Operator s Manual 274 LBA PC B 3 9 Get Data vi This VI will download a data frame from the LBA PC into a file on one of the local computer s hard drives The operator must enter the file name and path and the Frame Number that is to be transferred B 3 10 Hotkeys vi
183. frames that are multiples of the last pulse received by the Pyrocam To relieve this you may want to set up a Trigger input to the LBA This will cause at the most only one image to be acquired for each Laser Pulse This can be a tricky situation since the Pyrocam does take a little time to process each image and that time will vary somewhat from image to image Also if your laser is triggered faster than the Pyrocam can acquire and update its CCIR display it will skip pulses Thus the LBA can still end up acquiring multiples of some of the processed pulses You can also try the solution described below for the Chopped operating mode The exact same type of problem occurs in Chopped mode The chop frequencies must be either 24Hz or 48Hz Thus the CCIR image can never be updating as fast as the chopper is triggering the Pyrocam Consequently the CCIR output is always creating multiple frames of the same beam profile In this case you may want to set the LBA s Capture interval to a value that will eliminate or reduce multiple frame captures 2 6 2 Pyrocam I with Digital LBA PC s LBA 500 7XXPC D w Digital Camera Option 2 6 2 1 Pyrocam I setup requirements To use this interface method your LBA 500 7XXPC must be equipped with the digital camera option D and your Pyrocam I must be of a later design that has digital output capability Early versions of the Pyrocam were not equipped with digital outputs If your Pyrocam I does not have a 50
184. fter the installation is completed The install dialogs will ask you if you want to restart windows you must answer yes to allow windows to restart and load the drivers otherwise LBAPC will not function properly Note Be sure to look at the LBA PC ReadMe txt file before starting the LBA PC application This will bring you up to date with any last minute information regarding the current version of the program The following Windows display settings may need adjustment to accommodate the LBA PC Application Use Control Panel Display and Settings tab to make these adjustments e Screen resolution should be set for a minimum display size of 1024x768 bigger is better e Color Quality should be set to a minimum of 256 colors 2 1 4 Step 4 Start LBA PC It s recommended that you read portions of this operator s manual to become familiar with the operation and capabilities of the LBA PC The operator s manual may be found on the installation disk in PDF format The PDF may also be found on the Spiricon web site at www spiricon com just following the LBA PC product links To start the Laser Beam Analyzer application go to windows taskbar and select Start Programs gt Spiricon gt LBA PC gt LBA PC Operator s Manual 20 LBA PC 2 1 5 Step 5 Configure Camera Type You should now have the LBA PC application window on your monitor The default configuration is for a basic CW laser setup This will allow you to verify that your came
185. g the Upper threshold to its maximum value will likewise disable its operation If the Energy of Beam setting is set to zero then the maximum value is 255 for the LBA 300PC 1023 for the LBA 400PC 4095 for the LBA 500PC If you have calibrated the beam energy then the maximum value will be scaled accordingly The visual effect of setting active threshold values is to force the displayed beam intensities that fall between the two threshold settings to follow the Beam Color selection Beam intensities that lie below the Lower threshold or above the Upper threshold will revert to a different color style Intensities that lie within the threshold region are defined as being in bounds Intensities that lie outside the threshold region are said to be out of bounds If your Beam Colors is set to one of the colored selections i e Color Bands Color Continuous Green or Yellow then the out of bounds colors will be replaced with the Gray Scale palette If your Beam Color is set to the Gray Scale selection then the out of bounds colors will be replaced with the Color Continuous palette Hint Program both the Lower and Upper threshold values to visually indicate that your Top Hat beam s intensity remains within a certain range Program just the Upper threshold value to see if your beam s peak intensity exceeds a certain maximum value Note Using the Lower threshold feature in 2D combined with a colored beam selection will have the effect of m
186. g or writing respectively the file file does not EXECUTION ERROR LDD DIS exist Not a valid LBA EXECUTION ERROR LDD SDD PC data file cannot write to EXECUTION ERROR SDD file created by previous version of LBA PC This is not a EXECUTION ERROR LDD SDD The Demo frame demonstration version of the LBA PC cannot read or write files created by the commercial version Invalid frame EXECUTION ERROR REF The frame is not a size normal LBA PC frame size i e 120x120 LBA and cannot be used as the reference frame Operator s Manual 245 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 crosshair mode EXECUTION_ERROR CHR not set to manual not in remote EXECUTION_ERROR SYC Cannot synchronize with remote if GPIB interface is in local mode see SYC LOC REM Following is a list of error messages that normally appear on the display These messages are automatically rerouted to the error message queue when LBA PC is in remote control mode Message Generated By Cannot run Ultracal because all frames are write Ultracal protected The Camera Gain is set too high Ultracal Camera Black Level range exceeded Ultracal Please block the beam Ultracal No Camera Video Input Cannot start running because all frames are write capture protected post process Post Process file does not exist Processing File record header does not match current post process configuration Processing Aborted This is not a
187. gger Out Delay feature that positions the laser trigger pulse for Frame and Interline transfer camera operation The Trigger In mode is only appropriate with Frame and Interline transfer cameras This mode will capture pulsed images with a high degree of success but may occasionally miss a pulse or distort the acquired image The Trigger In mode will usually capture images with a hit rate better than 95 The hit rate for Interline cameras is slightly better than for Frame transfer types In general this trigger mode has become less useful and is being replaced by the Video Trigger mode see below The Video Trigger mode is only appropriate with Frame and Interline transfer cameras It will have a hit rate of about 99 for short pulse lasers This is the best possible solution when the LBA can not fire the laser using Trigger Out pulses Notice Trigger In and Video Trigger modes will not work well with X Y scanned Line scanned CID and Tube cameras These cameras employ destructive readout techniques If your laser pulse occurs in the middle of the readout cycle only half of the image will be captured 5 1 1 A Note to Pulse Laser Users The LBA PC is designed to operate best when it can fire your laser Most errors in timing and or data acquisition are due to various camera quirks inherent in most commercially available cameras Spiricon is constantly evaluating and testing new camera technologies and looking for the best cameras for a variety
188. gital cameras esse 113 as 111 hiistogratm eigene Beete Auge die 92 orientation EE 200 pan zoom display NEE 111 opp 113 Strip Chartis aiian naaid aai aiaa 89 LBA PC
189. guesses and then modifying your results by trial and error You will need to know e Is your camera operating in an Interlaced or Non Interlaced Progrssive scan mode e If your camera is interlaced does it use a Frame transfer style detector e What are the total number of HSYNC s lines or rows that your camera outputs per VSYNC or frame if interlaced of video e How many of those rows are black and how many contain real data and where are they e How many total pixel clocks are output per HSYNC line or row of data e How many of those clocks have black data and how many contain real data and where are they 7 3 1 Transfer Mode If your camera is an interlaced or pseudo interlaced frame transfer style set the mode to Frame If your camera is a non interlaced progressive scan style that uses either Interline or Full frame transfer style imagers set the mode to Interline For most CMOS X Y and line scanning camera set the mode to Line 7 3 2 Scan Mode If your camera is interlaced select Interlaced If non interlaced or progressive scanned choose Nonrinterlaced 7 3 3 Vertical Start This value must be an even number Enter the row where video data begins If your camera is non interlaced and outputs a total of 300 rows where the first 24 rows are black followed Operator s Manual 152 LBA PC by 256 rows of video and then 20 rows of black try a first value of 18 24 6 for Vertical Start If your camera is inte
190. hanged at any time by another program some internal operation or some user action This is probably not what you want We very strongly recommend that you always specify the drive and directory If no extension is specified then CFG is used If the file name is not specified then the current value from the last previous restore File Restore Config LDC command File Save Config or SDC command is used The default configuration file name can be retrieved with the LDC command Note that the backslash character V has special meaning known as an escape sequence To specify a single backslash you must send two For example c spiricon ba 300pc config cfg Is interpreted by the LBA PC as c spiricon ba300pc config cfg Although other escape sequences are recognized there is no reason to ever use them with LBA PC The following example describes how to restore the LBA PC configuration from the file c spiricon cohu4800 cfg Host sends LDC ConfigFileName c spiricon cohu4800 cfgo END 10 5 1 2 SDC Save Config To save the current LBA PC configuration to a file on disk you must send the SDC along with any optional parameter that identifies the configuration file name This command is identical to selecting the File Save Config menu item entering the configuration file name and clicking OK The file name is optional and is a string describing the drive directory file name and extension If no drive
191. has its own power supply then follow its manufacture s operating procedures for safe operation Operator s Manual 14 LBA PC Chapter 2 EQUIPMENT SETUP 2 1 Equipment Setup This chapter describes how to get started using your LBA PC Follow these steps Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Install your LBA PC frame grabber card into your PC Hook up your camera Turn on the system and setup your windows environment Launch the LBA PC windows application Configure the LBA PC for your camera type Begin collecting data from your camera Other Configurations Note If you purchased your LBA PC from Spiricon with a computer system and installation then steps 1 3 and 5 will have been done for you and you can skip those steps 2 1 1 Step 1 Installation of the Frame Grabber Board This installation procedure applies to the following Spiricon products LBA 300PC LBA 400PC D LBA 500PC D LBA 7XXPC D LBA PC PIII CAUTION Electrostatic Discharge can result in permanent damage to electronic equipment Always ground yourself by touching the system cabinet before beginning the following procedure We strongly recommend using an antistatic wrist strap attached to earth ground To install your LBA PC frame grabber card disconnect the AC power from your computer Remove the cover from your computer as described in your computers technical manual Locate your PCI bus slots Most PC s
192. he FST command to determine the specific fixed point format of pixels in a frame The PixelBits parameter specifies the number of integer bits The PixelBitsFraction parameter specifies the number of fraction bits A 5 4 15 RCR read cursor row RCR configuration Operator s Manual Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 257 LBA PC Returns Where Value Description Geesse Frame number 1 gain frame 0 reference frame 1 ton n is the size of the frame buffer default current frame a to h h is the frame height a current cursor location RCR FrameNumber f Row r dn n DAW DAW DAW DAW n n DAW frame number which row is being returned pound symbol number of digits to follow in n n number of data words i e row length data word is two 8 bit data bytes low byte followed by high byte Each data word is a two s complement fixed point value in one of the following formats siiiiiii ifffffff siiiiiii ilifffff siiiiiii WITT siiiiiii ifffffff Siiiiiii ilifffff siiiiiii WITT siiiiiii WII S I f Operator s Manual LBA 300PC 256 to 255 9921875 LBA 400PC 1024 to 1023 96875 LBA 500PC 4096 to 4095 875 LBA 708PC 256 to 255 9921875 LBA 710PC 1024 to 1023 96875 LBA 712PC 4096 to 4095 875 LBA 714PC 16384 to 16383 5 sign bit integer fraction 258 LBA PC Use the FST command to determine the specific fixed point format of pixels in a frame The PixelBits par
193. he FROG Algorithm Calibration dialog box Note The LBA PC always builds the frg data file in the format depicted above listing the columns top to bottom then stepping from left to right Reference the FROG on line Help for details on the FROG data file format 3 1 16 3 FROG Data Collection Tips Most of the LBA PC data collection features are not required when collecting FROG data Thus the Results child window can be minimized which will speed up data collection The following list contains some Do s and Don ts for reducing errors when collecting FROG data e DO use Ultracal just prior to starting a data collection cycle e DON T enable Lens in the Camera dialog box e DO save your configuration when the camera is aligned with your spectrometer e DON T drive the camera into saturation Operator s Manual 47 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 e DO consider Frame Summing if the FROG pulses are too weak to yield sufficient amplitude e DON T use the pan and zoom features or you will mess up the scaling parameters You can minimize the Pan Zoom child window to reduce temptation e DO consider Frame Averaging if the FROG pulses are noisy e DON T enable Convolution e DO use the Video Trigger method if pulse amplitude is high enough e DON T use apertures Operator s Manual 48 LBA PC 3 2 Options Drop Down Menu Selections 3 2 1 Hide Show Capture Display Aperture Toolbar The above three toolbars can be selectively
194. he host controller requests and receives data in frame number 17 The LBA PC sends the 32 X 30 frame as 960 data words or 1920 bytes Host sends RDD FrameNumber 17 END LBA PC sends RDD FrameNumber 17 Width 32 Height 30 3960 DAW DAW END 10 6 2 Transferring Data Files Four commands allow you to download upload read or write data files These commands are Operator s Manual 190 LBA PC FRM Download data file remote to host FRM Upload data file host to remote LDD File Load data file loaded remote SDD File Save As data file saved remote The FRM command is used to download and upload LBA PC data files The transmitted data is in an internal binary form that is identical to a LB3 4 5 data file The format of this data is not documented To use this command you must save and restore exactly what was received from the LBA PC Data downloaded with the FRM command should be written to a file on disk with the extension LB3 4 5 This data file can then be read by LBA PC using the File Load dialog box To upload a data file you must send exactly the binary data received in a previous FRM command or exactly the binary data read from a LB3 4 5 file written by LBA PC The LBA PC may also be configured to send a FRM response each time a new frame of data is acquired see A 5 4 6 FRM The LDD and SDD commands are used to tell the LBA PC to read and write data files on the remote compute
195. hing the camera sensor by shading it with your hand You should be able to obtain the entire range of colors shown on the color bar along the right side of the display window If you are using a camera with a lens you should be able to obtain a recognizable image by adjusting the lens f stop and focus 2 1 7 Step 7 Sample Configurations You are probably now ready to try looking at a laser and to go exploring the many operating options of the LBA PC CAUTION Before you expose your camera to your laser beam make sure that the power energy of your laser is well below the damage threshold of your camera s photo imager You may also need to attenuate your beam to bring it into a range that will prevent your camera s imager from saturating To help you get started we have created a set of configuration files that you can restore These configuration files will adapt the LBA for a variety of basic operating modes However these configuration files do not know which particular camera you are using Therefore you must select the appropriate camera to complete your setup To select a camera you will have to repeat the procedure in Step 5 Operator s Manual 21 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 The factory supplied configuration files are write protected so that you cannot accidentally lose or overwrite them Each of these file names begin with a tilde for easy identification Some examples of these files are lbap
196. ic range Note You may want to use block mode to insure that you do not miss any pulses Frame summing will cause fixed pattern noise to increase in proportion to the number of frames summed while temporal noise will increase only as the square root of the number of frames being summed Thus some improvement in the signal to noise ratio will be realized To further improve the signal to noise ratio try using Frame Summing together with Frame Averaging Operator s Manual 144 LBA PC When Frame Summing is enabled the display will update with the summed results only after all frames have been received Any calculations will similarly be performed only after all frames have been received Notice When Frame Summing is enabled and you click on Stop the LBA will immediately abort the collection of frames for summing and will display the last completed set of summed data Any frames that were in the process of being summed are discarded thus when you again click Start a totally new summing process begins 6 26 Gamma Correction If your camera has a gamma value less than or greater than 1 the LBA can be set to correct for your cameras non linear response Enter the gamma of the camera in the Gamma edit control in the Camera dialog box Each pixel of each new frame of data will be automatically corrected as defined in the equation shown below If you enter a value of 1 gamma correction is disabled l g Z EI xP P Where Z Gamma correc
197. ication type is 0 then that row does not contain application information Row 0 will never contain application information Application indices are fixed at launch and remain until the application is closed The first LBA PC gets index 1 the second gets index 2 etc When an application is closed the index is released If you close application 1 then row 1 Application type will be set to 0 but row 2 through 31 will still contain any previous application information 9 3 1 2 Running This property indicates the status of the LBA PC data collection This property returns TRUE if the LBA PC is collecting data frames Otherwise this property returns FALSE 9 3 1 3 OperationComplete This property indicates the status of the Ultracal operation This bit flag is defined as follows Operator s Manual 161 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Ultracal complete 0x0001 Auto Exposure complete 0x0002 Values are added to this property but never removed Write a 0 to reset this property 9 3 1 4 OperationError This property indicates any previous operation errors This bit flag is defined as follows 0x0001 Attempt to Start running while Ultracal or Auto Exposure 0x0002 Attempt to Ultracal or Auto Exposure while running 0x0004 LoadConfig method failed Values are added to this property but never removed Write a 0 to reset this property 9 3 1 5 NewFrame HoldNewFrame These properties can be used for polling when a new frame is collected
198. ich key is being set p ASCII semi colon character 0x3B key value can occur in any order Operator s Manual 263 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Configuration query commands return all of the keys for the specified configuration in the following format CCC key value key value key value key value 3Cannot be set while LBA PC is running Cannot be set information only World coordinates are based on the frame size capture resolution origin location and pixel scale Use the WLD command to determine frame current boundaries World coordinate values will always be snapped to the nearest resolution pixel The backslash character V has special meaning known as an escape sequence To specify a single backslash you must send two 2 For example c Ispiricon ba300pc bapc cfg is interpreted by the LBA PC as c spi ricon ba300pc bapc cfg Although other escape sequences are recognized there is no reason to ever use them with the LBA PC Operator s Manual 264 LBA PC Appendix B LabVIEW Support B 1 Introduction LabVIEW is a product and registered trademark of National Instruments Corporation LabVIEW is a general purpose programming system designed specifically for data acquisition and instrument control LabVIEW programs are called Virtual Instruments VI s because their appearance and operation can mimic other instruments such as the LBA PC laser beam analyzer Thus your LBA PC can be remotely cont
199. ilities box during the installation of the LBA PC application two VI library files LBA PC LLB and SUBVI LLB will be installed in the following sub directories C SPIRICON LBAPC LABVIEW GPIB Examples LBAPC LLB Operator s Manual 265 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 SUBVI LLB You can either copy these library files to your LabVIEW development computer or read these files from the Spiricon supplied CD B 2 The Basic SubVI Library Examples SUBVI LLB contains 22 basic functions that can be called by other VI s The functions of these SubVI s are analogous to subroutines in other types of programming environments such as C The following list contains the library SubVI s name a brief description of what it does and the standard Inputs and Outputs of the VI B 2 1 Auto Aperture ON OFF vi Description Turn on off auto aperturing Input Output 1 GPIB address 1 Error out 2 On Off Boolean 3 Error in B 2 2 Comma String to Array vi Description Translate a comma delimited string to an array Input Output 1 Input string 1 The array 2 The total of rows in the array B 2 3 Display Beam Frame vi Description Get current frame from LBA PC and display it as intensity graph Input Output 1 GPIB address 1 Frame 2 Error in 2 Beam frame 3 Width 4 Height Operator s Manual 266 LBA PC 5 Error out B 2 4 Do Ultracal vi Description Turn Ultra calibration on and wait to be completed In
200. in also increases video noise Use Video Gain sparingly or not at all Leave it set to 1 whenever possible e The Black Level will be adjusted automatically each time you perform an Ultracal calibration cycle Therefore it is best that you make no changes to this setting If you alter the Black Level after an Ultracal the calibration will no longer be valid 3 2 4 3 1 The Four Camera Option Some enhancements have been made to the four camera option with the release of software version 4 00 These enhancements make it possible to automatically sequence data collection between multiple cameras up to four This sequencing only applies to analog cameras and the following operating conditions must be met e All cameras must be the same type or model e The cameras must be Gen Locked together e If cameras with remotely controlled shutters are used the shutter control circuits must be paralleled to each camera The status of the input video is shown in the video enunciator located at the bottom of the LBA PC s main display window The number shown in this enunciator indicates which camera is currently selected If it shows GREEN then camera sync is present If it shows RED then there is either no camera connected or the connected camera is not operating 3 2 4 3 2 How to Specify Video Gain Black Level Shutter and Video Trigger Level On the right side of the Camera panel you will see a panel containing a Camera drop down Video Gain
201. in the display represents a fluence Bucket Each Bucket describes a range of quantified fluence values The minimum Bucket Size is based upon a single count of the 8 10 12 14 15 bit digitized output of the A to D converter or digital camera The Bucket will be scaled if energy calibration is in use See Histogram computations in Chapter 6 E Histogram Bucket Size E Display Depth 2508 2486 2464 2442 2420 2398 2376 2354 2332 2310 2288 2266 2244 2222 2200 2178 2156 2134 2112 2090 2068 2046 2024 2002 lt Figure 55 The numbers displayed along the left edge of the Histogram indicate the lower value of each Bucket You can set the Bucket Size by using the edit spin control at the top of the Histogram display window or you can change it in the Computations dialog box The numbers along the right edge of the display are the total count of the number of pixels that have been placed into each of the Buckets The length of the drawn bar graphs the depth to which the Bucket is filled Zero count is on the left The Display Depth indicator shows the current maximum value of the horizontal scale The horizontal scale is auto ranged to the current maximum count The horizontal scale can be magnified so that smaller values can be enlarged for easy viewing With the Horizontal Scroll Bar moved all the way to the right the right edge of the bar display will represent the Bucket with the most number of pixels in it By sliding thi
202. ion 1 2 yields a 5Vdc level position 2 3 yields a 12Vdc level 2 4 4 Pass Fail Out Connector J5 J2 on LBA 7XX frame grabbers pin 1 is the Pass Fail Out signal This signal is factory set to output 5Vdc pulses You can change this signal to 12Vdc level pulses by moving Jumper E1 E4 to bridge pins 2 3 To enable this signal and select its mode of operation see the Pass Fail menu topic Note Jumper El E4 controls the output signal level for both Trigger Out and Pass Fail Out Jumper position 1 2 yields a 5Vdc level position 2 3 yields a 12Vdc level 2 4 5 Trigger In Connector J2 J5 on LBA 3 4 500 frame grabbers pin 2 is where you apply the Trigger In signal This input must be only a positive voltage with respect to ground But you can pulse it with either a high going or a low going pulse You can program the Trigger In Polarity to respond to either a positive rising or negative falling edge of this input signal 2 4 6 Video In The BNC connector not shown above is where you input either RS 170 or CCIR formatted black and white video The video input is terminated into 75 ohms This is Camera input number 1 If you have purchased the 4 camera option three additional BNC connectors are provided on a separate bracket assembly These BNC connectors provide inputs for cameras number 2 3 and 4 top to bottom 2 5 Camera Control Cables Many cameras shipped by Spiricon will be supplied with a Camera Control Cable Connect
203. ion s will be performed based upon if the results Fails or Passes the designated tests Check the appropriate box to obtain these available actions e TTL Pulse If you want the LBA to send a TTL pulse out the rear J5 connector pin 1 each time the Pass Fail condition is met e Beep If you want the LBA to cause your PC to Beep each time the Pass Fail condition is met e Stop Running If you want the LBA to halt and display the frame that caused the Pass Fail condition to be met Operator s Manual 98 3 3 1 1 PASS or FAIL results The remaining Pass Fail dialog boxes are used to set the Pass Fail limits for the results items that you want to test and screen for When you check an item you turn on the Pass Fail screening for that particular result At the same time you change how that result item will appear in the results window If a results item is being tested and it fails the test limits the displayed color will appear RED if it passes the test limits it will appear in GREEN 3 3 1 2 Pass Fail Units The test units are always the same as what appears in the results window If you redefine the results window units the set Pass Fail values will not automatically rescale to the new settings In this case you must manually change the Min and Max limits to meet the new unit requirements 3 3 1 3 Pass Fail dialog boxes The remaining Pass Fail dialog boxes are very similar in how they allow you to select and set lim
204. ions on the camera detector Detector coordinates are always positive integers For a particular camera type detector coordinates never change The detector coordinate origin is always the upper left corner of the detector This origin does not start at x 0 y 0 rather it relates to electronic timing of the camera X values increase to the right and decrease to the left Y values increase going down and decrease going up The Pan Zoom window represents the boundary of active pixels on the detector Use the PNW command to retrieve the upper left and lower right corners describing the camera detector pan window limits The following example describes how to retrieve the boundaries of the camera detector and set the upper left corner of the capture window to the upper left corner of the detector Host sends PNW END LBA PC sends PNW UpperLeft 112 32 LowerRight 744 512 END Host sends PAN X 112 32 END Operator s Manual 201 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Detector coordinates are used to position the origin location which in turn defines the World Coordinate system Detector coordinates also are used to define the location of the frame data capture windwo which in turn defines the Frame Coordinate system 10 7 2 1 DIS Set Manual Origin Location The Origin location can be set anywhere inside the PNW limits Since the Origin location defines world coordinates there is no way for you to associate a particular wo
205. is being installed The older LBA 400 500 series has a slightly different arrangement but the concept remains the same 2 1 2 Step 2 Camera Connections If you purchased a Pyrocam III to use with LBA PC disregard this section and refer to your Pyrocam III Installation Guide To use LBA PC with your Pyrocam III you must launch LBA PC from the Pyrocam III Control Console Operator s Manual 18 LBA PC 2 1 2 1 Analog Cameras Connect the video out from your camera to the BNC connector on the LBA PC frame grabber card This is the camera 1 input channel If you have the 4 camera adapter option then camera 2 s input is at the top 3 in the middle and 4 at the bottom of the adapter bracket assembly If you purchased your camera from Spiricon you may have been provided with a Camera Control Cable This cable will usually provide power to your camera and also control signals for your camera s electronic shutter if it has one Plug this cable between the appropriate 9 pin connector on the frame grabber card and into your camera If you have the 4 camera adapter the additional cameras will need to be powered from an external power supply Your camera may also be supplied with a separate power supply If so connect it according to the instructions provided with the camera 2 1 2 2 Digital Cameras Connect the digital output from your camera to the SCSI 2 type connector on the digital camera adapter provided with the LBA PC frame grabber card
206. isk file All configuration files have the cfg file extension Whichever configuration was the last to be saved or restored will become the default configuration the next time the LBA PC application is run The configuration file contains all setup parameters of the LBA PC menus The configuration file does not preserve and thus will not restore Data frames Reference frames Gain Correction frames or Ultracal processing information The above types of frames must be saved and restored separately Ultracal processing data must be generated immediately prior to the acquisition of new data frames as it relates to present camera calibration requirements 3 1 5 Restore Config from a file Past setup configurations of the LBA PC can be restored from previously saved cfg disk files All configuration files have the cfg file extension Whichever configuration was the last to be restored or saved will become the default configuration the next time the LBA PC application is run The configuration file contains all setup parameters of the LBA PC menus The configuration file does not preserve and thus will not restore Data frames Reference frames Gain Correction frames or Ultracal processing information The above types of frames must be saved and restored separately Ultracal processing data must be generated immediately prior to the acquisition of new data frames as it relates to present camera calibration requirements Notice Restoring
207. ith release v4 00 any of the three Ib3 Ib4 and Ib5 file types can be read by any of the LBA 7XXPC model types However the new lb7 file types cannot be read by software released prior to v4 00 Data files can contain one or more frames of data Each frame of data is called a Record Embedded in each Record is all the information necessary to accurately reproduce the original frame Pixel scale Camera type Zoom and Pan location energy and Ultracal values etc are saved within each Record Note If you load an LBA 100A record that used a different camera setup than the one you currently have configured then one or more of the following can occur e If the Camera type file is available it will be loaded and replace the current settings See Camera type selection e If the Camera type file is available but the pixel scale or resolution settings do not agree with the current settings it will be loaded and the Pixel Scale and Resolution settings changed to match the data file values e If the Camera type file is not available the camera type will be set to NONE and the Pixel Scale and resolution will be changed to that required of the Data File 3 1 1 1 Load Frame Dialog Box Enter the drive paths and filename Ibx of the File that you want to load Press Browse if your not sure of the file s name or location and wish to search for it Load Data from File File CS piriconsLbaPC data Lntitled LB5 4 Records Ca
208. its for the result items that you want to test In each instance you must 1 Enable the results item by checking on its selection box 2 Set the test limit values that are required In some instances you can select either or both Minimum and Maximum test limits Pass Fail testing can only be performed on Current frame results No Pass Fail testing is allowed for Statistics results Pass Fail testing can only be performed on computational results that are enabled in the Computations dialog box Most of the Pass Fail dialog box edit control items are obvious in their meaning and how to set them up A few items are less obvious and are explained in the following sections 3 3 2 Quantitative Pass Fail The following results may be set in the Pass Fail Quantitative dialog below the main menu Pass Fail item 3 3 2 1 Min Fluence The Min Fluence test is performed on the Min value in the Quantitative results display This test is best applied in conjunction with a manually Drawn Aperture It can be used to test for a Minimum fluence range of values over a specified region of your beam If your beam is a Top Hat don t use this test Use the Top Hat Fluence setting in the Top Hat Pass Fail dialog box Operator s Manual 99 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 3 3 2 2 Centroid The Centroid Pass Fail item allows you to define a circle that must contain the centroid of the beam energy To implement this test you must define the location
209. l cause a 30 Hz frame rate camera to be digitized at 10 frames per second The ultimate impact of this setting is also determined by the Trigger Interval setting see Rate Control in Chapter 5 Note The fastest achievable frame rate is determined by other factors including the image size the speed of your PC the type and number of results being computed the amount of processing being employed 3 2 4 3 Camera The Camera panel in the Capture dialog box permits you to e Select which camera Input is in use Note This choice is only available if you purchased the four camera option see section 3 2 4 3 1 below otherwise the only available choice is Camera 1 e Set the Video Gain level of the signal processing system on the frame grabber card Note If you have the four camera option this control will apply only to the currently selected camera e Set the digitizer Black Level threshold Note If you have the four camera option this control will apply only to the currently selected camera e Program the electronic Shutter setting of your camera if your camera is equipped with a remote shutter control feature Note If you have the four camera option this control will apply only to the currently selected camera Operator s Manual 60 LBA PC Camera Input Camera v La Camera 1 Video Gain 1 00 _ Camera 2 _ Camera 3 Black Level 256 _ Camera 4 EN B SN Figure 19 Operating hints e Increasing Video Ga
210. l is being tested for the trigger level pixel value When a trigger field is detected the data is retained in the frame buffer and displayed The timing delay to the next frame that can be acquired depends upon the overhead needed to process the first frame As in earlier examples the Interline camera can display a pulse acquired in both fields while the Frame transfer camera can only use one field Because of the asynchronous arrival of the laser pulse the Frame transfer image will randomly hop fields 5 2 Capture Methods and Rate Control The rate at which data is being acquired can be seen in the Rate counter displayed at the far right edge of the status line Raet o To determine the acquisition rate in frames per second divide the camera s frame rate by the indicated Rate counter value In every case the fastest rate at which data can be acquired is ultimately dependent upon how you have configured the LBA to operate Rates slower than the fastest rate can to a greater extent be controlled by the user The fastest acquisition rates are thus determined by a combination of factors that are dependent upon the selections made in the Capture Computations and Display dialog boxes In general the more features you are using the slower things will operate Two specific edit control items are provided that allow you to program the acquisition rate These are the Capture Interval and Trigger Interval Frame Averaging and Summing will al
211. lay it s at 90 degrees 3 2 7 14 4 Wire Density The number of wires that comprise the Wire Frame display is controlled by the Wire Density edit control selection This setting also controls the Contour line resolution The higher the Wire Density the slower your draw rate Choose the minimum density that will allow you to see what you need to see Operator s Manual 84 LBA PC Wire Density 128x120 v Figure 33 Note Whenever you do a Soft Zoom while in 3D mode the Wire Density will go to the highest resolution value possible based upon the camera resolution setting For example if your camera resolution is 256x240 and your Wire Frame setting is 64x60 the first time you Soft Zoom into the image the wire frame resolution will change to 128x120 3 2 8 Beam Display Toolbar You can select which functions you want to appear on the Display Toolbar by checking the desired item The functions will appear on the toolbar in the same order that they are listed in this dialog box The three toolbar panels contain most of the items listed in the Beam Display dialog box Cursor Profiles and Display Thresholds are not available on the toolbar The 3D Rotate and Tilt edit controls will appear as scroll bars in a dedicated Rotate and Tilt window 3 2 9 Beam Stability This program collects centroid and peak data from the LBA PC and displays it graphically The graphics that are displayed are as follows e A strip chart that collects the fol
212. lds 3 2 7 10 Color Bar 3 2 7 11 Copy Image to Clipboard pu 3 2 7 12 Copy Image to Wallpaper 3 2 7 13 2D Only Beam Display Items 3 2 7 14 3D only 3 2 8 Beam Display Toolbar 3 2 9 Beam Stability 3 2 9 1 Main Controls 3 2 9 2 Strip Chart Controls 3 2 9 3 Peak Centroid Scatter Plot and Histogram 3 2 10 Create Palette 3 2 10 1 Saving the Palette 3 2 10 2 Save Colors 3 2 10 3 Load Colors 3 2 10 4 Clearing Colors 3 2 41 Password Lockout 3 3 Pass Fail Drop Down Menu Selections 3 3 1 Pass Fail enable and define its operation 3 3 1 1 PASS or FAIL results 3 3 1 2 Pass Fail Units 3 3 1 3 Pass Fail dialog boxes 3 3 2 Quantitative Pass Fail 3 3 2 1 Min Fluence 3 3 2 2 Centroid 3 3 3 Elliptical Pass Fail 3 3 3 1 Orientation 3 3 4 Gauss Pass Fail 3 3 5 Top Hat Pass Fail 3 3 5 1 Top Hat Fluence 3 3 5 2 Divergence Pass Fail 3 4 Window Drop Down Menu Selections 3 4 1 Tile 3 5 Start Stop A Toggle Menu Action Item 3 6 Ultracal Menu Action Item 3 6 1 How to Ultracal 3 6 2 What Disables Ultracal 3 7 AutoExposure Menu Action Item 3 7 1 X AutoExposure Operation 3 7 2 AutoExposure Interacts with Ultracal Chapter 4 DISPLAY WINDOWS 4 1 Main Window Operator s Manual 6 106 106 LBA PC 4 2 The Beam Display Window 106 4 2 1 Frame Comment 107 4 2 2 Shortcuts 109 4 3 The Results Display Window 109 4 3 1 Shortcuts 110 4 4 The Pan Zoom Display Window 111 4 4 1 Hardware Zooming 111 4 4 1 1 Analog Camera Zooming 112 4
213. le Orientation test Orientation test enable RotateOrientation Rotation base vf SEEN RotateRange I Rotation maximum bem A 5 3 4 pass fail gauss configuration GaussCentroid B Gauss centroid test enable GaussCentroidXLoc X location in world coordinates Operator s Manual 236 LBA PC Zoo Value Description 1e201e0 2 to 1e12 MCN EK E PR in world coordinates 1e12 to 1e12 GaussCentroidRadius Maximum distance from CentroidXLoc CentroidYLoc in world coordinates 0 to 1e12 GaussCentroidMinor P Minor or Y axis centroid test enable GaussCentroidRadiusMinor F Maximum distance from GaussCentroidMinor in world coordinates 0 to 1e12 GaussMajorMin Major axis or Width X minimum in world coordinates 0 to 1e12 GaussMajorMax Major axis or Width X maximum in world coordinates 0 tole12 GaussMinorMin Minor axis or Width Y minimum in world coordinates 0 to 1e12 GaussMinorMax Minor axis or Width Y maximum in world coordinates 0 to 1e12 GaussHeightMin Gauss Height Gauss Height Major or Gauss Height X minimum 1e12 to 1e12 GaussHeightMax Gauss Height Gauss Height Major or Gauss Height X maximum 1e12 to 1e12 GaussCorrelation Min Max test enable Operator s Manual 237 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Value Description GaussCorrelationMin Gauss Correlation Gauss Correlation Major or Gauss Correlation X minimum Otol
214. le This result is affected by which Top Hat method is being employed The Top Hat Fluence Pass Fail edit control items are applied to both the Max and Min fluence results It is anticipated that the Minimum Pass Fail limit is primarily applicable to the Min results and that the Maximum Pass Fail limit is primarily applied to the Max results Thus an energy intensity range can define the acceptable limits of the Top Hat beam s working surface area 3 3 5 2 Divergence Pass Fail The following results may be monitored from the Divergence dialog below the main menu Pass Fail item Pass Fail Divergence Minimum Maximum X Divergence 0 000e 00 0 000e 00 B Y Divergence 0 000e 00 H 0 000e 00 EX Cancel Help Figure 44 3 4 Window Drop Down Menu Selections Note The numbers appearing in front of the selections will vary with the screen setup Tile 1 Results 2 Frame Beam display window 3 WxHxR Pan Zoom window 4 T tt Rirr gt Tilt Rotate Window 5 Histogram Histogram display window Click on one of the numbered items to restore and activate the window Operator s Manual 101 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 3 4 1 Tile Click on the Tile item to force all of the LBA PC child Windows to return to their default sizes and locations 3 5 Start Stop A Toggle Menu Action Item Activating the Start menu item will cause the LBA PC to start collecting and processing frames of data The sour
215. le clicking and typing in a new value or you can use the spin control to increment or decrement to the frame desired We recommend that you set the frame buffer to hold as many frames as your Windows environment has real memory available This will prevent the LBA PC application from trying Operator s Manual 54 LBA PC to use virtual memory as Frame Buffer space A little virtual memory assigned to the frame buffer is not too bad A lot can make you wonder what kind of alien being has just taken over your hard drive Also Windows will allocate real memory first and when it s gone begin allocating virtual memory For this reason it is a good idea to run the LBA PC application with no other application s operating in the background This will free up as much real memory as possible for Frame Buffer use 3 2 3 5 Am I using Virtual Memory yet How do I know when my Frame Buffer is running over from real into virtual memory Easy your hard disk drive light will begin to flicker when the real frame buffer capacity is filled and the virtual file swapping begins To avoid this try reducing the Frame Buffer size until it stops Note Be sure to perform this test with Logging disabled 3 2 3 6 Sync Source Many applications will use standard analog output cameras For analog cameras the Sync Source must be set to Genlock The LBA 400 500 7XXPC models can be purchased with an option that will allow support for both Analog and Digital ca
216. le if newly opened Export logging will always overwrite an existing file No warning or error message is given in either instance LOG configuration LOG Operator s Manual 221 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Key Type Value Description DataLogging oe E Data logging enable DataFileName Name of data log file If no extension i e no period then LB3 4 5 7 is appended Maximum 256 characters If this key is set to FRM or RDD case ignored or was previously set to FRM or RDD in the dialog then data frames will be logged to the GPIB bus Each time a new frame is captured the LBA PC will automatically send a response as if you had sent FRM or RDD respectively You must address the LBA PC to talk and be prepared to accept the transmitted data The LBA PC will wait until you have read the data before capturing another frame Note FRM and RDD are ignored if the LBA PC is not in remote fResultsLogging GE Results logging enable ResultsFileName Name of results log file If no extension i e no period then RLG is appended Maximum 256 characters If this key is set to RDR case ignored or was previously set to RDR in the dialog the results will be logged to the GPIB bus Each time results are computed for a new frame the LBA PC will automatically send a response as if you had sent RDR Values 1 The LBA PC will wait until you have read the data before capturing
217. ll kinds of trouble since you can set these values to just about anything you like When the LBA s Elliptical results are disabled the computed beam widths will be aligned with a pair of simulated knife edges cutting one in each of the X and Y directions Hence the displayed beam widths will be indicated in the results window as X and Y If your laser beam is not radially symmetric but does contain two axes of symmetry you should rotate the beam such that the beam s axes align with the X and Y axes of the display When the LBA s Elliptical results are enabled the computed beam widths will be aligned with a pair of simulated knife edges cutting one in each of the Major and Minor axial directions Hence the displayed beam widths will be indicated in the results window as Major and Minor The implication is that the displayed values represent the major and minor widths of an elliptically shaped laser beam 6 11 3 Percent of Energy Method The LBA measures the lengths of two orthogonal lines that pass through the beam centroid The beam widths are determined by separately looking out along each line and count all the pixels that are greater than the set clip level The reported beam widths are the number of pixels greater than the dip level multiplied by the pixel pitch When the LBA s Elliptical results are disabled the computed beam widths are the measure of the pixels in the row and column that pass through the centroid The beam widths in the
218. location where the peak intensity value was found The Peak Location is found by scanning the pixel data from left to right and top to bottom If a Drawn or Auto Aperture is present then the scanning is confined to the pixels inside the aperture Auto Aperture takes precedent over a Drawn Aperture 6 10 Centroid Location The Centroid location is found by calculating the center of mass of all the pixels that satisfy the following clip level criteria based upon the chosen Beam Width Method e Inthe case of Percent of Peak the included pixels are those that are greater than the Clip level e With Percent of Energy the included pixels are those that are greater than or equal to the Clip level e If the 4 Sigma or one of the Knife Edge methods are chosen and the Top Hat calculations are not checked the clip level is set to 86 5 of energy If the Top Hat calculations are checked then an 80 of Peak clip level is set Operator s Manual 131 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 The following equations describe the X and Y centroid locations from the collection of data points that satisfy the above energy clip level criteria x centroid PRES z y centroid Z ss As Where X xlocations of selected pixels Y ylocations of selected pixels z value of selected pixels 6 11 Beam Widths and Diameters To some extent beam width is a term that describes how you have decided to measure the size of your laser beam The L
219. lowing data vs time Centroid X and Y Peak X and Y and centroid radius from an origin or from the mean centroid e A peak location scatter plot with histogram color coding e Acentroid location scatter plot with histogram color coding Click on the Options menu item and then click Launch Beam Stability to start the beam stability program This will open up a new window with the beam stability program that looks like the window below Operator s Manual 85 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 LBAPC Pointing Stability Sd X 108 38 pesk Sd Y 228 34 Sd X 1 19 centro 94 Y 1 11 Reset 2 998 3 000 x 3 002 Avg X 2375 79 Avg Y 3195 79 Avg X 3000 86 Avg Y 3170 53 imit 110000 542 Sample limit Samples Pointing Stability W Centroid X v Centroid Y M PeakX Iv Peak Yi jv Radius Current 4365 57 Max R 4368 58 2600 Avg R 4365 49 2400 Sdev R 1 12 f Origin 09 09 13 546 4 09 09 19 281 4 09 09 20 421 Radius relative to C Avg Centroid Figure 34 Note The LBA PC program must be running collecting data and non minimized for the pointing stability program to collect data 3 2 9 1 Main Controls The main controls are located in a toolbar in the upper left corner of the main window These controls consist of buttons for Start Pause Reset Printer Setup Print and Exit Program APC Pointing Stability Print Exit Program Reset Printer Setup
220. m in In other words if you set the resolution to 1x a frame size of 512x480 is reserved in memory for each frame that is digitized If you then hardware zoom in twice to a frame size of 128x120 you will be wasting 93 75 of each reserved frame buffer locations space since a 120x128 image is only 1 15th the size of a 512x480 image Thus you should never specify a resolution that is more than what you need to do the job at hand Otherwise you will waste system resources and reduce your overall throughput Analog camera image sizes are fixed to resolution values per the following table value un zoomed in 8 Mb of memory Fulix Hor Size X Vert Size na Operator s Manual 53 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 The Full 1x resolution will create an image size equal to the Horizontal Size and Vertical Size shown in the Camera Advanced dialog box This size is the maximum obtainable from the type of analog camera selected Digital cameras do not follow the above resolution table For digital cameras both the Full 1x and 1x resolutions produce image sizes equal to the Horizontal Size and Vertical Size shown in the Camera Advanced dialog box The 2x 4x etc sizes will reduce the resolution by approximately 1 2 in both the horizontal and vertical directions rounding to the nearest even values Resolution 4x e Max 128x 120 Frame Size Buffer Size Kb 128 Frames 4l Figure 14 3 2 3 4 Frame Buffer Size The
221. meras Note the model LBA 300PC cannot support digital cameras Syne Source Digital Y Pixel Bits 12 m Figure 15 If you have purchased the digital camera option with either an LBA 400 500 7XXPC and are connecting a digital camera set the Sync Source to Digital In Digital mode the Pixel Bits entry must be set to the number of data bits that are being input to the LBA Tf you purchased an LBA 400PC D you can choose 8 9 or 10 bits per pixel If you purchased an LBA 500PC D you can choose either 8 9 10 11 or 12 bits per pixel If you purchased an LBA 7XXPC D you can choose either 8 10 12 14 or 15 bits per pixel If your camera s digital output is in a signed twos compliment data format select a minus Pixel Bits value For example the Pyrocam I outputs 12 bit signed 2 s compliment digital data Thus the Pixel Bits setting is 712 If your digital camera has more bits of resolution than can be accommodated by the LBA PC you must connect only the upper most significant bits Any left over data bits will not be processed by the LBA PC Note There may be some jumper traces on the frame grabber card that will need to be cut if you are using a digital camera that is outputting fewer bits than the default configuration The default is 10 bits for the LBA 400PC D and 12 bits for the LBA 500PC D The LBA 7XXPC D models use the software to set the number of bits rather than jumpers Operator s Manual 55 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 R
222. minimum 1e12 to 1e12 TophatDeviationMax F Tophat Deviation or Tophat Deviation X maximum 1e12 to 1e12 TophatSDM B B Min Max test enable TophatSDMMin F Tophat SD M or Tophat SD M X minimum 0 to 1e3 Operator s Manual 239 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 F TophatSDMMax Tophat SD M or Tophat SD M X maximum 0 to 1e3 EffectiveArea Min Max test enable F F EffectiveAreaMin Effective area minimum 0 to 1e12 EffectiveAreaMax Effective area maximum 0 to 1e12 Effective diameter minimum Effective diameter maximum EffectiveDiameterMax EffectiveDiameter B B B EffectiveDiameterMin B F TophatFactor BB Min Max test enable TophatFactorMin Tophat factor minimum 0 0 to 1 0 TophatFactorMax F Tophat factor maximum 0 0 to 1 0 TophatMeanMinorMin F Tophat Mean Y minimum s pmmemh TophatMeanMinorMax F Tophat Mean Y maximum os a TophatFluenceMinor Min Max test enable B TophatFluenceMinorMin F Tophat Fluence Y minimum 1e12 to 1e12 TophatFluenceMinorMax Tophat Fluence Y maximum B TophatDeviationMinor Min Max test enable TophatDeviationMinorMin F Tophat deviation Y minimum hi Leer TophatDeviationMinorMax F Tophat deviation Y maximum hel Leer Operator s Manual 240 LBA PC 1e12 to 1e12 TophatSDMMinor Min Max test enable TophatSDMMinorMin F Tophat SD M Y minimum 0 to 1e3 TophatSDMMinorMax F Tophat SD M Y maximum 0 to 1e3 A 5 3 6 pass
223. moment method will directly compute second moment beam widths in the X and Y beam axial directions or along the computed orthogonal Major and Minor axes of the beam if the Elliptical calculations are enabled The 4 Sigma method should always be used in conjunction with the LBA s Auto Aperture feature The 4 Sigma method is most sensitive to noise If your camera or beam noise content is high you might want to employ Frame Averaging or Statistical analysis to home in on more accurate results A big advantage of this method is that it is not influenced by mode content Operator s Manual 69 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 3 2 6 4 2 90 10 Knife Edge This Knife Edge method uses a fixed 90 and 10 of energy as the moving edge Clip9 o points The correction Multiplier is fixed at 1 561 These settings will yield highly accurate second moment equivalent beam widths for beams that are predominantly TEMos in mode content and for many other mixed mode combinations There are a few modes for which this method will not be as accurate as well as Top Hat shaped beams This method will compute beam widths in the X and Y beam axial directions or along the computed orthogonal Major and Minor axes of the beam if the Elliptical calculations are enabled 3 2 6 4 3 Knife Edge If your laser mode content is not suitable for measurement using the previous Knife Edge method then you can use this method and program your own Clip and Multiplier factors For exa
224. mpare your Current selected Beam Display to a beam profile stored in the Reference frame buffer Or compare it to your beam with the reference added or subtracted from it Or just display your current beam added to or subtracted by the reference beam The choices here seem obvious however the impact on your display may be a bit disconcerting when first viewed so some explanation is in order First the definition of Current means the frame buffer location indicated in the frame counter at the bottom of the main display window In other words the frame you currently have decided to view If you are running then the current frame will be cycling The Reference frame is whatever you last saved into the reference frame buffer location 0 zero For 99 of the majority of users the Beam Display will be set to Current Alone and rarely be changed For those other 1 and you know who you are read on 3 2 7 7 1 Current and Reference 2D You must have both Cursors and Cursor Profiles enabled for this feature to operate The Current beam alone will appear in the display A second profile drawn in Lt Gray will also appear in the display This profile is a projection of the Reference beam All projections are made from the Cursor positions 3D The Current beam will be displayed in Red The Reference will be displayed in Blue If cursors are enabled they will follow the contour of the Current beam 3 2 7 7 2 Current and Current Reference
225. mple If you were setup to log 1000 frames and you hit Stop at frame 521 and then hit Start a second time when the logging process stops automatically the log file will contain entries for 1521 frames 3 1 11 2 Data Results amp Export Logging dialog box If you want to log frames of data check the Data Logging box and enter the drive paths lt filename gt of where you want the data records to be logged If you want to log computed results check the Results Logging box and enter the drive paths lt filename gt of where you want the results records to be logged If you want to log frames of image data check the Export Logging box and enter the drive paths lt filename gt of where you want the image data to be logged Press the respective Browse if you want to append or overwrite an existing file and your not sure of the file s name or location and wish to search for it Operator s Manual 40 LBA PC If you choose Results Logging select the Format that you want the data to be logged in Both formats will produce an ASCII text log with comma delimited entries The Spreadsheet format will precede the log with a single list of column headings The Math Program format will precede each log entry with a binary number that indicates which results are enabled Export Image Export File Name C Spiricon LbaPC data export bmp Cancel From Browse Start Frame 4 Help Number of Frames 1 D Export Formats and Extensions
226. mple if your beam is almost a pure donut shape TEM use the previous 90 and 10 Clip setting but change the Multiplier to 1 533 For a circular Top Hat use a Multiplier of 1 455 For a square Top Hat use a Multiplier of 1 444 This method will compute beam widths in the X and Y beam axial directions or along the computed orthogonal Major and Minor axes of the beam if the Elliptical calculations are enabled Hints In general your two Clip level settings should add up to 100 Avoid using clip levels of 1096 as this begins to approach the camera s noise floor especially if your beam peak energy is less than 20 of camera saturation 3 2 6 4 4 Percent of Energy This method will only use a limited amount of your beams energy to compute beam widths In particular it will only use the data from pixels on the X and Y axes of the beam that pass nearest to the computed centroid If you have the Elliptical computations enabled then the data used for this calculation will be from those pixels that lie along the Major and Minor axes The Percent of Energy method requires that you set a Clip 9 o value that corresponds to the percent of energy that will be used to define the beam width For example set the clip value to 86 47 if your beam is mostly a Gaussian TEMo mode The resulting beam widths will then be a 1 e or second moment equivalent value 3 2 6 4 5 Percent of Peak This method will only use a limited amount of your beam s energy to c
227. n Menu Selections 3 1 1 File Load b3 4 5 7 Files Iba Files bb Files lbc Files 3 1 1 1 Load Frame Dialog Box 3 1 1 2 Special Frame Numbers 3 1 1 3 Drag and Drop Data Frame Loading 3 1 2 File Save As 3 1 2 1 Save As Dialog Box 3 1 3 Export Image to a disk file 3 1 3 1 Export Image dialog box 3 1 4 Save Config to a file 3 1 5 Restore Config from a file 3 1 6 Set Reference copy the current to the reference frame 3 1 7 Generate Gain 3 1 7 1 How to generate gain 3 1 7 2 What is Gain Correction 3 1 7 3 What Disables Gain Correction 3 1 8 File Load Gain 3 1 9 File Save Gain As 3 1 10 Gain Off On 3 1 11 File Logging ci 3 1 11 1 Beginning and Terminating Logging 3 1 11 2 Data Results amp Export Logging dialog box 3 1 11 3 Logging Method 3 1 11 4 Pass Fail Filter 3 1 12 Implications of Combining Logging Statistics Post Processing and Block Capture 42 3 1 12 1 Combinations using Logging Statistics and Block Mode 3 1 12 2 Combinations using Logging Statistics and Post Processing 3 1 13 File Print 3 1 14 File Print Setup 3 1 15 File Exit 3 1 16 File Save FROG as Ae 3 1 16 1 Save FROG as Dialog Box 3 1 16 2 FROG Data Orientation 3 1 16 3 FROG Data Collection Tips 3 2 Options Drop Down Menu Selections 3 2 1 Hide Show Capture Display Aperture Toolbar Operator s Manual 4 LBA PC 3 2 2 Aperture display and define apertures 3 2 2 1 Aperture Shapes 3 2 2
228. n other applications like spreadsheets or math programs such as MathCAD Unlike the lbx Data file types Export Logging creates multiple files rather than one large concatenated file with multiple records The assigned file name will automatically have a six digit number appended to the entered file name This number will designate each file in the sequence starting with 000000 and counting up Thus an Export Logging operation will create a series of files that will appear as follows lt filename gt 000000 cma filename 000001 cma lt filename gt NNNNNN cma 3 1 11 1 Beginning and Terminating Logging You begin a logging file when you go to the Logging dialog box and e Check a type of logging e Provide a file name e Click on OK e Click on Start You terminate a logging file when you Stop collecting frames and e Return to the Logging dialog box e Uncheck the logging type e Click on OK Warning Once you have begun a logging cycle each file entry is sequentially recorded until you terminate the log via the method described above If you Stop and then re Start the logging process the new entries will continue to be added as before HOWEVER the Frame counter or the Timer whichever might apply will be reset to 0 zero each time you press Start In Export Logging the file frame numbering does not reset but rather continues to increment from the last number assigned This number is only reset each time logging is enabled Exa
229. n the application computer To enable automatic remote access you must specify the location of the LBA PC computer from the application computer 9 4 1 2 3 1 Windows 2000 1 Start DCOMCNFG From the Start menu select Run type dcomcnfg and click OK 2 Configure the client computer for automatic remote access On the Applications tab scroll down until you see LbapcActiveX EXE Click on LbapcActiveX EXE then click the Properties button Click on the Location tab Unselect the Run application on this computer check box Select the Run application on the following computer check box Type in the name of the LBA PC computer or click Browse to browse the available network Click OK 9 4 1 2 3 2 Windows XP 1 Start DCOMCNFG From the Start menu select Run type dcomcnfg and click OK 2 Configure the client computer for automatic remote access Click the plus 4 symbol next to Component Services then the plus symbol next to My Computer then the plus symbol next to DCOM Config Scroll down until you find LbapcActiveX EXE Right click on LbapcActiveX EXE and select Properties Click on the Location tab Unselect the Run application on this computer check box Select the Run application on the following computer check box Type in the name of the LBA PC computer or click Browse to browse the available network Click OK 9 4 1 2 4 Programmatic Remote Access In Visual Basic you can use the CreateObject function to create
230. nables the error message queue When the error message queue is enabled and the LBA PC detects an error then a text string description is placed in the error message queue The LBA PC then sets the EMAV bit bit 3 in the Status Byte to indicate an error message is in the queue Perform a serial poll or use the STB command to read the status byte If the EMAV bit is set use the ERR command to read the error message The EMAV bit will be cleared when the error message queue is empty There are three categories of errors two of which are reported via the error message queue The first category of errors is remote command errors These errors include command execution and range errors originating directly from commands sent by the host to the LBA PC Example of a category 1 error Host sends ERR END Host sends APP END Host sends STB END LBA PC sends STB ZHOS END Host sends ERR P END LBA PC sends 1 unrecognized command APP END Operator s Manual 206 LBA PC The second category of errors is LBA PC execution errors These error messages are normally displayed in a message box on the screen The LBA PC reroutes these error messages to the error message queue when the queue is enabled Example of a category 2 error Host sends PAN X 0 Y 0 END Host sends STB END LBA PC sends STB ZHOS END Host sends ERR P END LBA PC sends II PAN X 0 out of range 112 744 END
231. nal parameters identifying the frame number start record number of records start frame file name and whether to replace an existing configuration This command is identical to selecting the File Load menu item entering the file name start record number of records and start frame and clicking OK The start record is optional and is numbered from 1 to n n is the number of records in the file The number of records is optional and is numbered from 0 to n where n is the number of records in the file A value of 0 specifies all of the records from the start record to the end of the file The number of records is forced to 1 when the start frame is 1 or 0 If the start record or number of records is not specified then the value from the last File Restore Config LDC command File Load File Save LDD command or SDD command is used The start frame parameter is optional and is numbered from 1 to n n is the number of frames in the frame buffer Frame 1 is the Gain Frame 0 is the Reference frame and frames 1 to n are data captured in the frame buffer If you do not send the frame number parameter then the current frame is used The replace parameter is optional and is a boolean with a value of 0 or 1 i e false or true The default for the replace parameter is 0 i e false e Ifthe replace parameter is true and the camera type or camera resolution of the file being read is different than the current configura
232. ncel From Browse Start Record Help Number of Records To Start Frame Figure 6 Operator s Manual 33 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 If the file that you are loading contains multiple records enter the starting number of the record that you want to begin loading from in the edit box labeled Start Record Enter the Number of Records that you want to Load You can enter a value of 0 or 1 to the number of records in the file A value of 0 means all the records in the file Records can only be loaded sequentially from the Start Record position If you specify a greater number of records than you have frame buffer space available the loading process will fill the buffer and then wrap around leaving the last records transferred in the frame buffer See setting the frame buffer size in 3 2 3 4 In Start Frame enter the location in the frame buffer where you wish to begin depositing the file records Multiple frames will load from that location upward skipping any locations that are Write Protected 3 1 1 2 Special Frame Numbers The following Frame numbers have special meanings however they can be saved and loaded in the usual manner e Frame 0 is the Reference Frame e Frame 1 is the Gain Correction frame not a true image frame but rather an array of gain correction factors 3 1 1 3 Drag and Drop Data Frame Loading You can perform a Load Frame operation by dragging and dropping one or more data frame file
233. nd pass fail centroid and peak locations World coordinates are defined by the Origin Location Lens setting and Pan Location The world coordinates system is the only coordinate system that is used when using the LBA PC in the local non remote mode When operating the LBA PC remotely you must be aware of two other coordinate systems called detector and frame coordinates Detector coordinates are represented on the LBA PC display by the Pan Zoom window Detector coordinates are used to describe the active pixels of the camera detector Frame coordinates are used to describe the frame data stored in the frame buffer The figure below shows the relationship between the Pan Zoom window the capture window frame data and the Beam display window The Pan Zoom window represents the active area of the camera detector The capture window represented in the LBA PC display by the dark gray square inside the Pan Zoom window represents the location and size of the area of the detector that will be digitized The digitized data is placed in the frame buffer Data in the frame buffer is then converted to false color or gray scale and displayed in the beam window Operator s Manual 200 LBA PC Frame Buffer Beam Window Frame Coordinates BR Es World Coordinates Pan Zoom Window Window j Detector Coordinates Coordinate Systems Figure 62 10 7 2 Pan Zoom Window Detector Coordinates Detector coordinates define locat
234. nd select Properties On the Default Properties tab select the Enable Distributed COM on this computer check box Click OK Configure LBA PC ActiveX server Click the plus symbol next to My Computer then the plus symbol next to DCOM Config Scroll down until you find LbapcActivex EXE Right click on LbapcActiveX EXE and select Properties On the Identity tab select the Interactive user radio button Click OK Configure access from the remote client computer There are two ways to allow access from the client computer i Default Security Changing the default security will affect all DCOM applications From the My Computer Properties window click on the Default COM Security tab Edit the Access Permissions and Launch Permissions to allow access from the remote computer ii Application Security From the LbapcActiveX EXE Properties window click on the Security tab Enable and edit the custom access and launch permissions to allow access from the remote computer 9 4 1 2 Client Application Computer To enable remote access from the application computer follow the steps in the section below for your operating system 9 4 1 2 1 9 4 1 2 2 Operator s Manual Windows 2000 Copy the LBA PC ActiveX server Place a copy of the files LbapcX exe and LbapcX tlb on your application computer These files can be found in the LBA PC Activex directory of the installation CD or the ActiveX subdirectory under the LBA PC installation di
235. no response when the REN line is used to enter Local Mode In Local Mode the LBA PC receives and responds to remote commands The LBA PC automatically enters what is called the lockout state when going from Local to Remote Mode This is equivalent to entering the operator password in the Options Password menu item While in the lockout state access is denied to many of the LBA PC menu items The LBA PC automatically exits the lockout state when returning to Local Mode You can override the lockout state by sending the PSW command or by selecting Options Password and entering the operator password Operator s Manual 181 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 10 5 Configuration Commands Configuration commands allow you to do the following Restore or Save configuration files Set or query all or part of a particular LBA PC configuration 10 5 1 Restore and Save Configuration Files 10 5 1 1 LDC Restore Config To restore a LBA PC configuration stored on disk you must send the LDC command along with an optional parameter that identifies the configuration file name This command is identical to selecting the File Restore Config menu item entering the configuration file name and clicking OK The file name is optional and is a string describing the drive directory file name and extension If no drive or directory is specified then the current Windows drive or directory is used In Windows the current drive and directory can be c
236. nor axis oO 0 uH go g FW IN Divergence This is the same order as listed in sections 3 1 15 through 3 1 19 below under individual results properties also the same order as displayed in the LBA PC Results Window All results values will be loaded into the array all the time Results not enabled in the LBA PC will be zero Note there are three sets of Gauss Fit and Top Hat results Either the whole beam section or the major and minor sections will contain valid results depending on how the LBA PC is configured 9 3 1 17 Quantitative Results These properties provide individual Quantitative LBA PC results For more information see chapter 6 in the LBA PC Operator s Manual Property Name LBA PC Result QuantFrameTotal Total QuantApertureFrac in Aperture Operator s Manual 164 LBA PC QuantPeak Peak QuantValley Min QuantPeakLocX Peak Loc X QuantPeakLocY Peak Loc Y QuantCentroidX Centroid X QuantCentroidY Centroid Y QuantRadius QuantBeamWidthX Width X Width Major QuantBeamWidthY Width X Width Minor QuantDiameter Diameter Note the QuantRadius property This is a new result not displayed by LBA PC This result is the distance from the Origin to the Centroid Since the centroid is already relative to the origin this result is defined as Radius dJe x Ce The Origin is specified in the Display dialog in the LBA PC See section 3 2 7 4 in the LB
237. nother program some internal operation or some user action This is probably not what you want We very strongly recommend that you always specify the drive and directory If the extension is not specified then LB3 4 5 7 is used If the file name is not specified then the current value from the last previous restore File Restore Config LDC command File Load File Save LDD command or SDD command is used Note that the backslash character V has special meaning known as an escape sequence To specify a single backslash you must send two For example c spiricon lba300pc data Ib3 is interpreted by the LBA PC as c spiricon lba300pc data Ib3 Although other escape sequences are recognized there is no reason to ever use them with the LBA PC The current default values for the start record number of records and file name can be retrieved with the LDD command The following example describes how to read all the records from a file into the frame buffer starting at frame 7 Host sends LDD FileName c spiricon ba 300pc tophat Ib3 StartRecord 1 NumberRecords 0 StartFrame 7 END 10 6 2 4 SDD Save Data File To write a data file on the LBA PC computer you must send the SDD command with optional parameters identifying the frame number start frame number of frames and file name This command is identical to selecting the File Save As menu item entering the file name start frame and number o
238. nt The Frame Comment is a text string label that you can attach to a data frame It can be saved with the data file and it will print as a title if you choose to print the associated frame You can replace the Frame number by double clicking inside the Display Window s title bar The Frame Comment dialog box see below will appear Type your comment on the line provided select how to apply the comment and then click OK Frame Comment Enter comment Your Comment Here Assign to All and Future frames Cancel Figure 46 A Frame Comment can be applied in 3 different ways If neither of the check boxes in this dialog box are selected The comment will only be associated with the currently displayed frame for as long as this particular frame remains in the frame buffer When a new data frame overwrites this frame location the comment will be lost and once again the Operator s Manual 107 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 lt Frame gt number will appear Both the comment and the data frame can however be Write Protected If the Assign to All frames box is checked This comment will be applied to all valid frames in the frame buffer e Empty frames will not be commented e New frames that are acquired will not be commented e Write Protected frames will be commented If the Assign to All and Future frames box is checked This comment will be applied to all valid frames in the frame buffer and to all frames
239. ntact the Spiricon Service or Sales department to resolve any camera cable compatibility issues Operator s Manual 148 LBA PC 1 PCLK S Si PCLK HSYNC Ce bes HSYNC NSYNC S 36 NSYNC FIELD gt E FIELD VDO i z VDO VDI S a VDI VD2 AE VD2 VD3 VD3 VD4 e SS VD4 VD54 SS VD5 VD6 e Si VD6 VD7 e A VD7 VD8 e ds VD8 VD9 e 25 VD9 VD10 6 T VD10 VD11 21 e VD11 RST Se e SHTI SHT2 2 p SHT3 25 50 COM Digital Camera Connections for LBA 400 500 Model Frame Grabbers Figure 60 1 26 PCLK S 2 PCLK HSYNC 4 S SS HSYNC NSYNC 24 NSYNC FIELD4 2 a FIELD q o VDO4 s VDO VDI S E VD1 VD2 a VD2 VD3 VD3 11 36 VD4 e 3 VD4 VD5 13 3 VD5 VD6 14 e VD6 VD7 E a VOT VD8 IS e VD8 VD9 T a VD9 VD10 Ge SS VD10 VD114 T 4o t VD12 SS i VD12 VD13 i 24 49 vale VD14 z VD14 VD15 25 5 VD15 COM Digital Camera Connections for LBA 7XX Model Frame Grabbers Figure 61 Operator s Manual 149 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Signal definitions are as follows Refe
240. ntains zero pixel values you will get a warning message that the calibration will not be as accurate as normal The Ultracal enunciator will turn GREEN to indicate that the obtained calibration results are being used as best as possible 2 If your output image does not contain zero pixel values and the signal is fairly low in magnitude then the calibration will proceed normally and the results will be good The Ultracal enunciator will turn GREEN 3 If your output image does not contain zero pixels but the image is bright due to a high offset then a warning message will appear that will ask you to block your beam from the camera Click OK to accept these conditions The Ultracal enunciator will turn GREEN If the first or third result occurs you may be able to correct this condition by adjusting the black threshold of your camera s A to D converter Here is how to proceed With the LBA uncalibrated and your laser energy blocked from reaching the camera detector observe the Min and Max energy values If Zero s appear your camera is set to clip some or all of the negative baseline noise If these values are running too high the LBA will think you have laser energy hitting the imager Check your camera operator s manual to see if a black level adjustment is provided If you can adjust the black level do so until the Min energy value never indicates Zero and the Max energy value is as low as possible Now try to run an Ultracal and see if the
241. of 0 7 and a worse Gaussian than 0 9 but it does not tell us how much more or less A change from 0 85 to 0 9 tells us there was an improvement but does not tell how much The definition of the Correlation can be seen in the equation below Dividing it by the volume of the data normalizes the relative error Z S This allows relative comparisons of the correlation value between different samples and beams The relative error has a potential range of zero to infinity Therefore the correlation has a potential range of minus infinity to one However we have found the practical range is between zero and one If the correlation is less than zero then the beam is obviously not Gaussian c 4 Les c 2 Where Gc Gaussian correlation 1 lt G lt 1 Z pixel intensity E Gaussian surface intensity 6 18 Top Hat The Top Hat computations quantify laser beams that have a flat topped energy distribution with steeply sloped sides The Top Hat results provide the Mean Standard Deviation and Minimum and Maximum energy density in a defined area on the beam s energy profile A Top Hat Factor value is computed to indicate the overall quality of the Top Hat energy distribution An Effective Area and Effective Diameter results are also computed to indicate the working area of the beam In general most Top Hat measurements should utilize the Percent of Peak method for determining a clip level The Top Hat edit control allows you to measure a Top Hat
242. of applications Contact Spiricon s Sales Department for the latest information regarding camera selection Operator s Manual 118 LBA PC Since the perfect camera has not yet been found we advise most LBA PC users to operate pulsed lasers in Trigger Out mode whenever possible Next best choice is the Video Trigger mode These two modes will produce the most repeatable quantitative results 5 1 2 Trigger Type CW The setup for CW timing is the least complex of the setups Therefore we recommend that you use CW mode to verify that your camera is correctly installed and is operational The basic CW installation requires that you set Capture Method to Continuous and the Capture Interval to 1 5 1 2 1 Interlaced Cameras In CW mode interlaced cameras will support all available resolution settings and zooming capabilities The highest of these resolutions will be made up of digitized data from both the odd and even fields The odd and even data is assembled to form a single image If you are observing a rapidly changing image at high resolution you may observe line to line image breakup Reduce your resolution to help stabilize the image Some cameras may also exhibit an intensity variation from one field to the next Most interlaced cameras will yield good high resolution images in CW mode 5 1 2 2 Normrinterlaced Cameras In CW mode non interlaced cameras will support all available resolution settings and zooming capabilities Most cameras
243. of frames No timed operations are recognized when Post Processing is enabled If Results Logging and Statistics are both in play and if the Logging feature is in control The Statistics results are recorded into the Results Log file when the Logging operation is Terminated See Beginning and Terminating Logging Section 3 1 11 1 Operator s Manual 43 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 If Results Logging and Statistics are both in play and if the Statistics feature is in control The Statistics results are recorded into the Results Log file when the Statistics collection cycle is completed 3 1 13 File Print The Print dialog box is where you tell the LBA PC what information you want it to print You can only get here via the File and Print menu item If you just click on the print button ll located on the Capture toolbar then printing will begin immediately based upon the last configuration that you set in the Print dialog box Check the Beam Image box if you want to print the contents of the Beam Display Window The printed image will contain everything that you see limited only by the resolution and color capabilities of your printer and Windows printer driver Check the Results box if you want to print the results information The printed results will consist of all enabled numerical results including Statistics and Histogram Note In both of the above if the related child Window Beam Results Histogram is minimiz
244. of the center of a circle in terms of its X and Y coordinate in the beam display window and the Radius of the circle that must contain it Both the X and Y Centroid location results will change color from GREEN to RED should the centroid fall outside this circle 3 3 3 Elliptical Pass Fail The following results may be set in the Pass Fail Elliptical dialog below the main menu Pass Fail item Pass Fail Elliptical Minimum Maximum f Roundness 0 000e 00 0 000e 00 Cancel Orientation Angle 0 Range z 0 gt Hel elp Figure 43 3 3 3 1 Orientation The Orientation Pass Fail item applies to the major axis inclination of an Elliptical beam The units for these two edit controls are always in degrees The Major axis can tilt through an angle in the range of 90 to 90 degrees You can set the desired tilt Angle and a Range around this angle that will meet your testing criteria The Rotation result will change color from GREEN to RED should the angle fall outside of these set limits 3 3 4 Gauss Pass Fail See the Pass Fail Gauss dialog below the main menu Pass Fail item for a list of these items 3 3 5 Top Hat Pass Fail See the Pass Fail Top Hat dialog below the main menu Pass Fail item for a list of these items Operator s Manual 100 LBA PC 3 3 5 1 Top Hat Fluence The Top Hat computational results displays a value for the Max and Min fluence observed in a Top Hat beam s energy profi
245. ompute beam widths In particular it will only use the data from pixels on the X and Y axes of the beam that pass nearest to the computed centroid If you have the Elliptical computations enabled then the data used for this calculation will be from those pixels that lie along the Major and Minor axes The Percent of Peak method requires that you set a Clip 9 o value that corresponds to the percent of your beams peak that will be used to define the beam width For example set the clip value to 13 53 if your beam is mostly a Gaussian TEMos mode The resulting beam widths will then be a 1 e or second moment equivalent value Hint This method is most useful to measure the widths of Top Hat beams typically based upon a Full Width Half Max FWHM criteria To achieve this set the Clip to 50 Operator s Manual 70 LBA PC 3 2 6 5 Elliptical Check on the Elliptical box to cause elliptical calculations to be performed Having Elliptical results enabled will cause the nature of other calculations to be modified In particular Beam Width results will now be computed based upon the orientation of the Major and Minor axes of the beam instead of the X and Y axes as will the aligned Gauss Fit and Divergence results See Elliptical in Chapter 6 for additional details 3 2 6 6 Gauss Fit Check on the Gauss Fit box to cause the Gaussian fitter results to be displayed Gauss Fit computes a best fit of a Gaussian distribution to the data Two types of fit
246. on runs for unknown amount of time depending on the camera and the LBA PC configuration Poll the OperationComplete property or respond to the OnOperationComplete event to determine when the Ultracal operation is complete 9 3 2 7 Auto Exposure This method is identical to clicking AutoExposure on the LBA PC This method has no effect if a previous Auto Exposure operation is not complete If the LBA PC is collecting frames of data the Auto Exposure cannot start If there is any other problem the Auto Exposure will not start and the LBA PC will display an error message on the LBA PC display This method returns the following 1 The LBA PC is not available 0 OK 1 LBA PC is collecting frames of data The Auto Exposure operation runs for unknown amount of time depending on the camera and the LBA PC configuration Poll the OperationComplete property or respond to the OnOperationComplete event to determine when the Auto Exposure operation is complete 9 3 3 Events All the events can fire each time the LBA PC collects a new frame of data If you are still processing an event when another frame is collected then the new event is not fired This is especially true when using LabVIEW Operator s Manual 171 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 9 3 3 1 OnNewFrame This is a generic event fired each time the LBA PC collects a new frame of data You can read any desired property values while processing this event During this event you are guaran
247. one contains articles examples and a knowledge base about using ActiveX with LabVIEW e Search the news groups There are many news groups devoted to COM DCOM OLE ActiveX etc You can use www google com to search for these news groups or see if someone had just the same problem in the past e We will be happy to help in any way we can especially if the LBA PC ActiveX server or a supplied example is misbehaving or not operating as described in this document However DCOM introduces so many variables that are beyond our control especially related to protocols connections security timeouts etc so that we may be of limited help with your particular implementation The list of techniques and resources above is where we go when you call Operator s Manual 176 LBA PC Chapter 10 REMOTE GPIB OPERATION 10 1 Introduction The LBA PC can be controlled as a remote device via GPIB For the most part communications between the LBA PC and the host controller will follow the data format and coding protocols outlined in the IEEE 488 1 and 488 2 standards This manual will not attempt to fully describe the nuances of the GPIB bus operation nor to convey fully the operation of the IEEE 488 1 and 488 2 protocols If you are a first time user of the IEEE 488 command structure we recommend that you obtain and review a copy of the applicable IEEE standards Other excellent sources of information are the user manual provided with your National In
248. or LBA PC with pyrocam cameras Two files are provided for configuring the LBA to a Pyrocam I They are PYROCAM CFG and PYROCAM CAM 2 6 1 2 1 Setting up the Pyrocam Configuration Go to File Restore Config and set the configuration to PYROCAM CFG 2 6 1 2 2 Setting the camera type to Pyrocam Go to Options Camera dialog box and set the Camera selection to PYROCAM CAM This may already have happened when you did the previous step The PYROCAM CAM file is absolutely required for correct operation with your Pyrocam The PYROCAM CFG configuration is a good starting point configuration You will undoubtedly need to make changes to your configuration to suit your application Do so and then save off your new configurations into new filename cfg config files Remember the PYROCAM files are read only so don t try to use those file names 2 6 1 3 Some Restrictions apply when interfaced to a Pyrocam I 2 6 1 3 1 Frame resolution restrictions While you are not restricted from setting your frame Resolution to 512x480x1 it is not a good idea Keep your Resolution setting set to 128x120x4 Remember the Pyrocam creates a 124x124 sized image so setting higher resolutions only wastes memory and slows down operations 2 6 1 3 2 Zooming restrictions In keeping with the above do not use Hardware zooming Only use Soft zooming i e double right mouse click in the Zoom window 2 6 1 3 3 Restricted pixel regions Becaus
249. or left D Size the aperture up or down ue Rotate an elliptical or rectangular aperture 3 2 2 4 Using Auto Apertures To enable the Auto aperture feature click on the Use Auto Aperture box or click on the Auto aperture amp button on the Aperture toolbar Note Auto apertures are drawn in YELLOW are always ellipses and are only visible on 2D displays Auto apertures will be drawn on the X and Y axes of the beam if Elliptical is OFF and on the Major and Minor axes of the beam if Elliptical is ON You should always enable Auto apertures whenever performing second moment D 4 Sigma beam width measurements If your beam is small relative to the acquisition window size you should either use a Drawn aperture of 2x to 2 5x the beam width or enable Auto aperturing to perform this task for you Auto apertures will help improve beam measurement accuracy on almost any beam shape Auto apertures may not improve accuracy or operate well if you have a lot of stray energy adjacent to the beam profile In this case you should rely more on a well placed Drawn aperture and avoid using the D 4 sigma beam width method 3 2 2 5 Display Beam Width If you want to see your beam widths diameter graphically overlaid on the laser beam profile choose the shape that most correctly matches your beam These choices are also available from the Aperture toolbar The displayed beam widths will appear as a BLACK aperture in a 2D beam display window This
250. or s Manual 270 LBA PC Input Output 1 GPIB address 2 Run Stop boolean 1 Error out 3 Error in B 2 20 Save Configuration vi Description Save a configuration file to remote machine Input Output 1 GPIB address 2 CFG file name string 1 Error out 3 Error in B 2 21 Semicolon String to Array vi Description Translate a string with semicolon delimiters to an array Input Output 1 The array 2 The total of rows in the array 1 Input string B 2 22 Set Energy and Units vi Description Set the quantity of energy and energy unit set zero to re init Input Output 1 GPIB address 1 Error out 2 Energy 3 Unit 4 Error in B 3 General VI Examples for the LBA PC The following examples demonstrate how to use the above SubVI s to build laser beam diagnostic LabVIEW virtual instrument applications Two of these examples are described below in detail The remaining are covered with a brief description of their operation All of these examples are contained in the LBA PC LLB library file Operator s Manual 271 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 B 3 1 Basic Results vi This program shows the basic communication between LBA PC and the local computer It contains three buttons Run Stop Ultracal and Auto Aper on off on the left side of the window This VI shows all basic results on the right side D Basic Results Panel Figure 64 LabVIEW is a graphical compu
251. orrelate with the size of the pixel grid on the detector The drawback however is that you will be forced to multiply the results by the pixel scale of the detector to get the data into real world units of distance The units on the horizontal and vertical axes of the scatter plots will change depending on how you setup LBA PC They could be microns millimeters and fractions of pixels or any of the units that are offered in LBA PC In short the units on the X Y axes of the histogram scatter plots are the same as the units selected in LBA PC for quantitative results You can select these units by going to LBA PC s main menu and selecting Options gt Camera gt Pixel Units If for example you desired to see which pixels on the camera most often contained the peak of your beam setup your histogram bins to work in terms of individual camera pixels To do this go to the main menu on LBA PC and select Options gt Camera From the camera dialog you would select the camera that matched your detector and then select the Pixel Units to be PX or pixel units In the Pixel Scale spin control you would enter 1 0 to tell LBA PC that your pixels are one pixel wide Before closing the dialog you should make sure that the Resolution drop down box is set to 1X Resolutions other that 1X may be used but this will be discussed later In this example we will choose 1X because we do not want to limit which pixels the peak might fall upon Click OK to accept
252. ou call our Service Department and ask for assistance We ll be happy to lend a hand Notice If you change a setting here and then do a Save Config the change will be saved with the configuration file and be restored when the configuration file is restored 3 2 4 Capture define acquisition method and processing The Capture dialog box is divided into four areas These four areas each control different aspects of the image capturing process Each area will be discussed separately Operator s Manual 57 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 rat rocas Oot p 06227 lt Fis CASPIRICON LBAPC Start f Iuriter Sinttter fielee Trigger Level E e EecntE f Iuriter of Frame LEAL E ES f Turnier of Framnes m Current Frame e Figure 17 The user can assign certain of these capture control items to the Capture Toolbar The assigned items will appear on the toolbar in essentially the same order that they are listed in this dialog box The operation of each item from the Toolbar is identical to their operation from this dialog box For simplicity the following examples will refer only to the dialog box entries Toolbar switch icons will be included in the titles when they exist 3 2 4 1 Capture The Capture panel controls how imaged data is to be acquired and saved into the frame buffer You must first choose a capture Method then subsequent selections need to be made The capture Methods are e Continuous
253. ou click Start the LBA will run until the time is depleted and then automatically Stop In all of the above you can click Stop and click Start to pause and to resume statistical data collection However in cases 2 and 3 above when you restart it does not resume the cycle Operator s Manual 74 LBA PC from the point of interruption Rather the cycle resets to the duration values set in the dialog box but does not clear the prior accumulated stats If you click on Start after the frame count or timer has run out the collection process will continue to add more data to the results until the cycle completes a second time To reset statistical data operations you must turn Statistics off click OK and then turn Statistics back on Or right click in the Results window and click on the Results Statistics item When collecting Frames or Time limited Statistics the Rate display will indicate the number of frames to go Rate 4990 or the time remaining Rate If you are using Statistics computations in combination with Logging Block Capture or Post Processing you should read Implications of Combining Logging Statistics in Section 3 1 12 Refer to the Statistics section in Chapter 6 for additional information 3 2 7 Beam Display define the beam display The LBA PC has a number of display options The operation of these options can vary depending upon whether the 2D or 3D display mode is in effect Options in the Beam Dis
254. our zoom in sequence will begin at 64x60x8 then progress to 64x60x4 64x60x2 64x60x1 32x30x1 16x15x1l You will retrace this route in reverse order as you zoom out Initial Resolution x4 x8 x16 X392 128 64 32 16 ci ei 32 Ge 32 Figure 52 The above example works for all analog non interlaced cameras interlaced Interline transfer cameras and interlaced Full Frame transfer cameras If your camera is an interlaced Frame transfer type the above example works in CW mode but works slightly different in any of the Pulsed modes i e Trigger Out Video Trigger and Trigger In These style cameras will only output a pulsed laser image in one field As a result the x1 resolution is denied and the x2 resolution is the highest possible setting Under this scenario the above example will progress 64x60x8 then 64x60x4 64x60x2 32x30x2 16x15x2 With the release of version 4 00 a new Full 1x camera resolution has been made available This resolution makes the hardware zooming operate for an analog camera the same as if it were a digital camera See the next section to learn how digital camera zooming operates Operator s Manual 112 LBA PC 4 4 1 2 Digital Camera Zooming Digital camera zoom image sizing does not follow the same powers of two rule that is shown above for analog cameras For digital cameras both the Full 1x and the 1x resolutions are the same
255. ove If you ve enabled the apertures while in the 3D display mode be sure to check their setup in the 2D display mode The Drawn and Auto apertures when operating at the same time function in the following manner e First the Drawn aperture isolates the energy for analysis e Second an Auto aperture is computed and drawn around the beam energy e Third the reported beam widths diameter is computed based upon the energy contained exclusively within the Auto aperture 3 2 2 1 Aperture Shapes Drawn and Displayed apertures can be rendered in four shapes e Circle e Square e Ellipse e Rectangle Auto apertures are always rendered as an Ellipse Operator s Manual 49 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 3 2 2 2 How to create a Drawn Aperture You can create a Drawn aperture by using the Aperture dialog box the Aperture toolbar or by dragging and dropping the aperture in the 2D display window Note Before you can use the drag and drop method you must first select a Drawn aperture shape using either of the first two methods The Aperture dialog box and the Aperture toolbar offer the same choices for creating a Drawn aperture The entries that define a Drawn aperture are listed vertically within the recessed panel of the dialog box These same entries are arranged horizontally on the aperture toolbar You can make the same changes from either location The following discussion will reference the dialog box but applies equally to th
256. ow The displayed quantitative results consist of the following e Total energy e in Aperture e Peak fluence e Min e Peak Loc ation in X and Y e Centroid location in X and Y e Beam Width in both X and Y or Major and Minor axes e Beam Diameter Operator s Manual 68 LBA PC For a detailed discussion of the above items see Chapter 4 Results Display and Chapter 6 Computations 3 2 6 4 Beam Width Method The Beam Width Method edit selection will determine the technique used to compute the beam width results The first two methods 4 Sigma and 90 10 Knife Edge are computed based upon industry standard definitions The remaining three choices are user definable so use care in setting up and restoring their related options See Beam Widths and Diameters in Chapter 6 for a technical discussion of the methods described here Notice Beam Width measurements should never be made without Ultracal processing Failure to perform an Ultracal operation will most certainly lead to inaccurate beam width results Note The Diameter results are always computed as the mean of the two Beam Width results The five Beam Width Methods are 4 Sigma 90 10 Knife Edge Knife Edge user definable Percent of Energy user definable Percent of Peak user definable v Quantitative Beam Width Method Knife Edge Y Clip 9 000e 01 1 000e 01 a Multiplier L 561e 00 Figure 24 3 2 6 4 1 D4 Sigma The 4 Sigma or second
257. owing First Method Windows XP Step 1 Start Windows Step 2 Close all other Windows applications Step 3 Place the Spiricon CD into your CD ROM drive Step 4 Windows XP will open a dialog that asks What do you want Windows to do Step 5 Click Open folder to view files Windows will open a folder in the CD s root directory showing folders for each of the shipped Spiricon applications Step 6 Double click the LBA PC folder to open it Operator s Manual 19 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Step 7 Double click the file in the LBA PC folder named Setup exe to launch the install The windows file extensions for this folder must be set to viewable to see the exe extension Step 8 Follow the instructions in the installation dialogs Step 9 Reboot when installation is complete Step 10 LBA PC should now be installed Second Method Windows 2000 or XP Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Start Windows Close all other Windows applications Place the CD in the CD ROM drive Click Cancel when Windows asks you What do you want to do From the Taskbar click on Start and then Run In the Open line type R LBA PC setup exe and press Enter Where R is the letter of your CD ROM drive Follow the directions given in the installation dialogs Reboot when installation is complete LBA PC should now be installed Note A
258. pears The two ASCII file types are cma and spa The cma type uses Comma delimited entries The spa type uses Space delimited entries Spreadsheet programs like Excel and Lotus 123 typically use comma delimited data entries Math programs like Mathcad typically use space delimited formats Consult your application program to determine which style to use You can also save 1D beam display images that are defined by the location of the Horizontal and Vertical Cursors Cursor files are designated with a cur file type Cursor files are ASCII files that use Comma delimited entries The Cursor image is organized Horizontal data first left to right followed by a carriage return and then the Vertical data top to bottom You can also save a Column and Row summed beam image that is defined by the total of all pixel values summed in both the Horizontal and the Vertical direction Column Row summed files are designated with a sum file type Summed files are ASCII files that use Comma delimited Operator s Manual 35 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 entries The Summed image is organized Horizontal data first left to right followed by a carriage return and then the Vertical data top to bottom Note Exported image files cannot be read back into the LBA PC s frame buffer Use Save As and Load for retrievable data files 3 1 3 1 Export Image dialog box Enter the drive pathsyand filename of the Export File Name that you want to
259. play dialog box that are shared by both 2D and 3D modes will be discussed first Separate sections are provided for those options that are exclusive to either the 2D or 3D panels The user can assign certain of these display control items to the Display Toolbar The assigned items will appear on the toolbar in essentially the same order that they are listed in this dialog box The operation of each item from the Toolbar is identical to their operation from this dialog box For simplicity the following examples will refer only to the dialog box entries Toolbar switch icons will be included in the titles when they exist e Beam View e Cursors e Cursor Orientation e Origin Location e Beam Colors e Z Axis Scale e Beam Display e Set Reference Source e Display Thresholds e Color Bar e Copy Image to Clipboard e Copy Image to Wallpaper Operator s Manual 75 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 3 2 7 1 Beam View k Inside the Beam Display dialog click either the 2D or 3D radio button for the display mode that you want to view your beam in You may also toggle beam display with the 2D 3D button on the toolbar Note In general 3D displays will run slower than 2D owing to the amount of computations involved with generating the wire frame 3 2 7 2 Cursors You may choose to place cursors onto either a 2D or 3D display The cursors will appear as two black and white dashed lines in a 2D display and as solid white lines in a 3D
260. ply identically to the data inputs of all enabled cameras Le If frame averaging is enabled then each camera input will be frame averaged before switching to the next camera It is not possible to average inputs from multiple cameras during the data collection process However this can be done using the Post Processing feature 3 2 4 4 Trigger The Trigger panel in the Capture dialog box allows you to selectively control when an image is to be captured by the LBA The selected trigger Type will govern which of the other selections you will need to make The four Type choices are e CW Choose this type if your laser operates in a continuous wave manner or pulses at a repetition rate that will appear to your video camera as continuous In CW mode none of the other settings in this panel are applicable Operator s Manual 62 LBA PC e Trigger Out If your laser is a pulsed type and you would like the LBA PC to provide an output pulse that will cause the laser to be fired use this setting See Trigger Out and Interval and Trigger Out Delay e Video Trigger With this mode selected the input from your camera is continuously monitored and when a laser pulse is detected the frame is captured The pulse detector has a programmable threshold that is settable in the Video Trigger Level edit control The level setting is always in raw digitizer counts A suggested trigger level value that will not detect noise yet remain reasonably sensitive is the
261. put Output 1 GPIB address 1 Error out 2 Error in B 2 5 Frame SRE vi Description Enable Service Requests for frame data Input Output 1 GPIB address 1 Error out 2 Error in B 2 6 Get Basic Results vi Description Get current results from LBA PC Input Output 1 GPIB address 1 Results array 2 Error in 2 Error out B 2 7 Get Frame Status Info vi Description Get current frame status information from LBA PC Input 1 GPIB address 2 Error in Output 1 Frame 2 Horizontal Scale 3 Vertical Scale 4 Capture Resolution 5 Error out Operator s Manual 267 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 B 2 8 Get Palette vi Description Get color palette table from LBA PC Input Output 1 GPIB address 1 Color table 2 Error in 2 Error out B 2 9 Get Pan Location vi Description Get current pan location Input Output 1 GPIB address 1 Left 2 Error in 2 Up 3 Width 4 Height 5 Capture resolution 6 Error out B 2 10 Get Tophat Results vi Description Get current tophat results from LBA PC Input Output 1 GPIB address 1 Tophat results array 2 Error in 2 Error out B 2 11 Get Version vi Description Get the version information of the LBA PC Input Output 1 GPIB address 1 Version information string 2 Error in 2 Error out Operator s Manual 268 LBA PC B 2 12 Move Cursor vi Description Move cursor based on a click of one of four buttons Input
262. puted using special algorithms that simulate knife edge techniques The method employed in the LBA PC borrows from two sources They are ISO 11146 Lasers and laser related equipment Test methods for laser beam parameters Beam Widths divergence angle and beam propagation factor Note this document is being revised and split into three parts e 11146 1 Part 1 Stigmatic and simple astigmatic beams e 11146 2 Part 2 General astigmatic beams e 11146 3 Part 3 Alternative test methods and geometrical laser beam classification and propagation And from the IEEE Journal of Quantum Electronics Vol 27 No 4 April 1991 Choice of Clip Levels for Beam Width Measurements Using Knife Edge Techniques by Siegman Sasnett and Johnston The LBA offers the operator two methods for computing Knife Edge beam widths The 90 10 method presets the Clip values to 90 and 10 respectively and the Multiplier to 1 561 These are the recommended values based upon the above Siegman et al paper and are very compatible with CCD camera noise figures These values are perfectly correct for computing an Operator s Manual 133 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 equivalent second moment width for TEMos beams and are a good approximation for many beams of mixed modes The second Knife Edge selection will allow you to program your own Clip and Multiplier values This option will allow you to set up for beams requiring special settings which could get you into a
263. r the PC where the LBA PC application is running 10 6 2 1 FRM Download Data Frame To download an LBA PC data frame you must send the FRM command with an optional parameter that identifies which frame you are requesting to transfer The frame parameter is optional and is numbered from 1 to n n is the number of frames in the frame buffer Frame 1 is the Gain Frame 0 is the Reference frame and frames 1 to n are data captured in the frame buffer If you do not send the frame number parameter then the current frame is used The LBA PC responds by repeating FRM followed by a parameter specifying the frame number Next comes the definite length specification that has the form nd d DAB DAB Where ASCII pound character 0x23 n ASCII decimal digit ranging from 1 to 9 This value specifies the number of digit elements d d that follow d d ASCII decimal integer that specifies the number of data words that follow DAB 8 bit data byte The following example describes how the host controller requests and receives a data file containing frame 10 The data file contains 32 768 bytes Host Sends FRM FrameNumber 10 END Operator s Manual 191 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 LBA PC sends FRM FrameNumber 10 532768 DAB DAB 10 6 2 2 FRM Upload Data Frame To upload an LBA PC data frame you must send the FRM command with optional parameters that identify the frame number and whether
264. r or exposure a change of the shutter exposure setting will produce a change in the camera black level setting and therefore may disable ultracal which will cause the Ultracal indicator to turn red It is therefore recommended that any changes to the AutoExposure are followed by an Ultracal operation Operator s Manual 103 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Notice Some cameras suffer a reduced operating dynamic range when very short exposure times are employed This can be seen as a dramatic change in the camera baseline or as a reduction in the camera s saturation level If your camera reacts in one of these ways you may find that the AutoExposure technique will fail to yield optimum results Operator s Manual 104 LBA PC Operator s Manual 105 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 4 1 Chapter 4 DISPLAY WINDOWS Main Window You will probably want to run the LBA PC application main window in its maximized display size This will allow you to cram as much information as possible onto your display We recommend that you operate in a minimum 1024x768 mode larger if your graphics hardware and monitor will support it The Main Window is divided into 5 regions They are laid out from top to bottom and are designated as 1 4 2 Title Bar Here you ll find the Product ID the version level and the copyright Also the familiar maximize minimize arrows and the close task button The current configuration file name is also shown h
265. ra and hardware are operating correctly If you received any error or warning messages while starting the LBA PC application refer to the Error Messages section in this chapter before proceeding Before you can begin to collect data from your camera you must select the correct camera type To do this click Options Camera and then click on the Camera drop down arrow Select the camera type that matches or most closely matches your specific camera then click on OK To save this setup configuration Click File then Save Config enter a file name for this configuration then click OK This file name has now become your new default configuration file This default will remain from one program startup to the next until you save or restore a new configuration file at which time the last loaded or saved configuration becomes the default 2 1 6 Step 6 Collect Data Click the Start menu item to begin collecting data from the camera The frame display window should immediately start changing colors corresponding to the intensity of the light reaching the camera sensor and the beam profile displays should change from a flat line in proportion to the light intensity at the cursors If the room light is bright enough and or the camera is sensitive enough the frame display window may be entirely white as the horizontal and vertical profile displays move upward and to the right respectively If this is the case reduce the amount of light reac
266. ra option 2 6 1 1 Pyrocam I Setup Requirements 2 6 1 1 1 Configure Video Output The Pyrocam must be configured to output monochrome video in CCIR format To do this Dip Switch number 6 must be in the ON position See Chapter 6 and Appendix A 6 in your Pyrocam Operator s Manual for details 2 6 1 1 2 Configure Gain and Vertical Scale Do not operate the Pyrocam I with the Gain switch set in the 10 position or with the Vertical Scale set in the Auto or Manual x8 positions Use only the 1 or 3 Gain setting and Manual x1 x2 or x4 settings The LBA will not be able to Ultracal in the gain equals 10 or scale x8 setting positions and the Ultracal will not remain valid if the Pyrocam is in the Auto scale mode Note You will need to temporarily attach your Pyrocam to either a VGA or a monochrome monitor to observe the Vertical Scale settings 2 6 1 1 3 Configure MONO DIG VGA switch to MONO position 2 6 1 1 4 Install Video Cable Connect the Pyrocam s Video Output BNC to the Video Input BNC on the LBA PC All other operating requirements for the Pyrocam I are still applicable and must be set up correctly Don t forget to periodically calibrate your Pyrocam Hint First set up your Pyrocam to operate in one of its stand alone configurations and then connect it to the LBA PC only afier you re sure that it is operating satisfactorily with your laser Operator s Manual 27 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 2 6 1 2 Setup requirements f
267. raised to the power of PixelBitsFraction 128 32 8 or 2 for the LBA 300 708PC LBA 400 710PC LBA 500 712PC or LBA 714PC respectively The LBA PC responds to the query by repeating RCC or RCR followed by two parameters specifying the frame number and number of data rows or number of data columns Next comes the definite length specification which has the form nd d DAW DAW Where ASCII pound character 0x23 n ASCII decimal digit ranging from 1 to 9 This value specifies the number of digit elements d d that follow d d ASCII decimal integer that specifies the number of data words that follow DAW Data Word Two 8 bit data bytes low byte followed by high byte Column data is transmitted from the display s top to bottom and row data is transmitted from the display s left to right The following example describes how the host controller requests and receives column 49 in frame 3 Frame 3 is 256 X 240 so 240 data words or 480 bytes is sent to the host Host sends RCC FrameNumber 3 Column 49 END LBA PC sends RCC FrameNumber 3 Column 49 3240 DAW DAW END The following example describes how the host controller requests and receives the row at the cursor in the current frame The current frame is 512 X 480 so 512 data words or 1024 bytes is sent to the host Host sends RCRA END LBA PC sends Operator s Manual 188 LBA PC RCC FrameNumber 19 Row 11 3512 DAW DAW
268. ransferred from the LBA PC if you hope to perform an analysis of this data The LBA PC takes a snapshot of existing conditions each time a frame of data is acquired If you are downloading data from the LBA PC you can get a copy of the prevailing conditions that existed at the moment the data was acquired by using the FST command The FST command returns the following information about each frame Frame number Acquisition date and time Which camera the frame was collected from Number of integer and fraction bits in raw pixel Pixel scale Pixel units Gamma correction factor Lens setting X and Y capture location X and Y capture size Capture resolution Calibration energy Raw frame total equivalent to calibration energy Energy units Whether the Ultracal or reference frame has been subtracted and whether gain correction has been applied User comment Whether the frame is write protected The FST command allows you to change the following information about each frame User comment Operator s Manual 198 LBA PC e Turn on off write protection The following example describes how to retrieve the frame status of frame number 27 Host sends FST FrameNumber 27 END LBA PC sends FST FrameNumber 27 CameralInput 0 Date 11 24 97 Time 03 17 55 16 PixelBits 8 PixelHScale 1 300e 01 PixelVScale 1 300e 01 PixelUnits 1 Gamma 1 000e 00 Lens 0 PixelBitsFraction 7 CaptureLocation 32 44 CaptureSize
269. rate of the camera by decreasing the total number of pixels in the image If a camera Operator s Manual 124 LBA PC operates in a binning mode compatible with the LBA application then we will often supply multiple camera configuration files one for each bin format Camera binning can occur in two different styles When the pixels are binned equally in both the horizontal and vertical direction the resulting image maintains its aspect ratio and is best for operating in the LBA PC application This type of binning is labeled 2x2 3x3 4x4 etc Camera files for this type of configuration will usually say BIN2X2 or BIN4x4 somewhere in the file name You must chose the configuration file that matches your camera binning or you will not be able to acquire a correct image When the pixels are binned unequally in the horizontal and vertical directions the resulting image will appear to have a distorted aspect ratio We do not recommend operation of the LBA PC under these conditions and so no camera files are provided to support this type of camera setting 5 4 1 2 Digital Camera ROI Formating Some digital cameras have a feature that allows then to readout only a defined Region Of Interest ROI of the focal plane array This will reduce the data and increase the frame rate of the cameras operation While this feature can be used with the LBA application it is not an easy adjustment to make If you must have a camera configuration design
270. re Frame item is checked the display will consist of wires running only in the most horizontal direction If Crosshatch is also checked the display will be crosshatched In 3D mode either Wire Frame or Contour see below must be checked Hint Your display will run faster if only Wire Frame is checked 3 2 7 14 2 Contour amp Check the Contour box if you want to see your beam display in a contour map style When you turn on the Contour mode the Wire Frame Crosshatch style display will change from Operator s Manual 83 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 the color style selected to a Light Gray Only the Contour display will remain in the selected Beam Color Hint Use the Color Continuous Beam Color type when using the Contour display style 3 2 7 14 3 Rotate and Tilt You can use these edit controls to set the Rotate and Tilt angles of the X Y and Z axes These controls are a quick way to set specific rotate and tilt values but the simplest way to change the viewing angles is to use the scroll controls in the Tilt and Rotate window Rotate 45 Tilt 15 Figure 31 Figure 32 The Rotate setting is the direction that the Red X axis points in degrees When it points to the right it is at zero degrees The rotation angle increases at it turns counter clockwise The Tilt setting is the angle that the Blue Z axis makes to the display window When it points up it s at zero degrees When it points straight out of the disp
271. re used in combination The first feature in the list that is enabled has control 1 2 3 4 5 Block Mode Controlled by a set number of frames Data or Results Logging Controlled by a set time limit Data or Results Logging Controlled by a set number of frames Statistics Results Controlled by a set time limit Statistics Results Controlled by a set number of frames If Results Logging and Statistics are both in play and if one of the Logging features is in control The Statistics results are recorded into the Results Log file when the Logging operation is terminated See Beginning and Terminating Logging Section 3 1 11 1 If Results Logging and Statistics are both in play and if one of the Statistics features is in control The Statistics results are recorded into the Results Log file whenever the Statistics collection cycle is completed 3 1 12 2 Combinations using Logging Statistics and Post Processing The following control priorities are in effect when any of the above features are used in combination The first feature in the list that is enabled has control 1 Post Processing Controlled by a set number of records frames unless the number is set to zero Note By setting this number to zero you can allow the Logging and Statistics operation to operate on multiple records from multiple files 2 Data or Results Logging Controlled by a set number of frames 3 Statistics Results Controlled by a set number
272. rectory on the LBA PC computer Register the LBA PC ActiveX server From the directory where you copied the files run LbapcX exe The LBA PC ActiveX server automatically registers itself then stops Start DCOMCNFG From the Start menu select Run type dcomcnfg and click OK Enable DCOM On the Default Properties tab select the Enable Distributed COM on this computer check box Windows XP Copy the LBA PC ActiveX server Place a copy of the files LbapcX exe and LbapcX tlb on your application computer These files can be found in the LBA PC Activex directory of the installation CD or the ActiveX subdirectory under the LBA PC installation directory on the LBA PC computer Register the LBA PC ActiveX server From the directory where you copied the files run LbapcX exe The LBA PC ActiveX server automatically registers itself then stops Start DCOMCNFG From the Start menu select Run type dcomcnfg and click OK 174 LBA PC 4 Enable DCOM Click the plus symbol next to Component Services then the plus symbol next to Computers Right click on My Computer and select Properties On the Default Properties tab select the Enable Distributed COM on this computer check box Click OK 9 4 1 2 3 Automatic Remote Access Automatic remote access means that when you create a LBA PC ActiveX server object on the application computer DCOM automatically creates the object on the LBA PC computer then manages communication as if the object were o
273. reinstall the LBA PC software Operator s Manual 156 LBA PC Operator s Manual 157 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Chapter 9 ACTIVE X 9 1 Introduction The LBA PC ActiveX server provides simple control of LBA PC along with access to frame data beam display image results statistics and pass fail indicators The LBA PC ActiveX server runs under Windows 2000 and Windows XP Professional Using the LBA PC ActiveX server you can e Start and Stop collecting and processing new data frames e Initiate an Ultracal cycle e Restore a LBA PC configuration from file Read new data frames and limited frame information e Read a bitmap image of the beam display image e Read computed results e Read statistical results e Reset statistical results e Read pass fail indicators Using the LBA PC ActiveX server you cannot e Detect or handle LBA PC errors or error messages e Get or set the LBA PC configuration e Read random data frames 9 2 Using ActiveX Many modern development languages such as Visual Basic Visual C and Borland C Builder support ActiveX Many applications such as Microsoft Word Microsoft Excel and National Instruments LabVIEW also support ActiveX Development languages and applications all use different methods for accessing ActiveX controls Below we will briefly describe how to use the LBA PC ActiveX server in Microsoft Excel Visual Basic and LabVIEW 9 2 1 Microsoft Excel Visual Basic for Applications V
274. rences to LBA settings are found in either the Camera or Camera Advanced dialog boxes For digital cameras set the Sync Source to Digital PCLK Connect your camera s pixel clock to this input Either the rising or falling edge of this signal will denote the time when your camera s pixel data should be sampled If your camera data is to be sampled by the falling edge of PCLK set the ERC Polarity to Positive If your camera data is to be sampled by the rising edge of PCLK set the ERC Polarity to Negative Pixel clock frequencies below 15MHz will allow large mega pixel cameras to interface with the largest image sizes Cameras with high clock frequencies will require a reduction of the image size that can be acquired We have successfully interfaced cameras with clock rates at 25MHz but with a loss in image width This will vary from camera to camera depending upon how the image is formatted HSYNC Connect your camera s horizontal sync or start of line row to this input If HSYNC is a negative going pulse set the Sync Polarity to Negative If HSYNC is a positive going pulse set the Sync Polarity to Positive Note the polarity of the HSYNC and VSYNC signals must be the same VSYNC Connect your camera s vertical sync or start of frame field to this input If VSYNC is a negative going pulse set the Sync Polarity to Negative If VSYNC is a positive going pulse set the Sync Polarity to Positive Note the polarity of
275. reshold F Upper color energy display threshold If energy is uncalibrated COM EnergyOfBeam 0 then the range is 0 to 255 If energy is calibrated then the range depends on the energy calibration ColorBar BO Color bar display enable CursorAxis L Cursor axis orientation 0 x y 1 major minor Crosshair L Crosshair display enable 0 off 1 manual 2 centroid 3 peak 4 origin SC CrossHatch P 3D crosshatch enable WireFrame B 3D wire frame enable Rotate I 3D display rotation 0 to 359 Tilt I 3D display tilt 0 to 90 Slice L 3D wire density display 0 frame size 1 frame size 2 frame size 3 etc Minimum display is 16 X 15 Operator s Manual 233 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 A 5 2 6 PSW enter password PSW lt configuration gt Key Type Value Value Description EE See Ee help under Password Lockout for information about passwords PSW Returns PSW lt configuration gt Type Value Description a Cael true local lockout active A 5 3 Pass Fail Menu A 5 3 1 PFF set pass fail master configuration PFF configuration PFF 7 Key Value Description TTL output on When condition enable Beep IB Beep on When condition enable Stop BC Stop on When condition enable When L Pass Fail condition that invokes TTL Beep Stop 0 fail 1 pass A 5 3 2 pass fail quant configuration Type Value Descrip
276. results window are labeled X and Y When the LBA s Elliptical results are enabled the computed beam widths are the measure of the pixels along the Major and Minor axes that pass through the centroid The beam widths in the results window are labeled Major and Minor 6 11 4 Percent of Peak Method The LBA measures the lengths of two orthogonal lines that pass through the beam centroid The beam widths are determined by separately looking out along each line and counting all the pixels that are greater than the set clip level The reported beam widths are the number of pixels greater than the dip level multiplied by the pixel pitch When the LBA s Elliptical results are disabled the computed beam widths are the measure of the pixels in the row and column that pass through the centroid The beam widths in the results window are labeled X and Y When the LBA s Elliptical results are enabled the computed beam widths are the measure of the pixels along the Major and Minor axes that pass through the centroid The beam widths in the results window are labeled Major and Minor 6 12 Elliptical beam The LBA PC can compute and display the Orientation of an Elliptical or rectangular beam and a coefficient of Roundness The criteria for computing the Elliptical beam s Major and Minor beam widths are described in the Beam Widths and Diameters section Operator s Manual 134 LBA PC The Orientation of an Elliptical beam is determined from the clip level
277. rivers For a list of the supported NI GPIB cards see Chapter 10 Remote operation of the LBA PC can be a simple operation or very complex depending upon the magnitude of the remote control task Spiricon s Service Department will supply some limited free technical support but must charge for support that becomes more than basic question and answer queries Spiricon s engineering department can provide full Remote Control applications developed in National Instruments LabVIEW graphical programming language Contact Spiricon s service or sales department for information regarding custom LabVIEW virtual instrument development support All information regarding LBA PC remote control is provided in Chapters 9 amp 10 8 2 How to Disable Remote Operation The LBA PC remote control capability is contained in the file REMOTE DLL that is copied to the directory you specified during the LBA PC installation The default installation directory is SPIRICON LBAPC Tf you do not have a National Instruments GPIB card or the GPIB device drivers are not loaded then you will see an error message every time the LBA PC application is started To avoid this error message and disable the LBA PC remote capability you must go to the main installation directory and delete the REMOTE DLL file If you later wish to restore remote capability copy the file REMOTE DLL from the SPIRICON LBAPC Remote directory on the Spiricon CD to the main installation directory or
278. rlaced and each frame outputs a total of 525 rows i e 262 5 rows per field and the first 32 rows of each frame are black followed by 490 rows of video per frame try a first value of 20 32 12 for Vertical Start 7 3 4 Vertical Size This value must always be an even number Enter the number of rows that contain video data In the above Vertical Start examples set this value to 256 in the first example and 490 for the second example Before the release of software version 4 xx this value was limited to a maximum of 1000 rows After version 4 xx this value maximum is 2000 rows It is a good idea to start with a value 50 to 80 less than the maximum for your camera and then work up to a number that the frame grabber can actually support This is particularly important for mega pixel style cameras 7 3 5 Horizontal Start This value must be an even number Enter the pixel clock where the video data begins A good starting value is approximately half the number of clocks from the end of HSYNC For example Suppose the first active pixel is 25 PCLK s after the end of HSYNC Enter a first value of 12 for Horizontal Start 7 3 6 Horizontal Size This value must be an even number Enter the number of active pixels in each horizontal row Before the release of LBA software version 4 xx this value was limited to a maximum of 1000 pixels After version 4 xx this value maximum is 2000 pixels It is a good idea to start with a value 50 to 80 less th
279. rld coordinate with the manual origin location The Origin location must be defined in terms of the detector coordinate system See section 9 regarding the World Coordinate system and the LBA PC online help for more information about Origin Locations The following example describes how to enable the manual origin and set the manual origin location to the center of the detector The center of the detector in this example is at 112 744 2 and 32 512 2 Host sends DIS Origin 0 END Host sends PNW END LBA PC sends PNW UpperLeft 112 32 Lowerkight 744 512 END Host sends DIS ManualOrigin 426 272 END Another technique that you can use to position the origin in manual origin mode is to move the cursors to the desired location CUR and send the ORG command which sets the manual origin to the current cursor location 10 7 2 2 PAN Set Capture Window Location The PAN command specifies the upper left corner of the capture window The entire capture window must fit inside the current pan window limits retrieved with the PNW command Operator s Manual 202 LBA PC The PAN command is affected by the current capture resolution zoom Use the PAN command to retrieve the current capture window location and resolution The capture resolution value is coded as a power of two A capture resolution value of 0 represents 2 which equals 1 a value of 1 represents 2 2 2 represents 2 4 etc When the capture re
280. rolled by Virtual Instruments created using National Instruments LabVIEW The User Guide describes remote operation of the LBA PC B 1 1 Virtual Instrument VI Examples To assist you with the development of specialized VI s for your application Spiricon has supplied you with two libraries containing both basic and general VI examples These examples are not provided as solutions to any specific requirement that the user might have in mind Rather they are supplied to assist the VI designer in the development of their own specialized VI B 1 2 LBA PC Remote Control Capabilities Essentially all LBA PC operations can be controlled remotely over a GPIB bus using National Instruments GPIB cards and LabVIEW developed VI s Other sections of this manual detail the GPIB commands supported by the LBA PC It is assumed that the user is familiar with LabVIEW and the meanings of the information provided below regarding the sample LabVIEW VI s All of the following VI s require that the user has obtained a copy of the LabVIEW development software and has it installed on their PC Spiricon has developed these VI s using LabVIEW for Windows version 6i and makes no claims for their compatibility using earlier versions or other platforms National Instruments GPIB interface hardware and their Windows drivers must be installed in both the remote LBA PC computer and the local or controlling PC B 1 3 VILibraries If you checked the Install Remote Capab
281. rtment Frame Grabber not found LBA PC set to Off Line mode Your LBA PC frame grabber card is either not installed or not working The LBA PC application program will complete loading but the software will be forced to the Off Line mode This means you can only view files and perform Post Processing of data from and or to data files Check to see that your Frame Grabber card is properly installed Contact the Spiricon Service Department for further assistance Not a valid LBA PC data file You are attempting to load a file that is not in a format that the LBA PC can recognize See loadable file types 2 3 Optional Equipment Optional equipment can include the following items License Multi user site software license Adapter 4 Camera adapter Digital Camera adapter Camera Selected camera specify type Interface cable BNC cable Camera manual if supplied by camera manufacturer Camera power supply if supplied by camera manufacturer Computer PC compatible Pentium or equivalent Attenuator Model LBS 100 BA VIS NIR or BB beam attenuator 2 4 Connections This topic describes the Camera Control upper 9 pin D sub female and Trigger I O lower 9 pin D sub male connectors on the LBA PC rear panel The schematic shown below describes the circuits on these connectors See the Specifications section for the respective drive limits of these signals Operator s Manual 24 LBA PC 2 4 1 Camera Power If your camera is a low po
282. s 3D The Reference beam alone will appear in the display It will be displayed in whatever Beam Color choice was selected 3 2 7 7 5 Current Reference 2D You must have both Cursors and Cursor Profiles enabled for this feature to operate The Current minus the Reference beam will appear in the display A second profile drawn in Lt Gray will appear in the display This profile is a projection of the Current beam All projections are made from the Cursor positions 3D The Current minus the Reference beam will appear in the display It will be displayed in whatever Beam Color choice was selected 3 2 7 7 6 Current Reference 2D You must have both Cursors and Cursor Profiles enabled for this feature to operate The Current plus the Reference beam will appear in the display A second profile drawn in Lt Gray will appear in the display This profile is a projection of the Current beam All projections are made from the Cursor positions 3D The Current plus the Reference beam will appear in the display It will be displayed in what ever Beam Color choice was selected Note In all of the above negative energy results will always be drawn in dark gray The results computations are only for the Current beam The displayed image resulting from adding or subtracting reference frames is not saved in the frame buffer however these images can be printed 3 2 7 8 Set Reference Source The Set Reference Source edit control allows you to sele
283. s from Windows Explorer or by double clicking the data file name If you have not already started the LBA application using the double click method will start it automatically These Drag and Drop shortcuts will work on all Data Frame formats However the current camera configuration must match the camera configuration of the data file that you are attempting to load If you Drag and Drop a data file that contains multiple records all the frame records will be loaded into the frame buffer up to the maximum size of the buffer For example If you Drag and Drop a file with 20 records and your frame buffer is sized at 10 frames then only the first 10 records in the data file will be loaded To perform a Drag and Drop open Windows Explorer Highlight the data file s that you want to load With the Mouse cursor over the file name press and hold down the left mouse button while dragging the highlighted files to the LBA PC application 3 1 2 File Save As You can save or append data frames in the frame buffer to disk files All data files saved by the LBA PC will have a Ib3 4 5 7 file name extension Data files can contain one or more frames of data Each frame of data is called a Record Embedded in each Record is all the information necessary to accurately reproduce the original frame Pixel scale Camera type Zoom and Pan location energy and Ultracal values etc are saved within each Record Operator s Manual 34 LBA PC 3 1 2 1 S
284. s Height s and Top Hat results are displayed as processed digitizer values Any entry other than zero will immediately appear as the Total Operator s Manual 130 LBA PC energy results The Units entry will determine the energy units that will appear behind the various energy displays i e Peak mw cm2 etc If you are using a Drawn Aperture without an Auto Aperture then the Total Energy is the amount of energy inside the Drawn Aperture If you are using an Auto Aperture with or without a Drawn Aperture then the Total Energy is the amount of energy inside the Auto Aperture Thus An Auto Aperture takes precedent over a Drawn Aperture 6 7 Percent in Aperture If you place a Drawn Aperture onto the beam display the percentage of the total energy of the frame that lies inside of the Drawn Aperture will be computed If an Auto Aperture is present then the value will represent the total energy contained within the Auto Aperture If no aperture is present then this result will show 100 Auto Aperture takes precedent over a Drawn Aperture 6 8 Peak and Min These are the Peak and Minimum energy density values in the displayed frame or within the Drawn or Auto Aperture if present The Minimum value will most often be negative and is therefore not meaningful except as an indication of the amount of noise present in the video signal Auto Aperture takes precedent over a Drawn Aperture 6 9 Peak Location This is the first
285. s are applicable to both newly input frames from the frame grabber card and to recorded frames that are being Post Processed Below this panel you can also select the source for reference frames Set Reference Source Current Frame v Figure 22 When enabled the precedence of all processing and post processing operations are as follows lowest number occurring first 1 Ultracal Processing can not be post processed Gain Correction Gamma Correction 2 3 4 Frame Summing 5 Frame Averaging 6 Reference Subtraction 7 Convolution Although Ultracal is a processing step it is important to note the following e Ultracal processing of newly acquired video is not an option in the dialog above e Ultracal processing must be enabled from the main screen Menu bar Operator s Manual 64 LBA PC e Ultracal processing cannot be a part of a post processing operation Gamma Correction is also a type of processing Gamma Correction is controlled from the Camera dialog box as it relates to a specific camera s characteristics Gamma correction can be part of a post processing operation 3 2 4 6 Frame Summing pz Click on this item if you want the LBA to sum frames Specify the Number of Frames that you want to sum into each frame placed in the frame buffer Frames are always summed in the order that they are input Frame summing can be used to increase the apparent size of low level signals Fixed pattern noise will unfortunately grow linearly
286. s are available One is Whole Beam and the second is X Y or Major Minor aligned The Whole Beam choice computes an X Y axial aligned fit to all of the data The aligned choices perform two separate line fits using just the data that passes through the centroid along the X Y or Major Minor axes See Gauss Fit in Chapter 6 for additional details Elliptical Gauss Fit Whole Beam e _ Top Hat Data Figure 25 3 2 6 7 Top Hat Check on the Top Hat box to cause the Top Hat results to be displayed Top Hat results include Mean StdDev Std Mean Min Max Top Hat Factor Effective Area and Effective Diameter You must choose one of the three methods that determine how the Top Hat results are computed These choices and their affects are e Data This method will include all data above the Clip level If you are using 4 Sigma or one of the Knife Edge beam width methods the Clip level is forced to 80 of peak e Area Aperture Only available if an Aperture is present This method will restrict the calculations to all data inside the Aperture The clip level is only used to compute Effective Area and Diameter and has no effect on the other results e Line Aperture Only available if an Aperture is present This selection causes two separate Top Hat results to be computed along the orthogonal axes of the Aperture The clip level is only used to compute Effective Area and Diameter and has no effect on the other results Notice
287. s been selected The Spiricon supplied camera power cable will have the integration circuits prewired into the cable The only thing required to enable multiple frame integration is to set the Integration value to a number greater than 1 This number represents the number of frame periods that the camera will use for each frame of output video 5 4 Digital Camera Operations The largest growing segment of the camera market involves a rapid increase in the numbers and types of digital cameras available for both commercial and scientific uses As a result most of our recent efforts in camera testing and evaluating have involved digital cameras Most all RS 422 and RS 644 LVDS digital cameras can be interfaced to any of Spiricon s new LBA 7XXPC D digital option frame grabbers The only major limitation has to do with the size of the image that can be captured This limitation is impacted by the throughput of the frame grabber and the pixel clock and video frame format of the camera In most cases this impact is limited to a reduction in the frame size or frame resolution that can be reliably acquired from the camera The Spiricon supplied camera configuration files will take these limitations into account and will adjust the image size or resolution to insure stable operation The following section will discuss some of the operating features often seen in modern digital cameras and how those features may or may not be used with the LBA PC software
288. s command If you want the data file to be loaded from a particular path then send the path with the file name LDD configuration LDD Value Description LAN Name of file to load If no extension i e no period then LB3 4 5 7 is appended to data and reference frames GAI is appended to gain frame files Maximum 256 characters default filename from last load or save data command StartRecord an Number of frames to write Operator s Manual 218 LBA PC Type Value Description HI 1 to n n is the number of records in the file NumberRecords I 0 all records up to frame buffer size 1 ton n is the size of the frame buffer forced to 1 when StartFrame 1 StartFrame I First frame saved 1 gain frame 0 reference frame 1 to n n is the size of the frame buffer default current frame Replace true replace If the camera or the camera resolution stored in the file do not match the current configuration then the LBA PC must replace the current camera or change the resolution before the frame can be loaded Either of these changes results in clearing the frame buffer i e all current frames are discarded If the pixel scale stored in the file does not match the current pixel scale then the pixel scale will be set to the value in the file false do not replace If the camera or camera resolution stored in the file do not match then an error is generated forced to false when StartFram
289. s different from the current configuration then the frame buffer will be flushed and all current frame data will be lost If FrameBufferSize or NumberFrames specified is less than the current configuration then frames at the end of the frame buffer will be discarded CAM configuration CAM Key Type Value Value Description REN CAM Lo MN name Maximum 256 characters EN Full frame video sample rate Maximum value depends on camera 1 Full 1x 0 1x 1 2x 2 4x 3 8x 16x NumberFrames3 Ge Number of frames in frame buffer Sync Source L Camera sync source 0 Genlock 1 Digital PixelBits I Number of digitized bits pixel Available only when Sync Source is set to Digital Operator s Manual 225 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 E Fa 8 to 15 PixelHScale Horizontal pixel scale Forced equal to vertical pixel scale if SyncSource is genlock PixelVScale4 E Vertical pixel scale PixelUnits Pixel scale units display 0 none 1 um 2 mm 3 cm 4 m 5 in 6 mils 7 mrad Gamma Camera gamma P e 1 to 10 0 os Invert image enable if camera is fitted with a lens A 5 2 3 CAP set capture configuration CAP configuration CAP Value Description CaptureMethod Capture Method 0 continuous 1 single 2 block 3 live CaptureInterval I Frames between captures 1 to 100000 BlockLength Number of frames to capture in block mode 1 to 100000 Op
290. s scroll bar to the left the scale expands A Vertical Scroll Bar is also provided This bar will allow you to bring into view Buckets that may extend higher than your display resolution will accommodate Operator s Manual 115 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 4 7 Shortcuts using the Mouse A number of shortcuts are available that allow you to access some of the dialog boxes without going through the menu drop downs These involve placing you mouse cursor into a region of a child window and then clicking either the right or left mouse button These shortcuts methods are described below 4 7 1 4 7 2 4 7 3 4 7 4 4 7 5 4 7 6 4 7 7 Shortcut to the Computations Dialog Box Double left click in the Results window OR Single right click to bring up a Shorthand Results selection pop up window This pop up will allow you to enable or disable the individual results items plus provides a quick way to Reset the Statistics results and also a method to save the current results to the Clipboard Shortcut to the Beam Display Dialog Box Double left click in the Beam window Shortcut to the Capture Toolbar Dialog Box Double left click in the Capture Toolbar Shortcut to the Capture Dialog Box Double right click in the Capture Toolbar Shortcut to the Beam Display Toolbar Dialog Box Double left click in the Display Toolbar Shortcut to the Beam Display Dialog Box Double right click in the Display Toolbar Shortcut to th
291. se directions over the beam intensity profile Where d The 4 Sigma beam width 0 The standard deviation of the beam intensity Operator s Manual 132 LBA PC The standard deviations are derived from the variances of the energy distributions and are equal to the standard deviations squared The variances are dur duy 2 Ste eS Ley 012424 0 3Y ZY 7 2 2420 oy Oo Where Z the intensity of the pixel x and y are the coordinates of the centroid Only beam propagation factors based on beam widths and divergence angles derived from the second moments of the energy density distribution function will allow one to predict how a beam will propagate Other definitions of the beam widths and divergence angles may be used but they must be shown to be equivalent to the second moment definitions for computing the correct beam propagation To make an accurate measurement of the beam widths with the LBA PC you must aperture the beam inside a Drawn or Auto Aperture The aperture must be approximately 2x the size of the beam The Auto Aperture feature of the LBA PC will automatically provide such an aperture under most operating conditions It can be used in combination with a Drawn Aperture if needed If your beam size is already equal to about 1 2 the beam display window then you can usually get by without drawing an aperture just be sure to center the beam in the window 6 11 2 Knife Edge Method Beam widths are com
292. size and that size is set to the maximum imager dimensions that the Spiricon frame grabber can reliably capture This can vary from camera to camera based upon the pixel clock rate and other image framing characteristics unique to each camera design Hardware zooming steps involve dividing the horizontal and vertical pixel counts by 2 and then rounding to the next even value when the results come out odd This rule applies whenever the resolution is set to either Full 1x or 1x If the zooming begins at a resolution less than 1x say 4x zooming steps will first cause the resolution to increase from 4x to 2x to 1x whereupon the first rule of dividing by 2 will then take over 4 4 2 Soft Zooming Soft Zooming unlike the above Hardware Zoom does not affect your data acquisition frame size or resolution Soft Zooming only impacts the magnification of the displayed image To initiate a Soft Zoom Double right click inside the Dark Gray box Observe that a smaller Light Gray box now appears and that your beam display image has been magnified You can continue to Soft Zoom in by Double right clicking until your image is magnified to 16x15 pixels To Soft Zoom out Double right click outside of the Light Gray box Each soft zoom increases or decreases the image magnification by a factor of 2x The center of the Soft Zooming action will be the intersection point of the Cursors If the Cursors are turned Off the zoom center will be about the center of th
293. so PAN CaptureSize LI frame width and height CaptureResolution L 1 Full 1x 0 1x 1 2x 2 4x 3 8x 4 16x Operator s Manual 252 LBA PC MEME EnergyOfBeam Key S calibrated energy of beam entered in Computations dialog EnergyOfFrame raw frame total equivalent to EnergyOfBeam mar ct S4 C L 0 j 1 mj 2 uj 3 nj U pj 5 w 6 mw EnergyUnits A 1 ultracal was on but capture location frame size or resolution did not match 0 ultracal off gt 0 ultracal subtracted 1 reference subtract was on but capture location frame size or resolution did not match H 0 reference sub off S up to 256 characters WriteProtect B 1 cannot overwrite this frame A 5 4 8 LOC go to local When the LOC message is sent or when the LBA PC goes from remote to local via the REN line then local control is restored equivalent to password lockout being disabled 1 reference sub subtracted 1 gain correct was on but capture location frame size or resolution did not match 0 gain correct off 1 gain correct multiplied Operator s Manual 253 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 When in local control mode any remote logging LOG or synchronization SYC is disabled or cannot be enabled The remote logging state is stored in the configuration Remote logging is automatically re enabled when the LBA PC is returned to remote mode and the file name is FRM RDD or RDR LO
294. so figure into the rate calculations For example if you are averaging 8 frames then the acquisition time will increase by the amount of time that it takes to acquire and average 8 frames of data The following examples are assuming that no frame Averaging or Summing is taking place and that all other overhead operations occur faster that the resulting acquisition rates 5 2 1 Programming the Capture Interval In Continuous Block and Live Video Capture Methods the Capture Interval value will determine the data acquisition rate With the Single Shot Method this value becomes a delay count that determines the number of frames that will elapse from the time you click Start until a single frame is acquired The capture interval interacts with the Trigger Type and Trigger Interval settings in the following ways 5 2 1 1 With Trigger Type set to CW The frame rate of the camera and the Capture Interval will determine the capture rate Operator s Manual 122 LBA PC Example With the Capture Interval set to 10 and a 30 Hz frame rate camera the capture rate will be 3 fps 5 2 1 2 With Trigger Type set to Trigger Out The frame rate of the camera and the Trigger and Capture Intervals will combine to determine the capture rate Example With the Capture Interval set to 10 and the Trigger Interval set to 5 the captures will occur once for each 50 frames If your camera has a 25 Hz frame rate the capture rate will be once every 2 seconds
295. solution is x1 x2 x4 etc the LBA PC samples every pixel every other pixel every 4th pixel etc If the current frame size is 64 X 60 then the area covered by the capture window is actually 64 X 60 128 X 120 256 X 240 etc To determine the actual size of the capture window multiply the capture size by the capture resolution The upper left corner of the pan window must be placed on an integer multiple of the capture resolution starting from the upper left corner of the pan window limit For example if the left edge of the pan window limit is at 112 and the capture resolution is x8 then the left edge of the pan window must be placed at 112 120 128 etc Illegal values will be truncated to the next lower integer multiple The following describes how to center the pan window in the detector In this example the horizontal center of the detector is at 112 744 2 428 and the vertical center is at 324512 22272 The frame data size is 128 X 120 The capture resolution value is 1 so we must multiply the data size by 21 2 Therefore the actual size of the capture window is 256 X 240 To put the capture window center at the detector center we subtract half the capture window size 428 128 300 and 272 120 7152 Host sends PNW END LBA PC sends PNW UpperLeft 112 32 Lowerkight 744 512 END Host sends PAN END LBA PC sends PAN CaptureLoc 112 32 CaptureSize 126 120 CaptureResolution 1 END Host sends PAN X 300
296. sors can also used to fix the Manual Origin Location See 3 2 7 4 3 2 7 3 Cursor Orientation The Cursors can be orientated to align with either the X Y axial directions or with the computed Major Minor axial directions Operator s Manual 76 LBA PC Note You must have the Elliptical computations turned on to permit the Major Minor orientations to operate correctly otherwise it will revert to the X Y operating mode 3 2 7 4 Origin Location The beam display window will always have an X Y origin from which all other positional data will be referenced A red dot visible in the Pan Zoom window will indicate where the Origin location is set The operator can choose one of four defaults or manually locate the origin The four defaults are e Detector UL The origin will be the upper left hand corner of the camera detector as referenced in the display Pan Zoom window e Detector LL The origin will be the lower left hand corner of the camera detector as referenced in the display Pan Zoom window e Window UL The origin will be the upper left hand corner of the Pan Window as referenced in the display Pan Zoom window e Window LL The origin will be the lower left hand corner of the Pan Window as referenced in the display Pan Zoom window Note In the first two selections the Origin is absolutely referenced to the camera detector and thus the Pan window moves over the coordinate system just as the cursors do In the last two selections
297. ss Fail Out 26 Password eet E 98 PDF operators manual 20 Peak and Mim 131 Peak Location 92 131 Percent in Aperture sassari 131 Percent of Energy ceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 134 Operator s Manual 280 Percent of Peak ANEREN 134 Pixel Scale cioe ee tre pis 56 Pixel Unitsz 1o ceo Enter Eed eis 56 Power Requirements line Voltage eterne 13 power COnNSUMPptiOn ssssssessserrrsrrrserrens 13 Power Supply er uz EEN 25 a E TE 44 67 number Of Trames 45 SQUUP E 45 PROCESSING 52 nec See 64 convolution eeeeeeeeennnnnnn 66 frame average eseese 65 frame summing sss 65 gain correction eeeeeeeeeeees 65 reference subtraction 65 Pyrocam I digital option 29 ET DE 27 Operation 27 E Hl de E 28 synchronization eeeeeeeeeeeene 29 Pyrocam IIT iie o mers 18 ReadMe txt miai 20 Reference Subtraction 65 REMOT ce tree te ded re ee Een ERR 156 Restore Configuration 37 182 Results Display Window 109 Rotate ge DE iii ici ritiro 84 display window eee 114 Scroll Date iocus iet eroi c 85 Safety dene iere 14 Save COlOI EE 96 COopflguration 21 37 uL 34 dialog Be eere Feste tere 35 exporting data sesesese 35 uoc 45 er TR 39 new camera D
298. stem icon e Select the Hardware tab e Click on the Device Manager button Operator s Manual 22 LBA PC e Click on the Sound video and game controllers listing e If the LBA PC frame grabber was detected and the device driver was not loaded you will see a category called Unknown in the edit box listing of the Device Manager If this occurs double click on the Unknown icon You should see an entry called PCI Card This indicates that the device driver was not properly installed To correct this problem re install the LBA PC software e If you did not see the Unknown icon then Windows did not detect the LBA PC frame grabber card Check to see that your frame grabber card is properly installed Sometimes PCI card slots are defective so you might also try another slot if all else seems to be in order If this device driver is not found the LBA PC program will complete loading but the software will be forced to the Off Line mode This means you can only view files and perform Post Processing of data from and or to data files Device Drive vX XX detected LBA PC requires vY YY LBA PC set to Off Line mode If your current device driver version does not match the current LBA PC version you will get this message This may occur if you have upgraded your LBA PC application but continue to use an old device driver Normally this should not happen as the installation will install a new device driver version with each upgrade The LBA P
299. struments GPIB board and the Tutorial Description of the HP IB published by Hewlett Packard 10 2 Hardware and Software Requirements The LBA PC is a 32 bit application that runs only under Windows 2000 and Windows XP The LBA PC remote works only with National Instruments GPIB boards and corresponding software The LBA PC has been tested with NI 488 2M software v2 1 The National Instruments NI 488 2M device driver for Windows 2000 and XP supports the following National Instruments GPIB boards e AT GPIB TNT PnP e AT GPIB TNT e PCI GPIB e PCI GPIB e PCMCIA GPIB e PCMCIA GPIB If you have an older board you may be able to obtain an upgrade through National Instruments Contact National Instruments for more information Updates of the software are available on their web site at www ni com 10 3 Remote GPIB Setup LBA PC uses the interface name GPIBO and expects Send EOI at end of Write for all communications To configure the NI 488 2M software for use with LBA PC follow these steps 1 Click on Start Programs National Instruments NI 488 2 Explore GPIB 2 Under My System Devices and Interfaces right click on GPIBO and select Properties 3 Set the Primary and Secondary drop down boxes to set the GPIB address to be used by the LBA PC 4 Click on the Send EOI at end of Write button and make sure all other buttons in the Termination Methods section are clear Operator s Manual 177 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001
300. system benchmarks 3 1 12 Implications of Combining Logging Statistics Post Processing and Block Capture Before reading this topic you should be familiar with the operating modes available for e Results Logging Section 3 1 11 e Statistics Results Section 3 2 6 10 e Post Processing Section 3 2 4 1 e Block Capture Section 3 2 4 1 Logging Statistics Post Processing and Block Capture each have built in control features that can limit their respective run lengths The limiting factors can be either manual intervention by an operator a programmed number of frames or a programmed time limit Note Post Processing and Block Capture do not allow for a programmed time limit In addition Post Processing and Block Capture are mutually exclusive Operator s Manual 42 LBA PC Because of the flexibility in setting control options it is possible to set conflicting control parameters Therefore it is essential that these various conflicts be resolved by a prioritized control scheme Of course a perceptive operator can avoid all of these possible conflicts Nevertheless owing to the complexity of these features setup errors are almost a certainty Hint To avoid a conflict in the above features never set more than one of the above to use either a Time limit or a Frame count at any one time 3 1 12 1 Combinations using Logging Statistics and Block Mode The following control priorities are in effect when any of the above features a
301. t Nos 5 418 562 and 5 440 338 Notice We recommend that you allow both the camera and the LBA to warm up and reach thermal equilibrium before performing calibrations One hour is usually sufficient as a warm up period at least two hours if your camera is a tube type If the ambient air temperature is changing then you might want to periodically recheck the background energy levels to make sure they haven t been significantly altered 6 2 Numerical Formats The LBA PC uses an 8 10 12 or 14 bit A to D converter to digitize incoming video Each video frame is then processed and placed into a block of memory called a frame buffer During processing the LBA converts all pixel intensities to a signed 16 bit fixed point value Processing can consist of Ultracal baseline correction Reference Subtraction Gain Correction Gamma Correction Frame Summing Frame Averaging and Convolution The 16 bit format is used for all processing except frame averaging and frame summing Frame averaging and summing uses a 32 bit format during the summing operation but returns a 16 bit result after the division This 16 bit format is the basis upon which all computational results are performed and all data files are created Operator s Manual 128 LBA PC 6 3 Beam Presentation Affects Results Effective beam presentation is essentially an attempt to improve accuracy by increasing the signal to noise property of the digitized data Since the camera and the digiti
302. ted in this dialog box The first four panels Capture Camera Trigger and Processing are analogous to the items listed in the Capture dialog box The panel labeled Other offers you the following two tools that are associated with File menu items and a third item that is not available anywhere else Operator s Manual 66 LBA PC 3 2 5 1 Logging ci This switch will launch you into the Data amp Results Logging dialog box 3252 Print M This switch will cause the selected print options to be printed on your configured printer You will not get a chance to reconfigure your printer or print setup item when you click this tool so be sure that you have set your options up in File Print Setup before you click here 3 2 5 3 Write Protect oy This tool can be used to write protect any frame in the frame buffer Before clicking on this tool be sure that the frame number that you want to write protect is indicated in the frame counter Frame m The frame counter is located in the lower right corner of the main window When a frame has been write protected its location in the frame buffer can not be overwritten When new data is flowing into the frame buffer write protected locations will be skipped To un write protect a location bring the frame number up again and note that the write protect button is still in the depressed position click the tool a second time This tool s button will show in the un depressed state to indicate that
303. ted pixel intensity Z Uncorrected pixel intensity value g Gamma P 255 1023 4095 16383 32767 Notice Be sure of your Gamma correction value If necessary run a response curve on your camera Standard published gamma values are usually averages for particular tube types and may not always be adequate for obtaining the desired accuracy Also be wary of gamma values less than I published for CCD cameras These values are usually approximations obtained by using two piece linear fits to an exponential gamma curve Whenever possible use CCD cameras which are settable to a gamma of 1 Operator s Manual 145 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 6 27 Convolution Convolution algorithms in the LBA PC may take on a number of forms some of which might not fit the exact description that is to follow In the broadest sense convolution refers to a general purpose algorithm that can be used in performing a variety of area process transformations One such general purpose algorithm will be described here For the purpose of this description the best way to understand a convolution is to think of it is a weighted summation process Each pixel in an image becomes the center element in a neighborhood of pixels A similarly dimensioned convolution kernel multiplies each pixel in the neighborhood The sum of these products is then used to replace the center pixel Each element of the convolution kernel is a weighting factor called a convolution coefficient
304. teed all properties correspond to the same frame of data After return from this event property values will change Please note LBA PC does not collect data when minimized and will not send OnNewFrame events while minimized During an event LabVIEW records the event in a queue then returns Below is a table of various ways to use this event LBA PC HoldNewFrame Discussion Capture Mode Single Shot N A The LBA PC stops after collecting one frame Property values will not change until the LBA PC receives another Start command Continuous FALSE The LBA PC will continuously update property values By the time a VI can read property values after the OnNewFrame event the values have changed Use this configuration if you do not care which frame the properties relate to Continuous TRUE The LBA PC will set property values that correspond to the same frame of data These values will remain until you reset NewFrame to FALSE OnNewFrame vi contains an example of reading property values after receiving an OnNewFrame event All example VIs are packaged in LbapcActivex IIb which can be found in the ActiveXXExamplesVLabVIEW directory under the LBA PC installation directory In Visual Basic you can read any desired properties during this event All properties correspond to the same frame of data After return from this event property values will change 9 3 3 2 OnOperationComplete This event fires when Ultra
305. tents Register bit 7 Power on bit 6 User Request unused bit 5 Command Error flag set when host sends a command that is not recognized bit 4 Execution Error flag set when the host commands the LBA PC to perform a task which is preempted by other conditions e g some configurations cannot be set while running path does not exist illegal file name etc bit 3 Device Dependent Error flag unused bit 2 Query Error flag data in output queue has been lost bit 1 Request Control unused bit 0 Operation Complete flag set when Ultracal done only if Ultracal successful AutoExposure done Generate Gain done Block Capture done Logging done Post Process done only if stop not caused by error Statistics done Print done Service Set mask to enable service request Request notification of corresponding bits in STB Enable STB Status Byte Returns Status Byte contents bit 7 unused bit 6 Master Summary Status MSS set whenever an unmasked status condition exists STB amp SRE Operator s Manual 213 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 mm Rearing All other IEEE 488 2 common commands are not recognized by the LBA PC and will return a Command Error Operator s Manual bit 5 Event Status bit ESB set whenever an unmasked event status condition exists ESR amp ESE bit 4 Message Available bit MAV set when a response to a query is available in the output queu
306. ter language In LabVIEW user interfaces and displays are called Panels and a program is represented by a Diagram Programming is accomplished by drawing diagrams A panel and its diagram are linked together In the Panel of Basic Results vi there are five major groups of objects e Run Stop button e UltraCal button e AutoCal button e Energy spin control Unit list and Set button e Results display array For each group we have built a SubVI to manipulate the process e Run Stop vi e Do Ultracal vi e Auto Aperture On Off vi e Set Energy And Units vi Operator s Manual 272 LBA PC e Get Basic Results vi These VIs are easy to understand if one has some experience in LabVIEW programming The processing sequence is controlled by the Error In and Error Out connection chain That means a function unit is processed earlier if it is closer to the starting Error In connection In other words we use the Error Out to Error In connection sequence to link each operation in the process Since the results interface should be always active unless users terminate the process we have used a while loop to keep it active B 3 2 Beam Viewer vi This program allows you to control cursor and pan and zoom as well as basic operations As in the previous example Beam Viewer vi utilizes some of the same SubVI s already discussed while introducing image data transfers and a local display VI However th
307. th as it expands in the far field region Before using this method be sure that your measurements will be made in the beam s far field region and the size of the beam does not grow larger than your camera s ability to contain it Divergence results will be computed in the X and Y aligned axes of the beam if Elliptical results are disabled or for Major and Minor axes beam orientations if Elliptical results are enabled Notice We strongly recommend that you do not use the Elliptical mode when using the Far Field method but rather rotate your camera to bring the axes of the laser into X and Y alignment Position the camera in the beam path to acquire a first or Reference beam width It is assumed that this first sample will be the one nearest the beam waist and thus the smaller sample width Next move the camera a distance further from the beam waist Note the distance the camera has traveled as the Separation distance The Divergence result is computed as follows W W divergence 2 we E d ES Where Wp The width of the beam at the Reference nearer to the waist location We The width of the beam at the Current further from the waist location S The separation distance between the two beam width sample locations 6 22 Histogram The LBA PC can produce a fluence Histogram of the currently displayed frame of data Each bar in the display represents a fluence Bucket Each Bucket describes a range of quantized fluence values
308. that are newly acquired e Empty frames will not be commented e Write Protected frames will be commented e Comments will appear as shown below ry Your Comment Here Figure 47 Note The comment line will say Live Frame if the Capture Method is set to Live Video mode Comments assigned prior to entering Live Video mode will be restored when the Live Video mode is terminated Operator s Manual 108 LBA PC 4 2 2 Shortcuts In the Beam Window Double left click to bring up the Beam Display dialog box 4 3 The Results Display Window This window will display the computed results based upon the selections enabled in the Computations dialog box You can minimize maximize or resize this window The top title bar in this child window will indicate the Frame number associated with the current result values With Statistics results disabled the Results Window will fit nicely along the left side of the child display area 12 Frame 1 Current Units Quantitative 90 10 Knife Edge otal 418 258 768 in Aperture 86 51 2 856e 03 4 800e 02 4 108e 03 8 840e 02 3 736e 03 2 788e 03 7 571e 03 7 385e 03 7 478e 03 3 809e 03 2 192e 03 1 114e 04 1 451e 04 2 455e 03 1 456e 02 Correlation 0 943 Figure 48 With Statistics enabled you will either need to use the horizontal scroll bar to bring the statistical results into view or you will need to maximize and or resize this window Operator s Manual 109 LBA PC Doc No
309. the application you want to connect to The AppInfo property can be used to determine which application to connect to If you do not care which LBA PC application you connect to or have only one LBA PC then call the Open method 1 The LBA PC is not available 0 OK 1 Other initialization error 9 3 2 4 Start This method is identical to clicking Start on the LBA PC This method has no effect if the LBA PC is already collecting frames of data If Ultracal is not complete the LBA PC cannot start If there is any other problem the LBA PC will not start and will display an error message on the LBA PC display This method returns the following 1 The LBA PC is not available 0 OK 1 Load configuration error Operator s Manual 170 LBA PC 9 3 2 5 Stop This method is identical to clicking Stop on the LBA PC This method has no effect if the LBA PC is stopped This method immediately cancels the Ultracal operation Any previous Ultracal is retained 9 3 2 6 Ultracal This method is identical to clicking Ultracal on the LBA PC This method has no effect if a previous Ultracal operation is not complete If the LBA PC is collecting frames of data the Ultracal cannot start If there is any other problem the Ultracal will not start and the LBA PC will display an error message on the LBA PC display This method returns the following 1 The LBA PC is not available 0 OK 1 LBA PC is collecting frames of data The Ultracal operati
310. the backslash character V has special meaning known as an escape sequence To specify a single backslash you must send two For example c spiricon ba300pc data b3 Ze interpreted by the LBA PC as c spiricon ba300pc data b3 Although other escape sequences are recognized there is no reason ever to use them with LBA PC The current default values for the start record number of records and file name can be retrieved with the SDD command The following example describes how to write all the frames from the frame buffer into a file called tophat Ib3 Host sends SDD FileName c spiricon ba 300pc tophat b3 StartFrame 1 NumberFrames 0 END 10 6 2 5 RDR Read Results The results displayed in the Results window can be downloaded by using the RDR command This query command has three optional parameters Labels Text labels from left hand column of results window Values Computations results from center column Units Applicable units from right hand column The Labels parameter specifies whether you want to download the text in the left most column of the results windows This text is a label describing the value in the center column The Values parameter specifies you want to download the numeric values displayed in the center column of the results window The Units parameter specifies you want to download the text in the right most column of the results window This text is a label describing the units th
311. the display and may disrupt GPIB communications Operator s Manual 247 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Cannot Load file because all frames are write File Load protected File camera does not match current camera File Load File record header does not match current File Load configuration C o You have changed the Camera All frame data will camera dialog be lost Press OK to continue You have changed the Resolution All frame data camera dialog will be lost Press OK to continue You have reduced the number of Frames Frames camera dialog at the end of the buffer will be lost Press OK to continue X1 Camera Buffer Resolution is not allowed with camera dialog this style camera and Trigger In Out or Video Trigger Trigger In Out and Video Trigger are not allowed capture dialog with this style camera in X1 Camera Buffer capture toolbar Resolution You must stop running before exit Hardware configuration is not a 256 color palette File does not exist File Load File name contains illegal characters File Load File Save As Directory path does not exist File Load File Save As Hardware configuration has less than 8 MBytes of memory available Operator s Manual 248 LBA PC Message Error in directory path or file name Start record Yd is beyond the end of the file 9old Start record plus number records ld is beyond the end of the file Yold This is not a valid
312. the drawn bar represents the depth to which the Bucket is filled Zero count is on the left The horizontal scale can be magnified with the Horizontal Scroll Bar the Vertical Scroll Bar allows you to bring into view Buckets that may extend higher than your display resolution will accommodate 6 23 Statistics Statistical results can be obtained for any enabled computational item The Statistical results are Mean Standard Deviation Maximum and Minimum The number of samples used in computing each result is indicated on the top line of the results The computation of the Mean and Standard Deviation are described in the equations below for the Mean A s n l n Where S Mean XS Sum of the samples n Number of samples Operator s Manual 143 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 for the Standard Deviation Where o Std deviation n number of samples A S s sum of the square of the differences between the mean and each sample The Maximum and Minimum are just the largest and smallest values encountered in the samples 6 24 Frame Averaging The signal to noise ratio of the digitized data can be improved by using Frame Averaging The amount of the improvement is roughly the square root of the number of frames being averaged The LBA PC can average a maximum of 256 frames for at best a 16 times improvement of the signal to noise ratio The amount of improvement is also limited by the noise content of your c
313. the frame is no longer write protected Therefore the only way to determine which frames are write protected is to cycle through the frames and simultaneously view the up down state of the write protect button Caution If you change the frame buffer resolution all write protected frames and their contents will be deleted 3 2 6 Computation Energy calibration select results items The Computations dialog box is where you select the types of numerical results that you want to have calculated and displayed You can also calibrate the beam energy here Note The term energy shown in Italic will be used to represent both Energy and Power 3 2 6 1 Energy of Beam The Energy of Beam edit control item lets you calibrate the LBA to the energy of your laser You must measure the energy of your beam using an external measuring device then enter the energy value here Next select the appropriate units in the Energy Units item The value entered must be the total energy of the frame currently displayed For accurate results the beam must be completely contained inside the current Hardware Zoom Pan window and an Ultracal operation should be performed prior to collecting the frame used for energy calibration Operator s Manual 67 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Energy of Beam 0 000e 00 Energy Units mai Y Figure 23 If you enter an Energy of Beam value of 0 zero the energy related results items such as Total energy Peak flu
314. the uploaded file is different than the current configuration then the energy calibration is set to the value in the file and the file is stored in the frame buffer If the replace parameter is false and the energy calibration is different then the energy calibration is not changed and the file is stored in the frame buffer NOTE You must send exactly the binary data received in a previous FRM command or exactly the binary data read from a LB3 4 5 file written by LBA PC The following example describes how the host uploads a data file to frame 33 Because the replace parameter is not specified the file will be stored only if the camera and camera resolution match the current configuration The pixel scale will not be changed The file contains 124 928 bytes Host sends FRM Operator s Manual 192 LBA PC FrameNumber 33 6124928 DAB DAB END The following example describes how the host uploads a data file to frame 25 The replace parameter is specified so the camera or camera resolution will be changed if the settings in the file are different than the current configuration The pixel scale and energy calibration will also be changed to the file value if different than the current configuration The file contains 124 928 bytes Host sends FRM FrameNumber 25 Replace 1 6124928 DAB DAB END 10 6 2 3 LDD Read Data File To read a data file stored on the LBA PC computer you must send the LDD command with optio
315. this cable between the camera and connector J1 J3 on LBA 3 4 500 frame grabbers the upper 9 pin D sub female This cable will usually provide power to the camera as well as permit the LBA PC to control a camera s electronic shutter if it has one Cameras that derive power from a source other than the LBA PC will not usually be supplied with this cable If you are using the 4 camera option any additional cameras must be powered from an external source To provide control of the shutter of any additional cameras a special cable must be made that connects all of the shutter inputs of the cameras in parallel If you plan on using the automatic camera sequencing you may also need a special cable to synchronize genloc the cameras Operator s Manual 26 LBA PC 2 6 Special Setup for Pyrocam I Operation You must use special setups if you want to successfully interface your Pyrocam I with a Model LBA PC frame grabber system It is strongly recommended that you first become familiar with the operating characteristics of both your Pyrocam I and LBA PC before attempting to operate them together To operate your Pyrocam I with a model LBA 300PC or a LBA 400 500 708 710 712 714PC without a digital camera option see section 2 12 1 To operate your Pyrocam I with model LBA 500PC D or a model LBA 7XXPC D with the digital camera option see section 2 12 2 2 6 1 Pyrocam I with Non Digital LBA PC s LBA 300 400 500 708 710 712 714PC w o digital came
316. tion Operator s Manual 234 LBA PC TotalMin F Total energy minimum 1e12 to 1e12 TotalMax Total energy maximum 1e12 to 1e12 PercentMin F Percent of energy minimum 0 to 100 Percent of energy maximum 0 to 100 PeakFluence Min Max test enable PeakFluenceMin F Peak fluence minimum p Ewe PeakFluenceMax F Peak fluence maximum s ee ValleyFluence Min Max test enable ValleyFluenceMin F Min fluence minimum ef keen ValleyFluenceMax F Min fluence maximum ef keng 0 CentroidXLoc F X location in world coordinates INN C AN CentroidYLoc F Y location in world coordinates s ieee CentroidRadius Maximum distance from CentroidXLoc CentroidYLoc in world coordinates 0 to 1e12 MajorMin F Major axis minimum in world coordinates 0 to 1e12 MajorMax F Major axis maximum in world coordinates 0 to 1e12 Operator s Manual 235 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 MinorMin F Minor axis minimum in world coordinates 0 to 1e12 MinorMax F Minor axis maximum in world coordinates 0 to 1e12 DiameterMin F Diameter minimum in world coordinates 0 to 1e12 DiameterMax F Diameter maximum in world coordinates 0 to 1e12 A 5 3 3 pass fail elliptical configuration Key Value Description fRoundness BB Tun Max test Min Max test enable o RoundnessMin Roundness minimum mr RoundnessMax Roundness maximum opm Orientation Orientation 18 Orientation test enab
317. tion then the camera type resolution or both are changed to match the file and the file is stored in the frame buffer Note that the frame buffer is cleared when the camera type or camera resolution are changed e If the replace parameter is false and the camera type or camera resolution does not match the current LBA settings then an execution error is reported and the file is discarded e Ifthe replace parameter is true and the pixel scale of the file is different than the current configuration then the pixel scale is set to the value in the file and the file is stored in the frame buffer Operator s Manual 193 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 e If the replace parameter is false and the pixel scale is different then the pixel scale is not changed and the file is stored in the frame buffer e If the replace parameter is true and the energy calibration of the file is different than the current configuration then the energy calibration is set to the value in the file and the file is stored in the frame buffer e If the replace parameter is false and the energy calibration is different then the energy calibration is not changed and the file is stored in the frame buffer The file name is optional and is a string describing the drive directory file name and extension If no drive or directory is specified then the current Windows drive or directory is used In Windows the current drive and directory can be changed at any time by a
318. tion then multiple frame integration can be performed when using certain select digital cameras This feature is not usually required for laser beam analysis because most lasers are much too bright when compared to camera sensitivity However outputs from some fiber optic systems and laser diodes at certain wavelengths can be hard to detect at normal integration times To overcome this problem we have added a camera integration control This feature is limited to Digital cameras that maintain frame line and pixel clock signals during the non readout periods These cameras further constrain the integration times to multiples of the normal frame integration period Furthermore these cameras provide a TTL input signal that allows the LBA frame grabber to control the integration timing Operator s Manual 123 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Note Do not confuse this type of integration control with features on high end digital cameras that have externally programmable integration controls These later types of cameras are programmed by issuing serial commands to the camera s internal microprocessor See section 5 4 for a discussion of these types of cameras 5 3 1 Integration Operation The Integration control is found in the Options Capture dialog box If you purchased a digital camera from Spiricon that is compatible with external integration capabilities then the Integration edit control will become operational when the matching camera type ha
319. tions do not change Since most cameras tend to be a little drifty we recommend that you Operator s Manual 129 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Ultracal every 10 to 15 minutes or whenever you think your camera may have strayed This drift can be observed as changes in the background noise image Un illuminated areas will appear as gray and dark violet almost black random noise If the background starts to look too gray then the baseline is drifting negative If too dark then the baseline is drifting positive Note These colors apply to the Continuous 128 color palette They change depending upon the palette selection 6 5 Clip Level What is the Clip Level and how is it used The clip level is a processed energy pixel value Only those pixel values that exceed the clip level are used in computing the following results e Beam Widths if Percent of Energy or Peak methods are selected e Centroid Location e Elliptical beam Orientation e Top Hat Mean Standard Deviation Min and Max when in Data mode only e Effective Area Depending upon the Beam Width Method the clip level value is determined as follows e With the 4 Sigma and Knife Edge methods and with the Top Hat results disabled the LBA totals the pixel energy values in descending order until it finds the pixel which causes the sum to exceed 86 5 of the total energy value The raw energy value of this pixel becomes the clip level e With the 4 Sigma and Knife Edge methods
320. tions if Elliptical results are enabled The Focal Length divergence method provides a means for finding the far field beam divergence at any point in the beam propagation path As shown below the calculation performed by the LBA is quite simple however the optical setup must be done with great care The user to suit his particular application must provide the optic The focusing optic must be large enough to accommodate the input beam without introducing diffraction effects You can use either refracting or reflecting focusing optics but in either case you must place your camera s detector at the exact focal length of the optical element The Divergence result is based upon the focused spot size as described in the equation below 1 W divergence tan f Where W The width of the focused spot at distance ffrom the optic Operator s Manual 141 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 f The focal length of the imaging optic at the wavelength of the laser If you are not already versed in the theory behind the Focal Length method we recommend the following reference document Laser Far Field Beam Profile Measurements by the Focal Plane Technique by G W Day and C F Stubenrauch NBS Technical Note 1001 March 1978 This publication is no longer in print A copy can be obtained from the Spiricon Sales or Service department 6 21 2 The Far Field Method This method is based upon the actual measured increase in laser beam wid
321. tor s Manual 41 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 If you use the Frames or Time method the logging operation will automatically Stop when the Frame count or the Timer values have run out To protect the log file from inadvertent additions use the above described terminate method to secure your log file When Logging is Frames or Time limited the Rate display will indicate the number of frames to go Rate 4990 or the time remaining 3 1 11 4 Pass Fail Filter You can filter out certain frames of data from being appended into your log file by using the Pass Fail Filter in conjunction with choices made in one or more of the Pass Fail menu items For example if you only wanted to log frames that exceeded a certain minimum amount of Energy choose Passed Frames Only Then in the Quantitative Pass Fail dialog box under Total Energy check Minimum and enter the minimum value of the energy that you require to pass this filter in the space provided Refer to the section on Pass Fail Menu Operation for more details on how to use the Pass Fail options How fast will logging operate The rate at which frames can be processed and logged to disk depends upon such variables as how many and what types of calculations are being performed what type of logging is enabled how fast is your disk computer system etc We recommend that you run tests to find out how fast your system can log various forms of data and results and use those as your
322. tracal operation was successful and is OPERATING RED Ultracal processing has been DISABLED because something caused the calibration to become invalid Hint Just because the Ultracal enunciator is GREEN it doesn t mean that all is well Camera baselines drift with temperature and over time Therefore it is a good practice to re Ultracal just prior to collecting important data 3 6 1 How to Ultracal e Block your laser beam from the camera e Point and Click the Ultracal menu item e After a few seconds observe that the Ultracal Enunciator turns GREEN e Unblock your laser beam from the camera Operator s Manual 102 LBA PC 3 6 2 What Disables Ultracal Ultracal will become DISABLED if certain data collection conditions that were in effect when the Ultracal operation was executed are no longer in effect In all cases these conditions are the result of an operators change to the spatial acquisition settings The DISABLED condition will occur if you make changes to e The Hardware Zoom e The Hardware Pan location e The Camera Type or Resolution setting e The Camera Electronic Shutter setting e The Video Gain and or Black Level settings 3 7 AutoExposure Menu Action Item This menu item is only enabled when certain types of cameras are connected These cameras must be fitted with a remote controllable electronic shutter From versions 4 XX only analog cameras with remotely controlled shutters such as Pulnix TM 74
323. ue Description EnergyOfBeam F Beam energy Will calibrate the currently displayed frame to this value EnergyOfFrame4 F Raw frame total at time EnergyOfBeam is entered EnergyUnits L Calibrated energy units 0 j 1 mj Operator s Manual 229 Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 LBA PC 9 pw a P Quantitative results enable BeamWidthMethod Beam width method 0 4 sigma 1 knife edge 90 10 2 knife edge 3 energy uses ClipHigh 4 peak ClipLow 1 to 99 lt ClipHigh ClipHigh 1 to 99 gt ClipLow Multiplier F Knife edge multiplier 1 to 10 Ellip B Elliptical results enable Gauss B Gauss fit enable GaussMethod L Gauss fit method 0 whole 1 x y or major minor Tophat B Tophat enable TophatMethod L Tophat method 0 data 1 area 2 line Divergence B Divergence enable Divergence Method Divergence method 0 focal length 1 far field FocalLength F Lens focal length ee e Separation F Far field separation en rem XreferenceDiameter F X reference diameter n omm YreferenceDiameter Y reference diameter Operator s Manual 230 LBA PC EE 0 continuous 1 frames 2 time Frames Number of frames to collect if statistics method is frames 1 to 100 000 Time T Amount of time to collect statistics if statistics method is time 0 0 1 to 999 59 59 A 5 2 5 DIS set display configuration StatisticsMethod Statistics method DIS configuration
324. ul and is OPERATING RED Gain Correction processing has been disabled because something caused the usage of it to become invalid 3 1 7 1 How to generate gain Before clicking on the Generate Gain item you must e Allow the camera to warm up to a normal operating temperature e Align your laser beam with the camera and set the correct Zoom Pan Camera type and resolution etc settings e Block all light from the detector and perform an Ultracal e Uniformly illuminate the camera detector to an intensity level that is about 60 to 90 of saturation Now click File Generate Gain e After a few seconds observe that the Gain Correction enunciator turns Green e Remove the uniform illumination and re apply your laser beam to the camera Note It is highly recommended that you perform a Save Config and a Save Gain As operation in conjunction with each Generate Gain operation This will insure that you can restore the settings to the configuration that will allow the Gain Correction to operate correctly 3 1 7 2 What is Gain Correction The gain correction algorithm will compute a mean pixel intensity value and then supply a correction factor for each pixel that will correct it to the computed mean If your camera has dead or seriously defective elements you should not attempt to use or operate with Gain Correction 3 1 7 3 What Disables Gain Correction Gain Correction will become DISABLED if certain data collection
325. urn to the Camera dialog box Click OK Your new camera is now active and saved as a camera cam type file Note You may now also want to perform a Save Config operation so that when you restart the LBA PC application this new camera setup will automatically be restored Otherwise you must return to the Camera dialog box and select this camera type each time you restart the LBA application Notice A Restore Config operation will occur each time the LBA application is started Camera type selections will only occur when you the operator consciously unconsciously but not sub consciously make a choice Which ever of the above actions occurs last is the one that is controlling the Camera dialog box settings 3 2 3 3 Resolution and Frame Size The Resolution value specifies how finely the incoming video image is to be digitized This will also determine the maximum frame size when viewing an un zoomed image The Resolution value is not related to the resolution performance of your camera The smaller the Resolution value the higher the resolution of the display and the greater the number of pixels that will be contained in the un zoomed image Consequently each frame will take more memory in the frame buffer and on disk and it will take longer to process the frames thus the system will run slower The Resolution value will control how much memory is allocated for each frame This figure does not change dynamically as you zoo
326. uss Fit 135 6 14 Whole Beam fit equations 136 6 15 X Y or Major Minor line fit equations 136 6 16 Deviation of Fit 137 6 17 Correlation of Fit 137 6 18 Top Hat 138 6 18 1 Top Hat Mean and Standard Deviation 139 6 18 2 Top Hat Minimum and Maximum intensities 139 6 19 Top Hat Factor 139 6 20 Effective Area and Effective Diameter 141 6 21 Far Field Divergence Angle computations 141 6 21 1 The Focal Length Method 141 6 21 2 The Far Field Method 142 6 22 Histogram 142 6 23 Statistics 143 6 24 Frame Averaging 144 6 25 Frame Summing 144 6 26 Gamma Correction 145 6 27 Convolution 146 Operator s Manual 8 LBA PC Chapter 7 DIGITAL CAMERA OPTION 7 1 Digital Camera Option 7 2 I O Connections 7 3 Digital Camera Advanced Timing Setup 7 3 1 Transfer Mode 7 3 2 Scan Mode 7 3 3 Vertical Start 7 3 4 Vertical Size 7 3 5 Horizontal Start 7 3 6 Horizontal Size 7 4 Digital Camera and Ultracal Operation Chapter 8 REMOTE OPERATION 8 1 Remote Operation 8 2 How to Disable Remote Operation Chapter 9 ACTIVE X 9 1 Introduction 9 2 Using ActiveX 9 2 1 Microsoft Excel 9 2 2 Visual Basic Visual Studio 9 2 3 LabVIEW 9 3 Properties Methods and Events 9 3 1 Properties 9 3 1 1 9 3 1 2 9 3 1 3 9 3 1 4 9 3 1 5 9 3 1 6 9 3 1 7 9 3 1 8 9 3 1 9 9 3 1 10 9 3 1 11 9 3 1 12 9 3 1 13 9 3 1 14 9 3 1 15 9 3 1 16 9 3 1 17 9 3 1 18 9 3 1 19 9 3 1 20 9 3 1 21 9 3 1 22 9 3 1 23 AppInfo Running OperationComplete Operation
327. ust replace the current camera or change the resolution before the frame can be loaded Either of these changes results in clearing the frame buffer i e all current frames are discarded If the pixel scale stored in the file does not match the current pixel scale then the pixel scale will be set to the value in the file If the energy calibration stored in the file does not match the current energy calibration then the energy calibration will be set to the value in the file false do not replace If the camera or camera resolution do not match then the LBA PC will issue an error and the frame is not loaded The pixel scale and energy calibration values will not be changed A 5 4 7 FST frame status information FST lt configuration gt FST FrameNumber f Returns FST configuration Operator s Manual 251 Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 LBA PC Key FrameNumber I frame number 1 gain frame 0 reference frame 1 ton n is the size of the frame buffer default current frame EM PRIDDY 0 CameralInput L camera 1 1 camera 2 2 camera 3 3 camera 4 PixelBits number bits in raw pixel PixelHScale horizontal pixel scale PixelVScale vertical pixel scale PixelUnits L 0 none 1 um 2 mm 3 cm 4 m 5 in 6 mils 7 mrad gamma correction performed on frame e pp PixelBitsFraction I number of bits in fraction a CaptureLocation LI X Y upper left corner of capture area see al
328. v e 52 number of frames eeesee 35 rl E ts 96 reference data 37 Save As dialog D0X nennen 34 Save Configuration uus 182 Set Reterence NEEN 37 Setup plum 21 configuration files 22 digital camera sees 152 LBA PC eOulDIment en 15 password NEEN 98 print SEU aede exis 45 67 printer Setup 2 enero eere tegi rn 87 NFC L iieeest reete orae nth nerui nag ee 27 remote GIRA 177 restore configuration 37 save configuration essssss 37 setup printer button 87 SetU EXE inan eter etes 20 Shorteuts docens 109 110 116 Soft Zooming aerei 113 Start Stop ls a cde reete cene 21 102 Statistics eo sire creto 74 143 COntpuOoUs n 74 displayom 109 frames tese ENEE 74 leit TE 110 Mte E 74 w logging amp capture 42 System Requirements 11 20 Temperature affects on results 128 Operating 5 reete tes 13 Storage ecc aTa ai 13 Tilt amp e CC 114 TOD Hate rene tte oh NC 71 effective diameter 141 et 139 WII 101 mean amp standard deviation 139 min amp max intensities 139 pass Tail 7 inea exei 100 Tot Hat effective area ENEE 141 Total GN VE 130 Trigger EE 62 Connections
329. vi contains an example of receiving and displaying a picture using the OnNewFrame event Utility and example Vie are packaged in LbapcActiveX llb which can be found in the Activex Examples LabVIEW directory under the LBA PC installation directory Please note you must have the LabVIEW Full Professional or Developer Development System in order to use OnNewBitmap vi Operator s Manual 163 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 In Visual Basic pass this property to the BitmapPicture function in BitmapPicture DLL The output from this function is a StdPicture which can be used anywhere a picture is allowed BitmapPicture DLL can be found in the ActiveX Examples Visual Basic directory under the LBA PC installation directory An example Visual Basic project LbapcActiveXExample vbp shows you how to declare and call the BitmapPicture function This project can be found in ActivexX Examples Visual Basic directory under the LBA PC installation directory 9 3 1 15 FrameNumber This property is the frame number as displayed in the lower right corner of LBA PC 9 3 1 16 Results This property provides all of the LBA PC results except statistics in a one dimensional array of doubles packaged as a Variant The results are loaded into the array in the following order 1 Quantitative Elliptical Gauss Fit whole beam Gauss Fit major axis Gauss Fit minor axis Top Hat whole beam Top Hat major axis Top Hat mi
330. wer CCD style that runs on 12Vdc then it may be powered from connector J1 J3 on LBA 3 4 500 frame grabbers pin 6 12Vdc and pin 5 gnd Caution Do not attempt to power more than ONE camera from the LBA PC 2 4 2 Shutter Controls Signals The electronic shutter control signals are provided on as SHUT1 SHUT2 and SHUT3 These are TTL level drive outputs The Logic is positive true The shutter settings are listed in the 8 lines of the Shutter drop down edit control found in the main menu Options gt Camera gt Advanced dialog box The labeling of the shutter lines can be user modified to match the settings of a particular camera The line locations however always correspond to the following TTL output drive levels Shutter Line SHUT2 Edit control J1 pin 7 33 on 3 4 500 J3 on 3 4 500 J3 on 3 4 500 Top line 1 L0 0 0 L2 S 0 0 pj 1 Lo 03 0 J 13 0 Lo 4 0 17 J j J 1 p ome Frame Grabber Pin out Figure 5 Operator s Manual 25 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 2 4 3 Trigger Out Connector J2 J5 on LBA 3 4 500 frame grabbers pin 3 is the Trigger Out signal This signal is factory set to output 5Vdc pulses You can change this signal to 12Vdc level pulses by moving Jumper E1 E4 on LBA 3 4 500 frame grabbers to bridge pins 2 3 Note Jumper El E4 controls the output signal level for both Trigger Out and Pass Fail Out Jumper posit
331. will have either 3 or 4 PCI slots Select an unused PCI slot and remove the rear filler bracket associated with that slot See figure below Operator s Manual 15 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Note Ifyou purchased the optional 4 camera adapter or the optional digital adapter then make sure that the slot immediately to the left viewed from the front of your PC of the above PCI slot is also empty and remove its rear filler bracket also PCI bus slots Figure 1 Carefully plug your LBA PC frame grabber card into the PCI slot Make sure that it is fully seated in the PCI connector Secure the end bracket with the screw that held in the filler plate See figure below Figure 2 Operator s Manual 16 LBA PC The optional adapters use the rear panel opening but do not plug into any of the PC expansion slots Rather it is provided with a short ribbon cable that plugs into the frame grabber card See figures below Slide the adapter into the rear opening and plug its cable into the frame grabber card Secure the adapter bracket to the rear panel with the screw that held in the filler plate Four Camera Option Figure 3 Operator s Manual 17 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 Digital Camera Option Figure 4 Replace the cover of your computer Restore the AC power to your computer Note The location of the connectors may vary depending upon which frame grabber model
332. will yield good high resolution images in CW mode 5 1 3 Type Trigger Out Two types of Trigger Out operations are provided They are the runs Always and the only While Running choices With the While Running selection the triggering of the laser is switched on and off by clicking Start Stop If you choose the runs Always option then the trigger output pulses will run continuously and independent of data collection 5 1 3 1 Trigger Interval The rate at which trigger output pulses occur is dependent upon the frame rate of the camera and the specified Trigger Interval value Specifying an interval of 1 will cause the output trigger to run at the camera s frame rate this corresponds to the fastest possible rate A value of 2 will produce an output pulse on every second video frame A 3 will pulse on every third frame and so on Example If you are using a 60 Hz frame rate camera and desire to produce an output pulse once each second program a 60 into the Trigger Interval Should you need a high rep rate trigger select a camera with as fast a frame rate as possible The frame rate of interlaced cameras is one half the field rate A Trigger Interval value of 1 will cause an output pulse to occur once per camera frame Thus an interlaced camera running at a Operator s Manual 119 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 field rate of 60 Hz can cause a trigger pulse to output at a 30 Hz rate A non interlaced camera running at a frame rate of
333. with Spiricon s Integration control feature discussed in section 5 3 5 4 1 4 Digital Camera Triggering Digital cameras can have a number of external triggering capabilities Most of these have been found to be compatible with the LBA application We suggest you test these features to determine if they achieve the desired results If you are triggering a camera with a period longer than a frame time then some cameras will stop outputting frame syncs to the frame grabber If Operator s Manual 125 LBA PC Doc No 10654 001 Rev 4 10 this period exceeds 3 seconds then the Video sync enunciator may turn RED Under this condition this signal can be ignored The next frame should be captured when the next trigger pulse triggers the camera 5 4 1 5 Digital Camera Gain and Black Level Control Most digital cameras have programmable gain and black levels These settings often have default values that are not optimum for laser beam analysis Usually the gain is too high and the black level is too low The gain is set high because most camera makers want to achieve good picture taking sensitivity The black level is set low to increase dynamic range For laser analysis the best gain setting is the lowest value that just allows the digital output to reach all ones but before the camera imager goes non linear The black level should be set just high enough to insure the absence of any zero pixels when the imager is dark Be sure to allow a little h
334. y beam eere 89 LBA PC stability inc bins eeeesesss 94 stability peak amp centroid 91 stability zooming ses 92 Interlaced Camera 119 Knife Edge Method 133 LADVIEW ws erdt edet neni 160 265 ICH 21 57 Live Video ie niece ete md ae 59 Load COINS sist esta eo ed ev edente ee Tex E PR Gd 97 configuration eese 37 et IER 33 data file 5 in ete te 32 drag amp drop frame ssssssesssssrrrrrrrreeesrnes 34 TAME zu oc o tr E eee dta eue 33 galli asa re etri ente tera 39 Keele Uu DT 39 67 MethOd E 41 pass fail ler 42 Main Window sses 106 Memory allocation n insur iirimaa 54 consumption esee 53 EONS cb E 24 requirements eeeeeeeeeeneee 11 ler CIE 55 with pyrocam I eeneenenne 28 National Instruments 156 Non interlaced Cameras 119 Numerical Formats uk 128 Off Line Mode eeeennneenennmnne 23 Operator hazards i tea 14 Optional Equipment 12 24 Pan Zoom Display Window 111 PariDlDig DE 113 PassS Fail 22 3 2 0 1 atar 98 dialog boxyes 98 99 divergence n asino aiei aai 101 ClliptiCal E EE ts 100 EU 100 QUANTILIVE ainiin inania 99 top hatis oiiire Tantus 100 aI Ee EE A P ATTE TT 99 Pa
335. y different imaging results depending upon which Beam Colors you have selected To activate Z Axis Scaling select a magnification factor greater than x1 A good value to practice when using this feature is a conservative x2 When Z axis scaling is activated a vertical scroll bar will appear along the right edge of the beam display window You can use this scroll bar to slide the expanded viewing range up or down the full Z axis scale In 3D mode it is easy to see where the expanded display region boundaries end and the outside region begins To assist you in the 2D display mode a pair of dashed lines will indicate the magnified range in the Cursor Profiles Of course to see these indicators you must have the Cursor Profiles turned on and the Cursors passing through the beam profile Hint Use Z Axis Scaling with Beam Color set to Color Continuous 2D Cursor Profiles turned on and Cursors set to Centroid Operator s Manual 78 LBA PC Another Hint A good time to use Z Axis Scaling is when you need to view the low energy down in the wings of your laser beam Kick the scaling up to x8 leave the scale scroll bar at the bottom of the slider and maybe add in a little video gain and some frame averaging to quiet the noise You ll be amazed at what you can see 3 2 7 7 Beam Display You can change how your beam is displayed without actually changing how it is processed nor how it is stored in the frame buffer With these choices you can visually co
336. zing process primarily fix the noise level most of our efforts will concentrate on increasing the signal content Always try to optimize your beam s amplitude into the camera s dynamic operating range Whenever possible use external optical attenuation or a camera with electronic shutters to bring the beam s peak signal levels into the upper half of the video signal s dynamic range If optical attenuation leaves you with low signal amplitude you can use the LBA s video gain control to restore some of the loss Note Increasing gain also increases noise so use it sparingly Changing the gain setting also affects the Black Level so set the gain level first and then use Ultracal to readjust the Black Level and calibrate to the new noise conditions Always use the highest possible hardware zoom magnification level that will contain all of the beam s energy If your beam intensity is low and or covers only a small fraction of the display window use an aperture to eliminate the background energy noise in the wings Use external optical magnification if your beam begins to approach only a few pixels in width It takes at least 10 pixels to get a reasonably good beam width measurement 6 4 Manual Background Energy Nulling Manual Background Energy Nulling is NOT recommended Use the Ultracal calibration feature instead Do not place any confidence in the computed results until you have nulled the background energy levels using Ultracal The
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
View User Manual PDF 取扱説明書 はじめに ご注意 警 告 安全に関するご注意 注 意 User manual EPS front derailleur 手書きちらし作成マニュアル Tektronix 21 User's Manual Advantek Networks AWN-54HP-ORT Wi-Fi Ethernet LAN Black, Silver router 取扱説明書 - Bose Manual de instrucciones - Privado Planeta Huerto M - PASO Sound Systems Products Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file